ISBN : 9788989499145 93530 deemed to satisfy ISO 19338:2014

Korea Structural Concrete Design Code 2012

Korea Concrete Institute

ISBN : 9788989499145 93530 deemed to satisfy ISO 19338:2014

Korea Structural Concrete Design Code 2012

Published by
Structural Concrete Design Code Committee

Korea Concrete Institute (KCI)

Room 1009, The Korea Science & Technology Center, New Building,
Teheran-ro 7-gil 22, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 06130, Rep. of Korea

July 2017

Copyright Ⓒ 2017, Korea Concrete Institute. All rights reserved. This material may
not be reproduced in whole or part, unless
permission in writing is obtained from the
Korea Concrete Institute (KCI).
 Preface to English Version of KCI Code 2012

This document is English version of the Korea Structural Concrete Design Code published in 2012.
“KCI Code 2012” is the abbreviation for the Korea Structural Concrete Design Code 2012. The KCI Code
2012 was prepared by Structural Concrete Design Code Committee of the Korea Concrete Institute (KCI).
This code is one of the national codes issued by the Korean government, which is deemed to satisfy ISO
19338:2014.

The first Korean standard for concrete structures was “Korea Concrete Standard Specifications” published
by the Korea Society of Civil Engineers (KSCE) and the Korean government in 1962, which was for civil
structures and contained two parts: Design Part and Construction Part. In 1972, “Korea Concrete Building
Code” was published by the Architectural Institute of Korea (AIK). These two standards were revised
several times and finally unified to the KCI Code in 1999. Since 1999 version of KCI Code, the Korea
Concrete Institute has been dealing with two Korean standards for concrete structures: Structural Concrete
Design Code and Standard Concrete Construction Specification.

The KCI Code 2012 provides minimum requirements for the materials, design, and detailing of concrete
structures, and also provides methods to evaluate the strength of existing concrete structures. This code
addresses structural systems, structural elements, and connections including plain, reinforced, prestressed,
cast-in-place, precast, and composite concrete structures.

The Structural Concrete Design Code Committee of the KCI decided to establish subcommittee on
English version of Korea Structural Concrete Design Code 2012 in 2014. Its task is to translate the KCI
Code 2012 written in Korean to English. It needed utmost efforts to translate the description in the
original Korean version. Although effort have been made to translate the original Korean version to
English as close as possible, some discrepancies may exist. If there were any discrepancy between the
English version and the Korean version, it is recommended to refer to the original Korean version.

Translation of the Code required a lot of time and dedication as well as technical expertise. As Chair
of the subcommittee and the Committee, I would like to express the most sincere gratitude to all the
members of the subcommittee on English Version of KCI Code 2012, especially Professors Jae-Yeol Cho,
Han Soo Kim, Do Hyung Lee, Kihak Lee, Hong-Gun Park, Seong-Tae Yi, who put a lot of effort and
spared valuable time in proof reading as review subcommittee members and coordinators of the
subcommittee.

Financial support for this work was provided by the Korea Evaluation Institute of Industrial Technology.
The Korean Agency for Technology and Standards also supported this project. The supports are gratefully
acknowledged.

Jae-Hoon Lee
Chair, Subcommittee on English Version of Korea Structural Concrete Design Code 2012
Chair, Structural Concrete Design Code Committee of the Korea Concrete Institute
List of Subcommittee on English Translation of
Korea Structural Concrete Design Code 2012

Jae-Hoon Lee, Chair

Jae-Yeol Cho, Secretary

MEMBERS
Soo Won Cha Kwang Myong Lee
Chang-Sik Choi Seong-Cheol Lee
Kyoung-Kyu Choi Byeong Cheol Lho
Seongcheol Choi Do Young Moon
Sokhwan Choi Chang Kyu Park
Sungchul Chun Hong-Gun Park
Bong Seok Jang Inyeol Paik
Jin-A Jeong Geun-Taeck Song
Han Soo Kim Myoungsu Shin
Woo Seok Kim Soobong Shin
Do Hyung Lee Chongku Yi
Jaeha Lee Seong-Tae Yi
Kihak Lee

REVIEW SUBCOMMITTEE MEMBERS

Jae-Yeol Cho Kihak Lee
Han Soo Kim Hong-Gun Park
Do Hyung Lee Seong-Tae Yi
 Contents

Chapter 1 General Requirements

1.1 Introduction 10
1.2 Scope 10
1.3 Design Considerations 10
1.4 Definitions 11
1.5 Design Documents 26
1.6 Reference Codes 27

Chapter 2 Materials
2.1 General 31
2.2 Materials 33
2.3 Concrete Quality 39
2.4 Testing of Steel Reinforcement 43

Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

3.1 General 44
3.2 Loads and External Forces 47
3.3 Strength 47
3.4 Structural Analysis 49

Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

4.1 General 55
4.2 Crack 56
4.3 Deflection 56
4.4 Fatigue 61
4.5 Durability Design 62
4.6 Repair, Retrofit and Maintenance 67

Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

5.1 General 68
5.2 Fabrication of Reinforcement 68
5.3 Placing Reinforcement 70
5.4 Minimum Concrete Cover Thickness 72
5.5 Transverse Reinforcement for Members 74
5.6 Special Detailing of Reinforcements for Columns and Connections 76
5.7 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement 77
5.8 Requirements for Structural Integrity 78
Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load
6.1 General 80
6.2 General Design 83
6.3 Additional Requirements for Design of Flexural Members 85
6.4 Limitations on Compression Members 88
6.5 Design for Slender Compression Members 89
6.6 Compression Member Under Biaxial Bending 93
6.7 Compression Members Supporting Slab System 94
6.8 Bearing Strength 94

Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.1 General 95
7.2 Shear Design Principles 101
7.3 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete 102
7.4 Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement 105
7.5 Design for Torsion 107
7.6 Calculation of Torsional Moment Strength and Details of Reinforcement 109
7.7 Shear Friction 113
7.8 Deep Beams 114
7.9 Shear Design of Brackets and Corbels 115
7.10 Shear Design of Walls 116
7.11 Shear Caused by Transfer of Moment to Column 118
7.12 Shear Design of Slabs and Footings 118

Chapter 8 Development and Splices

8.1 General 126
8.2 Development of Reinforcement 128
8.3 Development of Welded Wire Reinforcement 133
8.4 Development of Prestressing Strand 134
8.5 Detail in Development of Reinforcement 134
8.6 Splices of Reinforcement 137
8.7 Splices of Welded Wire Reinforcement 139
8.8 Special Requirements for Splice of Column Reinforcement 140

Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

9.1 General 142
9.2 General Design 144
9.3 Serviceability of Flexural Members 145
9.4 Loss of Prestress 146
9.5 Flexural Member 147
9.6 Statically Indeterminate Structures 149
9.7 Design of Compression Members 150
9.8 Design of Slab 151
9.9 Prestress Anchorage Zones 152
Chapter 10 Slab Systems
10.1 General 155
10.2 One-way Slabs 157
10.3 Design of Two-way Slabs 158
10.4 Direct Design Method 160
10.5 Equivalent Frame Method 164
10.6 Reinforcement Details in Two-way Slabs 167
10.7 Openings in Slab Systems 169

Chapter 11 Walls
11.1 General 171
11.2 General Design 172
11.3 Minimum Reinforcement Ratio 172
11.4 Design of Walls 173
11.5 Nonbearing Walls and Grade Beams 176

Chapter 12 Footings
12.1 General 177
12.2 General Design 177
12.3 Footing Design 178
12.4 Transfer of Force at Base of Column, Wall or Pedestal 179
12.5 Special Footings 180

Chapter 13 Retaining Walls

13.1 General 182
13.2 General Design 182
13.3 Structural Analysis 183
13.4 Structural Details 184

Chapter 14 Arches
14.1 General 185
14.2 General Design 185
14.3 Structural Analysis 185
14.4 Structural Details 187

Chapter 15 Rahmens
15.1 General 188
15.2 General Design 188
15.3 Structural Details 190

Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

16.1 General 191
16.2 General Design 191
16.3 Structures Using Precast Concrete Wall Panels 192
16.4. Precast Concrete Segmental Bridge 195
16.5 Quality Control of Precast Concrete Products 196

Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

17.1 General 197
17.2 General Design 198
17.3 Design of Composite Concrete Flexural Members 199
17.4 Design of Composite Compression Member 201

Chapter 18 Shells and Folded Plate Members

18.1 General 204
18.2 General Design 204
18.3 Reinforcement Details 205

Chapter 19 Structural Plain Concrete

19.1 General 208
19.2 General Design 209
19.3 Strength 210
19.4 Walls 212
19.5 Footings 213
19.6 Pedestals 214
19.7 Precast Concrete Members 214
19.8 Seismic Design and Plain Concrete 215

Chapter 20 Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

20.1 General 216
20.2 Inspection and Testing 216
20.3 Input Data for Evaluation 217
20.4 Evaluation by Analysis 218
20.5 Evaluation by Load Test 218

Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.1 General 220
21.2 Special Specifications 223
21.3 Flexural Members of Special Moment Frames 226
21.4 Special Moment Frame Members Subjected to Flexural and Axial Force 227
21.5 Joints of Special Moment Frames 230
21.6 Special Structural Walls and Coupling Beams 232
21.7 Structural Diaphragms and Trusses 236
21.8 Foundations 239
21.9 Frame Members Not Designated as Part of The Seismic-force-resisting System 241
21.10 Requirements for Intermediate Moment Frames 242

APPENDIX I Strut-and-Tie Models

I.1 General 245
I.2 Design Procedure of Strut-and-Tie Model 247
I.3 Axial Strength of Struts 248
I.4 Tensile Strength of Ties 250
I.5 Strength of Nodal Zones 251

APPENDIX II Anchoring to Concrete

.1 General 253
.2 General Design 259
.3 General Requirements for Strength of Anchors 260
.4 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading 262
.5 Design Requirements for Shear Loading 266
.6 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces 270
.7 Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thicknesses to Prevent Splitting Failure 270
.8 Installation of Anchors 271

APPENDIX Crack Control

.1 General Considerations 272
.2 Exposure Environment 274
.3 Crack Control 275

APPENDIX Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

.1 General 278
.2 Design Methods 278

APPENDIX V Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

V.1 General 284
V.2 Investigation and Test 286
V.3 Input Data for The Evaluation 287
V.4 Evaluation by Analysis 289
V.5 Evaluation by Load Test 290

APPENDIX Basic Requirements for Performance-Based Design

.1 General 294
.2 Design Principles 297
.3 Materials 299
.4 Basic Structural Elements 301
.5 Structural Analysis 303
.6 Verification of Safety Performance-Flexural moment and Axial Force 306
.7 Verification of Safety Performance-Shear and Torsional moment 307
.8 Verification of Serviceability Performance 311
.9 Verification of Durability Performance 312
.10 Verification of Environmental Performance 313

INDEX 315
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

Chapter 1 General Requirements

1.1 Introduction

This Code describes the technical requirements related to the design, construction, and maintenance of
plain concrete, reinforced concrete, and prestressed concrete, in order to ensure the safety, serviceability,
and durability of concrete structures.

1.2 Scope

(1) This Code provides general and basic requirements for the design, construction, and maintenance of
concrete structures.

(2) Concrete structures shall be designed according to the strength design method provided by this
Code. When the requirements specified in this Code have conflicts with other codes regarding
design, construction, and material properties, the requirements in this Code shall have priority over
other codes.

(3) In the strength design of structural concretes, all members of reinforced and prestressed concrete
structures shall be designed, using the load factors and strength reduction factors specified in
Chapter 3. Further, the serviceability and durability requirements specified in Chapter 4 shall be
satisfied.

(4) In the design of concrete structures such as roads, railroads, harbor, water and sewage, plants,
bridges, underground structures, nuclear power plants, tanks, water storage tanks, storage houses,
and chimneys, this Code shall apply to the structures in principle unless specific design codes,
which are better suited to address the behaviors and functions of the facilities, are adopted.

(5) When special investigations are performed, structural design is permitted to be performed based on
the results of those investigations rather than the requirements of this Code. In this case, the design
validity shall be verified to satisfy the performance demands specified in APPENDIX Ⅵ. When
design is based on performance experiments, the design bases shall be clearly stated addressing
variations in the material strength and structural resistance.

1.3 Design Considerations

(1) In design of concrete structures, the qualified structural engineer shall design the structures to
satisfy the safety, serviceability, and durability, by considering the structural types, the structural
behavior under the applied factored loads and service loads, material properties and composite
action, contractibility, cost, the effects on environment, and aesthetical aspects. When special design
requirements shall be fulfilled, the design shall take into account additional conditions according to
the characteristics of structures.

10
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

(2) When extreme conditions such as impact and explosion are required to be addressed in design by
the contractor or the owner, the conditions shall be considered in the design.

(3) When special fire resistance is required by the contractor or the owner, the design shall satisfy the
fire resistance requirements provided by the relevant legal fire regulations.

(4) When construction load is expected to reach the ultimate load, and the contractor or the owner
demands to address the construction condition in design, the construction stages and construction
loadings shall be considered in the design.

(5) When requirements about restorability of structures after possible damage is required by the
contractor or the owner, those conditions shall be considered in the design.

(6) When physically, chemically or biologically hazardous conditions are required by the contractor or
the owner, those conditions shall be considered in the design.

1.4 Definitions

The following terminologies are defined for general use in this Code.

· Strength reduction factor

Safety factor to account for differences between design and actual results in material strengths and
dimensions, and to address inaccuracies in member strengths and analyses.

· Rigid zone
Zone in a structure where deformation is small enough to be ignored in comparison with other zones
in the same structure, and can be considered as an undeformable solid.

· Steel core
Structural steel located at the center of
the cross-section in a composite column.

· Hook
Hooked portion at the end of reinforcing bars to increase the strength of anchorage or lap splice:
angle of the hook is usually 180°, 135°, or 90°.

· Drying shrinkage
Concrete expands under moisture condition and contracts under dry condition. Drying shrinkage
indicates contraction of a hardened concrete due to the loss of moisture.

· Boundary elements
Edges of structural wall and structural diaphragm strengthened by longitudinal and transverse
reinforcements: It is not necessary to make boundary elements thicker than the web of the wall or

11
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

the diaphragm. Boundary elements shall be provided along the edges of openings of walls and
diaphragms when required by 21.6.6 or 21.7.8.

· Lightweight aggregate concrete

Concrete containing lightweight aggregate, or sand lightweight aggregate (structural lightweight
aggregate concrete) as specified in 2.2.1.

· Factored load
Load, multiplied by the corresponding load factor, which is used to design members based on the
strength design method.

· Superplasticizer
A water reducing agent which helps in reducing unit water content necessary to maintain required
workability, and increases the flowability of fresh concrete.

· Dead load
Loads applied over the life-time of structures including weights from walls, floors, roofs, ceilings,
stairs, and immovable equipments as well as the self-weight of structures.

· Curvature friction
Friction resulting from curvature of a specific prestressing tendon profile.

· Nominal strength
Strength of a member or cross section calculated according to provisons and assumptions of the
strength design method, where strength reduction factors are not applied.

· Structural diaphragms
Structural members, such as floor or roof slab, which transmits inertial forces to the lateral load
resisting members

· Structural lightweight concrete

A concrete in which all or part of the aggregates are replaced with lightweight aggregates, and the
specified compressive strength at the age of 28 days is not less than 15 MPa, and the unit mass
under air dried condition is less than 2,000 kg/m3.

· Base of structure
Level at which the horizontal earthquake ground motions are assumed to be applied to a structure.
This level does not necessarily coincide with the ground level.

· Structural wall
Wall designed to resist combinations of axial force, shear, flexural moment, and torsional moment.
Structural wall is categorized as follows.
① ordinary reinforced concrete structural wall: Wall complying with the requirements of Chapters 1

12
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

through 17.
② ordinary structural plain concrete wall: Wall complying with the requirements of Chapter 19.
③ Special reinforced concrete structural wall: Cast-in-place wall complying with the requirements of
Chapter 3, Chapter 7, 21.2, 21.6, in addition to the requirements for ordinary reinforced concrete
structural walls.

· Structural concrete
Concrete which has specified compressive strength of not less than 18 MPa at the age of 28 days.

· Structural trusses
Assemblage of reinforced concrete members subjected mainly to axial forces.

· Bent bar
A longitudinal reinforcement bent up or down.

· Balanced reinforcement ratio

Tensile steel ratio where the ultimate compressive strain of concrete and the specified yield strength
of tensile steel are reached simultaneously.

· Column
Vertical structural member that transmits loads from the structural elements above such as roofs and
slabs to other structural elements below such as footings and foundations.

· Mechanical anchorage
Anchoring reinforcing bars or tendons to concrete by installing mechanical device at the end.

· Column capital
A portion with a enlarged cross-section, which is installed at the top of a column, to support
two-way slabs such as flat slabs or flat plates.

· Base plate
A steel plate attached to the bottom of a column.

· Prestressing tendon
Steel element such as wire, bar, or strand, or a bundle of such elements, in order to introduce
prestress force to concrete.
· Relaxation of prestressing tendon
Prestress loss which occurs in a tendon under a constant tensile strain as time passes.

· Deep beam
A beam in which the span length is not greater than 4 times of the depth, or loads are applied
within twice of the depth from its supports. (Refer to 6.3.4 and 7.8.1)

13
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Spiral reinforcement
Continuously wound reinforcing bar or wire in the form of a cylindrical helix around longitudinal
reinforcement in columns.

· Bearing wall
Structural walls which divide architectural space, and resist or transfer gravity loads replacing
columns.

· Seismic hook
A hook of a stirrup, hoop or cross tie having not less than 6 (and not less than 75 mm) extension
and a bend not less than 135 degrees: But circular hoops shall have a bend which is not less than
90 degrees.

· Duct
A circular conduit to accommodate prestressing steel for post-tensioned prestressed concrete
installation.

· Counterfort retaining wall

A reinforced concrete retaining wall which has supporting cross walls for stability and strength of the
wall on the side where soil pressures act.

· Equivalent embedment length

Embedment length of a reinforcing bar that can transfer the same stress level that is transferred by a
hook or a mechanical anchorage.

· Tie reinforcement, tie bar

Transverse reinforcing bars or wire arranged with specific spaces in order to keep the locations of
longitudinal reinforcements and resist shear forces.

· Rahmen
A structural system that consists of line members rigidly connected each other.

· Ready mixed concrete

Fresh concrete mixed at a plant where proper facilities are equipped for concrete manufacturing, and
then delivered to a site using a delivering vehicle,
· Ribbed shells
A shell structure where ribs are arranged along the rib lines and the spaces between the ribs are
filled with thin slabs or left empty.

· Lift-slab construction
Slab construction that is cast on the ground, and lifted up along columns to a designated position
after it is hardened.

14
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Buckling of outer surface

lateral buckling occurring out of the member’s plane (perpendicular to the surface including the web
of the truss or beam), when a member such as truss or deep beam is subjected to in-plane transverse
loading.

· Sand lightweight concrete

Concrete containing natural sand for fine aggregate, and lightweight aggregate for coarse aggregate.

· Moment frame
Frame where members and joints resist flexure, shear, and axial force. Moment frames shall be
categorized as follows.
① ordinary moment frame: cast-in-place or precast concrete moment frame complying with the
requirements of Chapters 1 through 17.
② intermediate moment frame: moment frame complying with the requirements of 21.2.2(3), 21.10 in
addition to the requirements for ordinary moment frames.
③ special moment frame: cast-in-place reinforced concrete moment frame complying with the
requirements of 21.2 through 21.5 in addition to the requirements for ordinary moment frames.

· Plain concrete
Structural concrete without reinforcement, or with the amount of reinforcement less than the minimum
requirement specified in this Code.

· Embedment length
Length of embedded reinforcement provided beyond a critical section for anchoring the reinforcement.

· Thin-walled tube
A virtual tube where inner portion of a cross section is assumed to be empty for the purpose of
design against torsion,

· Owner, client
An individual or a organization that commissions the design or construction of structures, as the
owner for private structures or the representative of ordering agency for public structures.

· Strut
part of a structural diaphragm used to keep continuity around an opening in the diaphragm.

· Distributing bar
Supplementary reinforcement arranged perpendicular to main flexural reinforcement in order to
distribute applied loads or control cracks.

· Proportioning strength
A target material strength to design the mix proportion of concrete,

15
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Web reinforcement
Reinforcement which is placed in the web of a member subjected to shear force, and resists
diagonal tensile stresses : It is also known as reinforcement for diagonal tension.

· Transitional cracked section : class T

One of three classes that defines the possibility of crack formation in prestressed flexural members,
where   , the extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone calculated at service
loads, is greater than  
  , and not greater than   
  , and the behavior is assumed to be
in transition between uncracked and cracked sections.

· Bonded tendon
Tendon bonded to concrete either through direct contact or using grouting.

· Bracket and corbel

A cantilever or corbel in which the ratio of shear span to effective depth is not greater than 1.

· Uncracked section : class U

A section in a prestressed flexural member, where   , the extreme fiber stress in tension in the
precompressed tensile zone calculated at service load, is not greater than  
  , so that cracking
is not expected to occur.

· Nonbearing wall
Wall not supporting external loads except its self-weight.

· Inelastic analysis
Numerical analysis for calculating deformations and internal forces considering equilibriums, nonlinear
stress-strain relationships of concrete and reinforcement, effect of cracks and long-term effect, and
strain compatibilities, etc.

· Section for torsion

An effective beam section resisting for torsion, which is monolithic or fully composite construction
with the slab. Its area includes area extended, on each side of the beam, to a distance equal to the
projection of the beam above or below the slab but not greater than four times the thickness of the
slab. Refer to 10.3.1(4).

· Torsional reinforcement
Reinforcement arranged to resist significant torsional moment in a member.

· Sway frame
A frame where lateral story displacement is not restrained. (Refer to 6.5.5(1))

16
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Service load
Various loads defined in this Code, such as dead loads and live loads, to which load factors are not
multiplied.

· Design strength
Strength of a structure or a member obtained by multiplying the nominal strength by the strength
reduction factor .

· Strip
A slab which is subdivided with a certain space in order to simplify the design of slab which is two
dimensional plate member. Refer to 10.3.1(2),(3).

· Design displacement
Total lateral displacement expected under a design earthquake load, in earthquake-resistant design of
structures.

· Design load
A factored load used for the design of a member.

· Design load combinations

Combination of factored loads specified in 3.3.2.

· Required strength
Strength of a cross section which is necessary to satisfy serviceability and safety requirements for
reinforced concrete members.

· Collector elements
A member which transmits the inertial force of a diaphragm to a lateral load resisting system.

· Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement

Reinforcement placed in order to prevent cracking which is caused by drying shrinkage and/or
temperature change.

· Lateral-force resisting system

A member or system designed to resist horizontally applied loads such as wind load or seismic load.

· Horizontal shear
Shear parallel to the axis of a member.

· Auxiliary members in shell structures

A rib or a spandrel beam which strengthens or supports a shell : Generally the supplement members
and the shell are monolithically integrated.

17
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Stirrup
Reinforcement surrounding longitudinal reinforcement to resist shear and torsional stresses in a beam,
and placed perpendicular to or at an angle to longitudinal reinforcement.

· Springing
Ends of a arch member.

· Slab plate
A plate member in which all sides are divided by columns, beams, or centerlines of walls, and axial
forces are negligible in design.

· Arch rib
Frames placed with a uniform spacing in order to strengthen an arch.

· Slenderness ratio of arch

In an arch, the ratio of the effective span of the arch to the minimum radius of gyration of the
cross section.

· Arch axis line

A axis line which connects the centroid of arch section.

· Compression strut
compression element in strut-and-tie model, which represents the resultant of a compression field in a
concrete member, where the width of the strut is uniform or enlarged at the center as a bottle shape.

· Compression-controlled section
A cross-section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at the nominal strength is
not greater than the compression-controlled strain limit. Refer to 6.2.2.

· Compressive reinforcement ratio

Ratio of the cross sectional area of compression steel to the effective sectional area of concrete.
· Buttressed retaining wall
Reinforced concrete retaining wall which has supporting cross-walls for the stability and strength of
the wall on the opposite side of the soil.

· Anchor
Embedded bolts or the relevant work in order to fix members such as pedestals and columns to a
footing or a concrete structure.

· Thin shells
A three-dimensional structure which consists of curved slabs or folded plates. The thicknesses of the
slab or plate are smaller than other dimensions.

18
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Collector
A member used to transmit inertial force or to prevent structural members such as foundations or
walls from being separated.

· Cross tie
Transverse reinforcing bars placed inside the perimeter tie of a column. They have a 135-degree hook
with at least six-diameter extension(and longer than 75 mm) at one end and a 90-degree hook with at
least six-diameter extension at the other end. The hooks shall encase peripheral longitudinal bars,
and the 90-degree hooks of two successive cross ties engaging the same longitudinal bars shall be
alternated end for end.

· Vertical load
Load acting on a structure in the direction of gravity such as dead load or live load: It is also
called gravity load.

· Offset bent bar

Bent longitudinal bars of columns above and below a joint, which is used for bar lap splice.

· Cracked section : class c

One of the classes that defines the possibility of crack formation in prestressed flexural members,
where   , the extreme fiber stress in tension in the precompressed tensile zone calculated at service
loads, is greater than   
  , and cracking is expected to occur.

· Plain reinforcement
Bar reinforcement which has a circular cross-section without blistering like ribs or lateral lugs on its
surface and is defined in KS D 3504.

· Effective depth of section

Distance measured from the edge of compression side to the centroid of longitudinal tension
reinforcement.

· Effective section area

Cross-section area defined as effective depth multiplied by effective width.

· Effective tensile force

Tensile force remaining in prestressing steel after all losses, such as relaxation in prestressing steel,
creep and drying shrinkage in concrete.

· Effective prestress
Stress remaining in prestressing steel after all losses: but, the influence of dead loads and live loads
is not included.

19
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Stress
Intensity of force per unit area in cross section of a member.

· Two-way slab
A type of slab in which flexural reinforcements in two orthogonal directions are placed in order to
resist biaxial flexural moments.

· Deformed reinforcement
A deformed reinforcing bar which has ribs and lateral lugs on its surface in order to enhance
bonding with concrete, by satisfying the requirements of KS D 3504, or the equivalent quality and
shape.

· Tension-controlled section
Cross section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at the nominal strength is
not less than the tension controlled strain limit. (Refer to 6.2.2)

· Tensile steel ratio

Ratio of the sectional area of tensile steel to the effective sectional area of concrete.

· Tension tie
Tension element in a strut-and-tie-model, which represents the resultant of a tension field, where
reinforcement or prestressing steels are placed.

· One-way slab
A type of slab which has flexural reinforcement in one direction only.

· Joist construction
Closely spaced multiple small beams supporting a slab, in which the width shall be not less than 100mm,
the depth shall not exceed 3.5 times the minimum width, and clear spacing between joist beams shall not
exceed 750 mm; When joists are arranged in two orthogonal directions, it is called two-way joist
construction or waffle construction.

· Slenderness effect
Long column effect indicating that flexural moment acting on a column is increased by the
interaction between the axial compression and lateral deformation, thus it becomes greater than the
one calculated by linear elastic analysis. When the slenderness effect is excessive, buckling can occur.
For the analysis of slenderness effect, various factors shall be considered such as material
nonlinearity, cracking, curvature, lateral displacement, loading period, drying shrinkage and creep, and
interaction with supporting members.

· Jacking force
Initial force introduced into concrete by a jack when tensile force is exerted into tendon in
prestressed concrete.

20
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Compatibility torsion
A torsion that can be redistributed after concrete cracking : Redistributed torsional moment can be
resisted by other load transfer paths.

· All-lightweight concrete
A type of concrete in which both fine and coarse aggregates are lightweight.

· Shear head
A type of stiffener arranged inside a slab at the top of a column in order to increase shear strength
in a two-way slab system without having beams.

· Shear plane
A plane which is cracked or has a potential to be cracked due to shear force acting on the plane.

· Shear reinforcement
Reinforcement arranged to resist shear.

· Overturning
Flipping over phenomenon of a wall or a retaining wall that can occur when the moment by the
horizontal forces (overturning moment) is greater than the moment by the vertical forces (restoring
moment) at the edge of the base slab.

· Mat foundation
Monolithic foundation slab that covers the whole bottom of a building or a structure.

· Folded plate
Plate structure that consists of folded thin flat slabs enabling to support a long span.

· Coupler
A device that connects two tendons (or reinforcement) or two anchorages together.
· Development length
Minimum embedded length required to develop the design strength of reinforcement at a critical
section,

· Anchorage device
In post-tensioning, a hardware used for transferring a post-tensioning force from prestressing steel to
concrete.

· Erection bar
A supplement reinforcement used to secure the position of reinforcements during assembling
reinforcements.

21
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Buckling
Failure of a column or a plate member under compression due to instability.

· Pedestal
A vertical member extruded from footing with a ratio of height-to-least lateral dimension not greater
than 3, to support axial compressive load.

· Column strip
In two way slab, a design strip which has the same width of the lesser of 0.25 and 0.25 on
both sides from the center line of the slab connecting columns. When a beam is located within the
column strip, the beam is included in the definition of the column strip

· Main reinforcement
Reinforcement arranged to resist flexural moment and/or axial force in the longitudinal direction of
members.

· Middle strip
A strip lying between two column strips in two way slab

· Longitudinal reinforcement
Reinforcement arranged in the longitudinal direction of a member

· Bearing capacity
In a foundation, magnitude of force that the ground can support

· Sustained load
Load which acts continuously over a long period of time

· Bearing strength
Compressive strength of concrete in the bearing surface where a load is applied.

· Earthquake load
A force acting on a structure that is generated by earthquake originated from the movement of earth
crust

· Qualified structural engineer

A registered structural engineer who has professional knowledge, sufficient experience, and a depth of
insight, or who is qualified to have the equivalent qualification. The qualified structural engineers
shall be capable of practicing design and reviewing structures, structure supervision, safety assessment
according to this Code.

· Specified yield strength of reinforcing bar

Yield strength of reinforcement which is the basis for the design of reinforced concrete members.

22
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Reinforced concrete
Concrete that behaves together with reinforcement, and have reinforcement not less than the minimum
amount of reinforcement specified in this Code.

· Settlement
A phenomenon that soil and piles settle down.

· Cantilever wall
A reinforced concrete retaining wall where soil pressure is resisted by stem wall and base slab
without having either sheet pile or counterfort/buttress.

· Recycled aggregate for concrete

Recycled aggregates, which are obtained from waste concrete after crushing and beneficiation, that
satisfy the quality standard set by the Minister of Land, Infrastructure and Transport

· Specified compressive strength of concrete

Compressive strength of concrete used for design of concrete members.

· Creep
Long-term deformation of concrete due to sustained load: Creep is classified as basic creep and
drying creep.

· Modulus of elasticity
Ratio of a normal stress to the corresponding strain in tension or compression below proportional
limit of the material:
There are two basic modulus of elasticity for concrete: chord modulus, (Equation (3.4.1)), and
initial tangent modulus, (Equation (3.4.4)). The 'modulus of elasticity' indicates the chord modulus.
 (Equation(3.4.5)),  (Equation(3.4.6)), and  (Equation(3.4.7)) are the modulus of elasticity for
non-prestressed reinforcement, prestressing steel, and steel section, respectively.

· Special boundary element

Boundary element required by 21.6.6.

· T-beam
A type of beam with flanges on both sides of the web in the case that the slab and web are built
integrally. Half T-beam indicates a beam with a flange on one side only.

· Wobble friction
In prestressed concrete, friction caused by unintended small deviation of prestressing sheath from its
specified profile.

23
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Equilibrium torsion
Torsion that cannot be redistributed.

· Post-tensioning
A method of prestressing in which prestressing steel is tensioned and the ends are anchored after the
concrete has hardened.

· Development length for a bar with a standard hook

Minimum embedded length from the critical section(where the reinforcement yields) to the outer
surface of 90-degree hook.

· Skin reinforcement, surface reinforcement

A type of longitudinal reinforcement arranged at either side of the web of flexural member with
overall depth greater than 900 mm.

· Wind load
load applied to structures that is caused by suction and pressure of wind flow.

· Prestress
Stress introduced to concrete in advance so that tensile stresses due to external loads can be offset
up to a certain amount.

· Prestress transfer
Transferring stress from prestressing steel to concrete.

· Prestressed concrete : PSC

Structural concrete in which internal stresses are introduced intentionally to offset a certain amount of
tensile stresses resulting from external loads: It is often abbreviated as PSC.

· Prestressed force
Force acting on a member due to prestressing.

· Precompressed tensile zone

A portion of a prestressed member where flexural compression caused by prestressing force is
reversed to flexural tension under external loads.

· Prestressing steel
Steel element used to apply prestressing forces to concrete.

· Prestressing
Introducing compressive stress to concrete prior to external loading

24
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Precast concrete : PC
Structural concrete element cast elsewhere, and assembled or moved to its final position in the
structure.

· Pre-tensioning
A method of prestressing in which prestressing steel is tensioned before concrete casting and its
tensile force is transferred to concrete by bond stresses between the prestressing steel and hardened
concrete.

· Flat slab
Concrete slab where flexural reinforcement is placed in two orthogonal directions, and the floor load
is transmitted to columns through drop panels without beams.

· Flat plate
Concrete slab where flexural reinforcement is placed in two orthogonal directions, and the floor load
are transmitted to columns without drop panels and beams.

· Cover thickness
Distance between the outermost surface of embedded reinforcement and the closest outer surface of
the concrete.

· Load
All sorts of action which introduce stresses and deformations to structures or members.

· Load factor
Safety factor to address variations such as inevitable difference between nominal load and actual load,
uncertainty in loading for analysis, and environmental action.

· Load combination
Combination of loads acting on a structure or a member simultaneously.
· Composite compressive member
compressive member that is strengthened in axial direction by using structural steel, steel tube, or
tubes. Longitudinal reinforcing bars may not be used.

· Composite concrete flexural members

flexural members composed of precast concrete elements and cast-in-place concrete elements which
are integrated to act together.

· Chord
Structural element that carries compression or tension such as top and bottom chord members in
trusses.

25
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

· Spread footing
Reinforced concrete footing whose area is enlarged in order to distribute the upper column load to
the lower ground.

· Magnified moment
Flexural moment increased by lateral deformation in a slender member.

· Sliding
Ground dislocation along the associated surface due to shear failure in soil.

· Base shear key

A wall extruded under the base slab of a retaining wall which introduces passive soil pressure
enough to resist horizontal soil pressure causing sliding of the wall

· Live load
Loads introduced by the usage or occupancy of buildings or structures except dead loads and
environmental loads such as those from wind or earthquake. Live loads include humans, furniture,
movable partitions, stored goods, equipped machine, and loads from snow or traffics on bridges.

· Lateral load
Horizontal loads from wind, earthquake, soil, and fluid that act on vertical structures.

· Non-sway frame
Structural frame in which lateral story displacement is restrained. (Refer to 6.5.5(1))

· Hoop
closed tie or continuously wound tie: a closed tie can be fabricated with multiple reinforcing bars
each having seismic hooks at both ends. A continuously wound tie shall have seismic hooks at both
ends.

· Flexural member
Member mainly resisting flexural moment and shear force, and in which axial force does not exist or
is negligible.

· Flexural discontinuity
A state in which flexural tensile stress does not exist.

· Flexural reinforcement
Longitudinal reinforcement arranged to resist bending moment.

1.5 Design Documents

(1) Structural drawings shall include structural plans, member sections, and connection details that are

26
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

determined by structural calculations and design, so that they clearly represent the structural design
concept and details. They shall also include other details that are determined by structural testing
and engineers’experience, without structural calculations.

(2) Structural drawings can be submitted separately as schematic design drawings, basic design
drawings, and construction drawings, in accordance with the progress of the structural design.

(3) Structural drawings and documents shall include the instructions and guidelines for the construction,
and they shall be written in a appropriate format so that the qualified structural engineer’s design
concept and all informations can be quickly and accurately understood by the readers. The
structural drawings shall include sufficient information about the placing of reinforcement so that
the placing drawings can be prepared based on them.

(4) Structural drawings shall include the followings.

① Design codes
② Design loads such as live loads
③ Strengths of materials
④ Dimensions and locations of members, cross-sections, and relative locations
⑤ Specifications and locations of reinforcement and anchors
⑥ Development length of reinforcement, and type, length, and location of splices
⑦ Floor levels, locations and offsets of the center of columns, and dimensions of uneven area
⑧ Types of connections
⑨ Locations, orientations, and dimensions of cambers, if any
⑩ Specifications and instructions for construction drawings of sub-structural members
⑪ Information and details for construction drawings of miscellaneous structural members
⑫ Name of qualified structural engineer, name of the engineering company, phone number and
address
⑬ Date for the completion of structural design
1.6 Reference Codes

KS B 0052 Symbolic representation of welds

KS B 0802 Method of tensile test for metallic materials

KS B 0804 Metallic materials －bend test

KS B 0816-0892 Method of test for weld

KS D 3503 Rolled steels for general structure

KS D 3504 Steel bars for concrete reinforcement

27
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

KS D 3505 Steel bars for prestressed concrete

KS D 3552 Low carbon steel wires

KS D 3629 Fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforcing steel bars

KS D 3688 High performance steel bars for concrete reinforcement

KS D 7002 Uncoated stress-relieved steel wires and strands for prestressed concrete

KS D 7017 Welded steel wire fabrics

KS F 2401 Sampling method for fresh concrete

KS F 2402 Method of test for slump of concrete

KS F 2403 Standard test method for making and curing concrete specimens

KS F 2405 Standard test method for compressive strength of concrete

KS F 2408 Standard test method for flexural strength of concrete

KS F 2409 Standard test method for unit weight and air content (gravimetric) of fresh concrete

KS F 2414 Standard test method for bleeding of concrete

KS F 2421 Standard test method for air content of fresh concrete by the pressure method(air receiver
method)

KS F 2422 Method of obtaining and testing drilled cores and sawed beams of concrete

KS F 2423 Standard test method for splitting tensile strength of concrete

KS F 2453 Standard test method for creep of concrete in compression

KS F 2456 Standard test method for resistance of concrete to rapid freezing and thawing

KS F 2462 Standard test method for unit weight of structural light weight concrete

KS F 2468 Testing method for staining materials in lightweight concrete aggregate

KS F 2502 Standard test method for sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates

28
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

KS F 2503 Testing method for density and absorption of coarse aggregate

KS F 2504 Testing method for density and absorption of fine aggregate

KS F 2526 Concrete aggregate

KS F 2527 Crushed aggregate for concrete

KS F 2529 Methods of test for particle density and water absorption of light weight fine aggregates for
structural concrete

KS F 2533 Methods of test particle density and water absorption of light weight coarse aggregates for structural
concrete

KS F 2534 Lightweight aggregate for structural concrete

KS F 2543 Copper slag aggregate for concrete

KS F 2544 Blast furnace slag aggregate for concrete

KS F 2560 Chemical admixtures for concrete

KS F 2562 Expansive additive for concrete

KS F 2563 Ground granulated blast - furnace slag for use in concrete

KS F 2567 Silica fume for use in concrete

KS F 2573 Recycled aggregate for concrete

KS F 2713 Testing method for analysis of chloride in concrete and concrete raw materials

KS F 2715 Testing method for water-soluble chloride in mortar and concrete

KS F 4009 Ready-mixed concrete

KS L 5105 Testing method for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars

KS L 5201 Portland cement

KS L 5205 Alumina cements for refractories

KS L 5210 Portland blast-furnace slag cement

29
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 1 General Requirements

KS L 5211 Portland fly-ash cement

KS L 5217 Expansive hydraulic cement

KS L 5401 Portland pozzolan cement

KS L 5405 Fly ash

Korean Highway Bridge Design Code(Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, and Transport, 2010)

Design Code for Steel Reinforced Concrete Building Structures(Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, and
Transport, 2000)

Concrete Construction Standard Specifications(Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, and Transport, 2009)

Design Code for Precast Concrete Building Structures(Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, and
Transport, 1992)

Allowable Stress Design Code for Reinforced Concrete Building Structures(Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, and
Transport, 2000)

Korean Building Code(Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, and Transport, 2009)

Concrete Construction Standard Safety Work Instruction(Ministry of Employment and Labor, 2009)

30
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

Chapter 2 Materials

2.1 General

2.1.1 Scope

When concrete structural members are designed according to this Code, the quality and testing of any
materials used in concrete construction shall conform to the provisions of this chapter and Concrete
Construction Standard specifications.

2.1.2 Notations

 : Cross-sectional area of a member, mm2

 : Modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

  : Initial tangent modulus of elasticity at an age of 28 days

   ′  : Initial tangent modulus of elasticity at an age of ′ days

 : Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa

  ′  : Compressive strength of concrete at an age of ′ days, MPa

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

  : Target compressive strength of concrete for mix design of concrete, MPa

  : Average compressive strength of concrete at an age of 28 days, MPa

   : Average compressive strength of concrete at an age of t days, MPa

 : Notional thickness of member, mm

    

 : Relative humidity of ambient atmosphere, %

 : Sample standard deviation, MPa,

 : Age of concrete, days

31
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

′ : Age of concrete at loading, days

 : Age of concrete at the first exposure to ambient atmosphere, days

′  : Equivalent age at curing temperature  ℃, days

 : Ambient or curing temperature, ℃
 : Perimeter length of member section   in contact with atmosphere, mm

    : Function to describe the effect of concrete strength on the creep, refer to Eq. (2.2.5)

 ′  : Function to describe the effect of sustained load on the creep, refer to Eq. (2.2.6)

  －′  : Function to describe the effect of loading duration on the creep, refer to Eq. (2.2.7)

    : Coefficient to describe the effect of concrete age on strength development

 : Coefficient to describe the effect of ambient relative humidity and notional thickness of
member, refer to Eq. (2.2.7) and Eq. (2.2.8)

   :   modified by temperature change, refer to Eq. (2.2.14)

  : Function to describe the effect of ambient relative humidity on the creep and shrinkage,
refer to Eq. (2.2.21)

  －  ：Function of shrinkage strain according to time of drying, refer to Eq. (2.2.22)
  : Coefficient to describe the effect of type of cement on shrinkage

  ′  ：Overall strain developed by the applied stress   ′  at an age ′, which is the sum of
instantaneous strain and creep strain

    ：Shrinkage strain at an exposure age  after being exposed to atmosphere at an age  

  : Notional shrinkage coefficient, refer to Eq. (2.2.19)

  ′  : Creep coefficient of concrete

 : Notional creep coefficient of concrete

32
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

  :  modified by applied stress level, refer to Eq. (2.2.11)

 : Function to describe the effect of ambient relative humidity and notional thickness on the
creep, refer to Eq.(2.2.4)

   :  modified by temperature change, refer to Eq. (2.2.13)

2.2 Materials

2.2.1 Constituent materials of concrete

(1) Cements shall conform to or have a higher quality than those specified in KS L 5201, KS L 5205,
KS L 5210, KS L 5211, KS L 5217, KS L 5401.

(2) Concrete aggregates shall conform to the following provisions.

① Concrete aggregates shall conform to or have a higher quality than those specified in KS.
② Aggregate shall have adequate hardness and grading, and be clean and durable. It shall not
contain deleterious substances such as clay lump, organic matter, and pieces of slender stone,
and shall conform to KS F 2526, KS F 2527, KS F 2534, KS F 2543, KS F 2544, and KS F
2573
③ If concrete aggregate does not belong the standardized products mentioned above, it shall conform to
KS F 2502, KS F 2503, KS F 2504, KS F 2529, KS F 2533, and KS F 2468 or the equivalent or
higher product. Exceptionally, when the required quality of concrete using a type of aggregate is
guaranteed by verification from testing, the aggregate can be used under the approval by qualified
structural engineer.
④ Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be greater than the following values. These
limitations shall be permitted not to be applied according to the judgment of the qualified
structural engineer, if methods of compaction are adequate such that concrete can be placed
without voids.
(a) 1/5 the narrowest distance between two sides of forms
(b) 1/3 the depth of slabs
(c) 3/4 the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars, bundles of bars, tendons, or
ducts.

(3) Chemical admixtures shall conform to the following provisions.

① Chemical admixtures shall conform to or have a higher quality than KS F 2560.
② Chemical admixtures shall be verified by satisfactory quality inspection and testing and shall be
approved by the qualified structural engineer.
③ During construction, chemical admixtures shall maintain the ingredients and performance that are consistent
with those used for the determination of the concrete mixture proportions.
④ Calcium chloride or chemical admixtures containing chloride shall not be used in prestressed concrete, in
concrete containing aluminum embedments, or in concrete cast using galvanized steel forms.

33
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

(4) Water used for manufacturing concrete shall conform to the following provisons.
① Water used for concrete mixture shall be clean and not contain impurities such as acids, oil,
alkalis, chlorides, organic matters and deleterious substances to concrete and steel.
② Water used for concrete mixture shall conform to KS F 4009 Supplementary 2.
③ Water used in prestressed concrete or in concrete containing embedded aluminum, or surface water
on aggregates, shall not contain deleterious amounts of chloride ion. The provision for deleterious
amounts of chloride ion refers to 4.5.4.
④ Non-portable water, which does not satisfy the following provisions, shall not be used for
concrete mixture.
(a) Concrete mixture proportions shall be established using the water of the same source.
(b) The strengths at 7 and 28 days of mortar specimens with non-portable water shall not be less
than 90 percent of those of specimens with drinkable water. The other conditions and
ingredients of the test specimens, except water, shall be the same. The test shall be performed
according to KS L 5105.

(5) Mineral admixtures for concrete mixture shall conform to the following provisons.
① Fly ash as admixture for concrete shall conform to KS L 5405.
② Expansive admixtures for concrete shall conform to KS F 2562.
③ Blast furnace slag powder as admixture for concrete shall conform to KS F 2563.
④ Silica fume as admixture for concrete shall conform to KS F 2567.
⑤ Since the quality and handling method of siliceous powder and admixture for high strength
concrete except ①, ② and ③ are not yet standardized, the quality and handling method of the
concrete using these admixtures shall be verified by adequate survey and test to assure the
required durability.

2.2.2 Concrete

(1) Test method for making and curing concrete specimens shall conform to KS F 2403. Standard
cylinder specimen for compressive strength is  ×  mm. When cylinder of  ×  mm
is used, the strength correction factor is 0.97. When cylinder with other dimensions is used,
appropriate strength correction factor shall be considered.

(2) Ready-mixed concrete shall conform to Concrete Construction Standard Specification, and the
requirements not addressed in the specification shall conform to KS F 4009.

(3) Light weight concrete aggregate for making light weight concrete shall conform to KS F 2534.

(4) When a member is not subjected to design load or stress within 28 days after casting concrete,
compressive strength of the member shall be permitted to be increased by a factor according to the
concrete age with the approval of qualified structural engineer. For the increase factor, Eq. (2.2.15) and
Eq. (2.2.16) shall be permitted to use.

34
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

(5) The following provisions shall be permitted to be used to predict creep of concrete.
① Overall strain      developed by applied stress   ′  at an age ′, which is the sum of
instantaneous strain and creep strain, shall be permitted to be calculated by Eq. (2.2.1),
considering the effects of compressive strength, size of member, average relative humidity,
loading age, loading duration, type of cement, curing temperature, temperature change, and applied
stress level.

    ′  
  ′  ＝   ′    ＋   (2.2.1)
   ′    

where   and   ′  are calculated from Eq. (3.4.4) and Eq. (2.2.17), respectively.

② The creep coefficient   ′  in Eq. (2.2.1) corresponds to reference curing temperature and
℃
temperature at loading of 20 . The creep coefficient is calculated by the following equations.

  ′  ＝    －′  (2.2.2)

where,

 ＝      ′ 
(2.2.3)

－ 
 ＝ ＋  (2.2.4)
 



 
    ＝  (2.2.5)

 


 ′  ＝  (2.2.6)
 ＋ ′ 



［ ］
－′ 
  －′ ＝  (2.2.7)
  ＋ －′ 

  ＝    ＋       ＋  ≤    days  (2.2.8)

where   is obtained from Eq. (3.4.3)

③ The creep coefficient in Eq. (2.2.2) shall be adjusted according to applied stress level,
temperature, and type of cement as follows.
(a) Effect of curing temperature and type of cement
When the temperature during curing is not 20 ℃,
the age of concrete at loading ′ shall be
adjusted according to the temperature and type of cement.

35
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

  
′  ′    
   ≥  days  (2.2.9)
   ′   


  
′  ＝    exp－ 
 

＋    
＋ 

(2.2.10)

 －  Type  cement
＝    Type  and  cement
   Type  cement

where    ( ℃) is the temperature maintained during  days, and  is the number of
temperature change.

(b) Effect of level of applied stresses

For stress levels in the range of     ′   ｜  ′ ｜      ′ , the nonlinearity of
creep shall be taken into account by Eq. (2.2.11), modifying  in Eq. (2.2.3).

 ｜  ′ ｜ 
 
 ＝  exp    － 
  ′    (2.2.11)

where,   ′  is calculated from Eq. (2.2.15), and Eq. (2.2.16)

(c) Effect of temperature change

When the temperature under sustained load changes from 5 °C to 80 °C,  and   in the
creep coefficient shall be modified by Eq. (2.2.13) and Eq. (2.2.14), respectively, and the creep
coefficient shall be calculated from Eq. (2.2.12).

  ′ ＝  －′  ＋  －  (2.2.12)

   ＝      

 (2.2.13)

where,   exp    － 

   
     exp       (2.2.14)
    

④ Average compressive strength at 28 days,   , is calculated from Eq. (3.4.3) and the strength
development with time,     , is calculated from Eq. (2.2.15)

   ＝      (2.2.15)

36
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

 
    
    ＝ exp    － (2.2.16)


    Type  cement moist curing
  Type  cement steam curing


       Type  cement moist curing
   Type  cement steam curing
    Type  cement

where,     is rate function of strength development, and   is coefficient according to the

type of cement.

⑤ When creep strain is calculated, the initial tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete shall be
calculated from Eq. (3.4.4), and the initial tangent modulus of elasticity at an age of  days
    shall be calculated from Eq. (2.2.17), where     is determined by Eq. (2.2.16)

    ＝ 
      (2.2.17)

⑥ Testing of creep shall conform to KS F 2453

(6) Drying shrinkage strain shall be calculated from Eq. (2.2.18) considering average relative humidity
and dimension of the member, etc.

    ＝     －  (2.2.18)

where,   and    －   shall be calculated from Eq. (2.2.19) to Eq. (2.2.22)

  ＝       (2.2.19)

    ＝  ＋   －    ×  －  (2.2.20)

   
           ≤    
   ≥  
(2.2.21)



－ 
  －  ＝  (2.2.22)
   ＋ － 

   Type  cement
 ＝    Type  and Type  cement
   Type  cement

When the ambient temperature is not 20 ℃,   and    －   shall be modified by Eq.

37
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

(2.2.19) and Eq. (2.2.22), respectively.

    
 
        

      
  (2.2.23)



－ 
  －  ＝  
(2.2.24)
  exp － － ＋ － 

2.2.3 Steel reinforcement

(1) Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement, except that plain reinforcement shall be permitted for
spirals or prestressing steel. Other reinforcements such as structural steel, steel pipe, or steel tubing
shall be permitted as specified in this Code.

(2) When reinforcing bars are welded, the type and location of welded splices shall be indicated on the
contract document. The required symbol and test method for welding shall conform to KS B 0052,
KS B 0816 ~ KS B 0892.

(3) Quality, shape and dimension of reinforcing bar, wire and welded wire reinforcement shall conform
to KS D 3504, KS D 3552 and KS D 7017.

(4) When the specified yield strength   of reinforcing bar, wire and welded wire reinforcement exceeds 400 MPa
and thus yield plateau does not exist, the value of   shall be taken as the stress corresponding to a strain
of 0.0035.

(5) Reinforcing bar shall be permitted to benzine-coated or epoxy-coated, and the coated reinforcing bars shall be
conform to KS D 3629.

(6) Prestressing steel shall conform to the following provisions.

① Wire and strands for prestressing shall conform to KS D 7002.
② Prestressing steel bar shall conform to KS D 3505.
③ Wire, strands, and bars not specifically listed in KS D 7002 or KS D 3505 shall be permitted
only when they conform to minimum requirements of specifications and have a equivalent or
higher quality than those listed in KS D 7002 or KS D 3505.

(7) Structural steel, steel pipe, or tubing shall conform to KS D 3503. Products that do not belong to
KS D 3503 shall be permitted to be used after performing the required quality and strength tests
under supervision of qualified structural engineer.

(8) Diameter of head in headed shear studs shall not be less than 
 times the shear stud diameter.

(9) Damage of the joint and rib of bar in headed deformed bars shall not extend more than 2 from
the bearing face of the head

38
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

2.3 Concrete Quality

2.3.1 General test

(1) Concrete shall be proportioned to have a strength more than the average compressive strength as
prescribed in 2.3.2(2) and shall satisfy the durability criteria of Chapter 4. The frequency of test
strengths less than   , as prescribed in 2.3.3(2) ③, shall be minimized in the production of
concrete.

(2) Requirements for   shall be based on tests of cylinder specimens made and tested according to
2.3.3(2).

(3) If there is no special requirement,   shall be based on the strength at the age of 28 days.
Otherwise, the test age for   shall be described in design documents or specifications.

(4) When design criteria for splitting tensile strength    described in 3.4.4 ② and 4.3.1(4) is used,
laboratory testing shall be performed to establish a value of   corresponding to   .

(5) Splitting tensile strength tests shall not be used as a acceptance criteria for concrete in construction
field.

2.3.2 Selection of concrete proportions

(1) Establishment of sample standard deviation shall be conform to the following provisions.
① When strength test records are available for a concrete production facility, the sample standard
deviation shall be established. Test records for sample standard deviation shall satisfy the
following requirements.
(a) The materials, quality control procedures, and conditions shall be similar to the expected actual
conditions. Variations in the materials and proportions used for the test records shall be similar
to those of the actual construction conditions.
(b) Sample standard deviation shall be a value obtained from the concrete whose strength is
equivalent to the specified compressive strength or the difference is not greater than 7 MPa.
②
(c) For test records, at least 30 consecutive tests shall be performed, except for the case specified in 2.3.2(1) .
② When a concrete production facility does not have strength test records satisfying the requirements
of 2.3.2(1)①, but does have records on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a sample standard deviation
can be calculated as the product of the calculated sample standard deviation and modification
factor of Table 2.3.1. To be acceptable, test records shall meet requirements (a) and (b) of
2.3.2(1) ①, and be a record tested consecutively during a period of more than 45 days.

39
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

Table 2.3.1 Modification factor for sample standard deviation when less than 30 tests are available

Modification factor for sample

No. of tests1)
standard deviation2)

15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00

1)
Interpolate for intermediate numbers of tests.
2)
Modification factor for sample standard deviation to be used to determine compressive strength of concrete
mix design.

(2) Compressive strength of concrete mix design shall conform to the following provisons.
① Required average compressive strength   used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions
shall be determined using the sample standard deviation calculated in accordance with 2.3.2(1). When
specified compressive strength does not exceed 35 MPa, the greater of the values computed from
Eq. (2.3.1) and (2.3.2) shall be used. When specified compressive strength exceeds 35 MPa, the
greater of the values computed from Eq. (2.3.1) and (2.3.3) shall be used.

In case   ≤  MPa,

       (2.3.1)

            (2.3.2)

In case     MPa,

       (2.3.1)

         (2.3.3)

② Required average compressive strength   shall be determined from Table 2.3.2 when a concrete
production facility does not have strength test records for the calculation of sample standard
deviation or when the number of compressive strength tests is less than 15.

40
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

Table 2.3.2 Required average compressive strength when no test records or less than 15 tests are
available
Required average compressive strength,
Specified compressive strength  (MPa)
 (MPa)

less than 21   7
no less than 21 and no greater than 35   8.5
greater than 35 1.1  5.0

(3) When the test results of compressive strength of concrete mix design are available during
construction, the difference between   and   shall be permitted to be reduced, provided and
, or and are satisfied simultaneously.
When 30 or more test results are available and the average of test results exceeds that required
by 2.3.2(2) , using sample standard deviation calculated according to 2.3.2(1)
When test results less than 30 are available and the average of test results exceeds that required
by 2.3.2(2) , using sample standard deviation calculated according to 2.3.2(1)
When requirements for special exposure conditions of 4.5.3 are satisfied

2.3.3 Evaluation and acceptance of concrete

(1) Frequency of testing shall conform to the following minimum requirements through .
Samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken as follows.
(a) Once each day
(b) Once for each 100
(c) Once for each 500 of slab or wall surface area
(d) Once for each change of mixtures.
When because of the small quantity of concrete, the number of tests required by 2.3.3(1) is
less than 5 for any class of concrete, tests shall be performed for at least five randomly selected
batches or for each batch when the number of batches is not greater than 5.
When total quantity of concrete is less than 40 , strength tests are not required when the
strength is deemed to be satisfied by the approval of the qualified structural engineer.
Concrete strength shall be determined as the average of the strengths of 3 cylinders made from the
same concrete sample, and the test shall be performed at 28 days or at a test age designated for
determination of   .

(2) Standard-cured specimens shall conform to the following requirements of through .

Samples for strength tests shall be taken according to KS F 2401.

Cylinders for strength tests shall be tested according to KS F 2405.
Strength of a given class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following
requirements are met:
(a) Average of three consecutive strength tests is not less than  
(b) Individual strength test value is not less than     MPa when   is not greater than 35
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

MPa; or not less than 0.9  when   is greater than 35 MPa.

If either of the requirements of 2.3.3.(2) is not met, actions shall be taken to increase the
average of strength test results according to the provision of 2.3.3(4).

(3) Fabrication, test and strength result for field-cured specimens shall satisfy provisions from to .
Qualified structural engineer may ask for strength tests of cylinders cured in field conditions in
order to investigate adequacy of protection and curing in concrete structures.
Field-cured cylinders shall be cured under field conditions according to KS F 2403.
Field-cured test cylinders shall be made at the same time and from the same samples as
laboratory-cured test cylinders.
When cylinder strength of field cured specimens is less than 85 % of that of laboratory-cured
specimens made in the same test condition, the procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall
be improved. The 85 % limitation shall be permitted to be ignored when the field-cured strength
exceeds   by more than 3.5 MPa if   is not greater than 35 MPa, or when it exceeds  
by greater than 0.1  MPa if   is greater than 35 MPa.

(4) The following procedures shall be applied for the case that test results exhibit low concrete
strength.
When any strength of laboratory-cured specimens is less than   in 2.3.3(1) by not less than
3.5 MPa if   is not greater than 35 MPa, or by not less than 0.1  MPa if   is greater
than 35 MPa or when strength tests of field-cured specimens show deficiencies in protection and
curing (see 2.3.3(3) ), actions shall be taken to ensure that load carrying capacity of the
structure is not insufficient.
If the strength of concrete is significantly low and the calculations indicate that load-carrying
capacity is significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area in question shall be
performed according to KS F 2422. In such cases, 3 cores shall be tested to investigate if the
strength is less than the specified   by not less than 3.5 MPa for   not greater than 35
MPa, or by not less than 0.1  for   greater than 35 MPa.
When the concrete service condition is dry, the cores shall be tested in a dry condition after the
cores are air-dried for seven days at a temperature from 15 to 30 and at a relative humidity
less than 60%. When the concrete is served in moisture condition, the cores shall be tested in
moisture condition after soaked in watertight bags or containers for more than 40 hours.
Concrete shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of 3 cores is not less than 85%
of   and if individual core is not less than 75 % of   . For accuracy of testing, additional
tests shall be performed for the locations showing irregular core strength results.
When the provision in 2.3.3(4) is not satisfied and the structural adequacy remains in doubt,
the qualified structural engineer shall require a loading test specified in Chapter 20, or take other
appropriate steps.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 2 Materials

2.3.4 Testing of concrete

(1) When testing of concrete is required during construction and approved by the qualified structural
engineer, testing of normal weight concrete shall conform to the followings.
Strength evaluation shall conform to KS F 2405, KS F 2408, and KS F 2423.
Weight test for unit volume shall conform to KS F 2409.
Bleeding testing shall conform to KS F 2414.
Air content testing of fresh concrete shall conform to KS F 2409 or KS F 2421.
Slump testing shall conform to KS F 2402.

(2) Testing of light weight concrete shall conform to the following provisions.
Weight testing of unit volume shall conform to KS F 2462 and KS F 2534.
Testing of deleterious materials shall conform to KS F 2468.
Other Tests shall conform to the testing methods for normal weight concrete.

2.4 Testing of Steel Reinforcement

Testing of steel reinforcement shall conform to KS B 0802 and KS B 0804.

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

3.1 General

3.1.1 Scope

(1) Members of reinforced concrete structure shall be designed to have required strength in accordance
with provisions of this Code, using load factors and strength reduction factors specified in Chapter
3.3

(2) Design provisions of this Chapter are based on the principle that structures shall be designed to
resist all applicable load combinations.

(3) Load combinations with respect to live loads considered in this Chapter shall be live loads caused
by crowd or loadings due to mechanical placements. For other types of loads such as truck loads,
the load combinations shall be determined in accordance with the related code or the qualified
structural engineer.

(4) Service load shall be conformed to the provisions legislated by the government or management
authority for facilities. However, live loads shall be permitted to be determined as a value
resulting from reasonable investigation.

(5) Lateral force resisting system of structure shall be adequately designed to resist wind and
earthquake loads.

3.1.2 Notations

 : Gross section area mm2.

 : Web width of member, plus effective length of protruding flange, mm

 : Web width of member having flanges, mm

 : Dead loads, or the related sectional forces

 : Effective depth of a section, mm

′ : Distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of compression reinforcement, mm

 : Earthquake loads, or the related sectional forces

 : Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

44
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

  : Initial tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

  : Modulus of elasticity of tendon, MPa

 : Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa

  : Modulus of elasticity of shaped steel section, MPa

 : Loads or related sectional forces due to weight and pressures of fluids with known densities
and controllable heights,

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestressing, MPa

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

  : Average compressive strength of concrete at 28 days after curing, MPa

  : Effective stress of tendon due to effective prestress forces, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

 : Lateral loads due to lateral pressure of soil, water in soil, or other materials, or related
sectional forces

 : Vertical loads due to self weight of soil, water in soil, or other materials, or related
sectional forces

 : Overall thickness of member, mm

 : Loads due to impact, or related sectional forces

 : Clear span length of a member, mm

 : Live loads, or related sectional forces

 : Roof live load, or related sectional forces

 : Density of concrete, kg/m3

 : Nominal axial strength at the balanced condition

45
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

 : Nominal axial strength under a given eccentricity

 : Rain load, or related sectional forces

 : Snow load, or related sectional forces

 : Sectional forces due to temperature, creep, shrinkage, differential settlement

 : Thickness of flange, mm

 : Required strength to resist factored loads or related sectional forces

 : Nominal shear strength of concrete

 : Factored distributed load

 : Wind load, or related sectional forces

 : Modification factor for light weight concrete (see 3.4.4)

 : Modification factor for

 : Factor related the location of neutral axis in cross section depending on concrete
compressive strength (see 6.2.1(7) ③)
 : Net tensile strain in extreme layer of tension steel at nominal axial strength. Strains due to
effective prestress, creep, shrinkage, and temperature are excluded (see commentary 6.2.2(3)).

 : Specified yield strain of reinforcing bars

 : Strength reduction factor

 : Ratio of tensile reinforcement area

′ : Ratio of compressive reinforcement area

 : Ratio of tensile reinforcement area at the balanced strain condition

46
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

3.2 Loads and External Forces

3.2.1 Applicable Loads

In design of structures, various applicable loads or effects of external actions during and after construction, such
as prestressing, construction loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage, creep, temperature changes, elastic contraction,
uneven settlement of supports, in addition to live load, dead load, wind load, earthquake load, snow load, soil
load and fluid load shall be considered.

3.2.2 Calculation of Load

In design of structures, all applicable loads and external forces shall be determined in accordance with
provisions of this Chapter.

3.3 Strength

3.3.1 General

(1) Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strengths at all cross sections
not less than the required strengths calculated from loads and load combinations in this Code.

(2) Structural members shall satisfy all requirements of this Code to secure adequate performance
under service loads.

3.3.2 Required Strength

(1) In design of reinforced concrete structures, the maximum required strength for the design shall be
satisfied considering all load combinations with load factors shown below:

       (3.3.1)

                         or  or   (3.3.2)

       or  or     or   (3.3.3)

           or  or   (3.3.4)

                 or    (3.3.5)

                         or  or   (3.3.6)

             or    (3.3.7)

47
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

             or    (3.3.8)

where,   is a correction coefficient for the vertical load,   .      for  ≤ m and

        ≥  for   m .

(2) The load factor of live load  in Eq. (3.3.3) to (3.3.5) shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.5
except for garages, public assembly place, and all areas where  is not less than  kN/m2

(3) If structures are affected by impact, Live load  in Eq. (3.3.2) to (3.3.6) shall be replaced by
(    ) including impact effects (  ).

(4) Uneven settlement, creep, shrinkage, expansion magnitude of expansive concrete, and temperature
change shall be calculated to account for the actual circumstances of structure.

(5) In the design of post-tensioned anchorage zone, a load factor of 1.2 shall be used for the
maximum prestressing steel jacking force.

3.3.3 Design Strength

(1) Design strength of flexural moment, axial force, shear force, and torsional moment in a member or
connection shall be the nominal strength calculated from the provisions and assumptions of this
Code, multiplied by the strength reduction factors  in 3.3.3(2).

(2) Strength reduction factor  shall be given as follows:

① Tension-controlled sections as defined in 6.2.2(4) 0.85
② Compression-controlled sections as defined in 6.2.2(3):
(a) Concrete members reinforced with spiral reinforcement 0.70
(b) Other concrete members 0.65
(c) In the calculation of nominal strength, when the net tensile strain of reinforcing steel in the extreme
layer of tension steel,  , is between the limits for compression-controlled and tension-controlled
sections,  shall be linearly increased from the value for compression-controlled sections to 0.85 as
 increases from the compression-controlled strain limit to the tension-controlled strain limit
③ Shear and torsional moment 0.75
④ Bearing on concrete (excluding post-tensioned anchorage zones and strut-and-tie models) 0.65
⑤ Post-tensioned anchorage zones 0.85
⑥ In strut-and-tie models:
(a) strut, nodal zones, and bearing areas 0.75
(b) ties 0.85
⑦ Flexural sections in pretensioned members where the strand embedment length is shorter than the
required development length:
(a) From the member end to the transfer length end 0.75
(b) Between the transfer length end to the development length end,  shall be permitted to be
linearly increased from 0.75 to 0.85. If bonding of a strand does not extend to the end of the

48
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

member, the strand embedment shall be assumed to begin at the end of the debonded length
⑧ Flexural moment, compression force, shear force, bearing of unreinforced concrete 0.55

3.3.4 Design Strength for Reinforcing Steel

The specified design yield strength of reinforcing steel   shall not exceed 600 MPa, except for
prestressing steel.

3.4 Structural Analysis

3.4.1 Methods of Analysis

(1) All members in frames or continuous structures shall be designed for the maximum sectional force
determined by the theory of elasticity, except for the modification according to 3.4.2. Simplified
assumptions in 3.4.4 through 3.4.7 shall be permitted in design.

(2) Except for prestressed concrete structures, approximate analysis defined in 3.4.1(3) and (4) shall be
permitted for buildings having typical structural shapes, spans, and story heights.

(3) Approximate analysis defined in 3.4.1(4) shall be permitted for continuous beams or one-way slabs,
when all the following conditions are satisfied:
① The structure has two or more spans;
② The length difference of two adjacent spans does not exceed 20% of the shorter span length;
③ Uniformly distributed loads are applied to the member
④ Live load does not exceed three times the dead load
⑤ Cross section of the member is uniform.
(4) Flexural moments and shear forces of continuous beams or one-way slabs satisfying 3.4.1(3) shall be
permitted to be calculated as follows:
① Positive moment
(a) End spans
Discontinuous end unrestrained      
Discontinuous end integrated with support     
(b) Interior spans      
② Negative moment
(a) Negative moment at exterior face of first interior support
Two spans      
More than two spans      
(b) Negative moment at interior supports except (a)     
(c) Negative moment at face of all supports for slabs with spans not exceeding 3 m and for beams
where ratio of the sum of column stiffness to the sum of beam stiffness is not less than 8 at

49
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

each end of the span      

(d) Negative moment at interior face of end support for members integrated with supports
Where the support is a spandrels beam      
Where the support is a column     
③ Shear force
(a) Shear force at the exterior face of the first interior support    
(b) Shear force at all other faces of supports except (a)     

3.4.2 Redistribution of Moments in Continuous Flexural Members

(1) Except for the moments calculated by the approximate analysis, negative moments at continuous
flexural member supports calculated from any loading using the elastic theory shall be permitted to
be increased or decreased by % which shall not exceed 20 %.

(2) Flexural moments of cross sections within the spans shall be calculated by using the modified
negative moment, and the static equilibrium shall be maintained after redistribution of flexural
moment.

(3) Flexural moment redistribution shall be applicable, only when the net tensile strain of the extreme
layer tensile reinforcement is not less than 0.0075 at the section where the reduction of flexural
moment is considered.

3.4.3 Modulus of Elasticity

(1) Secant modulus of elasticity for concrete with unit weight,  , of    ∼    kg/m3 is
calculated from Eq. (3.4.1).

 
   
    (MPa) (3.4.1)

For concrete using normal-weight aggregate(     kg/m3), Eq. (3.4.2) can be used.

 
        (MPa) (3.4.2)

where,   is defined as follows:

       (3.4.3)

where,  is 4MPa when   is not greater than 40 MPa, or 6 MPa where   is not less
than 60 MPa, and linear interpolation shall be permitted if   is between 40 and 60 MPa.
The relationship between the initial tangent modulus and secant modulus of elasticity for concrete
used in creep calculation is defined as Eq. (3.4.4).

50
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

     (3.4.4)

(2) The modulus of elasticity,   , of reinforcing steel bar shall be defined as Eq. (3.4.5).

     (MPa) (3.4.5)

(3) Modulus of elasticity for prestressing reinforcement shall be determined by tests or provided by the
manufacture. Otherwise, Eq. (3.4.6) shall be permitted to be used.

    (MPa) (3.4.6)

(4) Modulus of elasticity for shaped steel sections shall be defined as Eq. (3.4.7).

     (MPa) (3.4.7)

3.4.4 Light-weight Concrete

Modification factor for lightweight concrete, , to account for the effect of lightweight concrete shall
be defined as follows.

① When the value of   is not specified,

    for all-lightweight concrete
    for sand-lightweight concrete
Linear interpolation between 0.75 and 0.85 shall be permitted, according to the volume ratio of the
fine aggregate of sand-light-weight concrete to be replaced with light-weight fine aggregate. Linear
interpolation between 0.85 and 1.0 shall be permitted, according to the volume ratio of coarse
aggregate of normal-weight concrete to be replaced with light-weight aggregate.
② When   is specified,
       
   ≤  

3.4.5 Stiffness

(1) Relative flexural and torsional stiffness of columns, walls, floors, and roof systems shall be
permitted to be calculated using any reasonable assumptions. The adopted assumptions shall be
consistent in the entire analysis process.

(2) Effect of haunches shall be considered in flexural moment calculations or in member design.

3.4.6 Effective Stiffness

(1) For the calculation of lateral deflection of reinforced concrete structural systems subjected to service

51
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

loads, linear analysis shall be performed using member stiffness defined as 1.43 times the flexural
stiffness in (2) and (3). Otherwise, analysis shall be performed considering the reduced member
stiffness. Member properties shall not exceed the properties of the gross section.

(2) Lateral deflections for design loads shall be calculated either by linear analysis using the stiffness
defined in ① or ②, or by an analysis considering the reduced stiffness.
① Stiffness with sectional properties defined in 6.5.4 (2) ①, ②, ③
② 50 percent of the stiffness of gross section
(3) When two-way slabs without beams are designed as elements of the earthquake-load-resisting system, lateral
deflections for design loads shall be permitted to be calculated by linear analysis. In this case, the stiffness
of slab shall be determined by a verified model that agree with the results of relevant experiments and
analysis, and the stiffness of frame shall be determined by (2).

3.4.7 Span length

(1) Span length of members not integrated with supports shall be defined as the clear span plus the
depth of beam or slab. However the span length need not exceed distance between center-to-center
of supports.

(2) In analysis of frames or continuous structures, span length used to calculate flexural moments shall be
the center-to-center distance between the supports. In the case of beams integrated with supports,
flexural moments at the face of support shall be permitted to be used in design.

(3) In slabs integrated with supports, having clear spans not exceeding 3 m, the clear span shall be
permitted to be regarded as the span length for analysis, neglecting the width of supporting beams.

3.4.8 Columns

(1) In column design, the axial force shall be determined as the factored loads applied to all floors or
roof, and the maximum flexural moment shall be determined as the value resulting from the
factored load applied to the single span of floor or roof adjacent to the column. Further, loading
condition producing the maximum ratio of moment to axial force shall be considered.

(2) In design of frames or continuous structures, unbalanced floor load or roof load applied to exterior
and interior columns and the effects of other eccentric loads shall be considered.

(3) Far ends of columns integrated with the structure can be assumed to be fixed when calculating
flexural moments of the column due to vertical loads.

(4) All moments transferred from floors to columns shall be distributed between upper and lower
columns according to the relative column stiffness and constraint condition.

52
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

3.4.9 Arrangement of Live Loads

(1) Live loads shall be permitted to be applied only to the related floor under consideration. In this
case, the far ends of columns integrated with the structure can be assumed to be fixed.

(2) Load combinations of dead and live loads shall be permitted to be limited to only two
combinations as follows:
① Factored dead load on all spans and full factored live load on two adjacent spans
② Factored dead load on all spans and full factored live load on alternate spans.
3.4.10 T-beams

(1) Effective width  of T-beam integrated with slab and beam shall be determined as the smallest
value of followings.
① T beam
(a) (Eight times thickness of protruding flange in both directions)  
(b) Distance between the centers of two adjacent slabs.
(c) Quarter of the beam span length
② Half T beam
(a) (Six times thickness of protruding flange in one direction)  
(b) (One-twelfth of the span length of the beam)  
(c) (One-half of the clear distance from the adjacent beam)  

(2) In isolated T beams, the flange thickness providing compression area shall be not less than one-half
of the width of web, and the effective width of flange shall not be greater than four times the
width of web.

(3) Except for joist structure, when longitudinal reinforcement in a slab considered as a T beam
flange is parallel to the beam length, reinforcement perpendicular to the beam shall be placed at
the top of the slab in accordance with the following requirements.
① Transverse reinforcement shall be designed to resist the factored load on the protruding flange of
T beam regarding the flange as a cantilever. For isolated T beams, the full width of overhanging
flange shall be regarded as the effective width. For other T-beams, the effective width specified in
3.4.10(1) shall be used.
② Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not be greater than five times the slab thickness and
450 mm.

3.4.11 Joist Structure

(1) Joist structure shall satisfy the following requirements.

① Joist structure shall consist of regularly spaced joists and shall be integrated with the top slab.
Joist can be built in one direction or two orthogonal directions.
② The width of joist shall be not less than 100 mm, and the depth of joist shall be not greater

53
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 3 Analysis and Design General Considerations

than 3.5 times the minimum width of joist.

③ Clear spacing between joists shall not exceed 750 mm.
④ Joist structure not satisfying the requirements of ① through ③ shall be designed as slabs and beams.
(2) In design of joist structure, the followings shall be considered.
① When permanent burned clay or concrete tile fillers having compression strength not less than that
of concrete is used for joist , the followings shall be considered:
(a) The vertical parts of fillers contacting the joist shall be permitted to be included in the
calculations of shear strength and negative moment strength. Other parts of fillers shall not be
included in strength calculation.
(b) Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall be not less than the one-twelfth of the clear distance
between joists and 40 mm.
(c) In one-way joist design, transverse shrinkage and temperature reinforcement in the slab required
by 5.7 shall be placed in the direction orthogonal to the joist.
② When removable forms or fillers not complying with ① are used, the followings shall be
considered.
(a) Slab thickness shall be not less than one-twelfth of the clear distance between joists and 50
mm.
(b) When concentrated loading is considered, reinforcement required for the flexural moment
resistance shall be placed in the direction orthogonal to the joists, according to 5.7.
③ When embedment of conduits or pipes in the slab is permitted by the qualified structural
engineer, slab thickness shall be at least 25 mm greater than the total overall height of the
conduits or pipes at any point. In this case, embedment of conduits or pipes in the slab shall not
significantly reduce the strength of the joist structure.

(3) For joist structure, concrete shear strength of section,   , shall be permitted to be increased to 10
percent greater than the strength specified in Chapter 7.

54
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

4.1 General

4.1.1 Scope

(1) In order to ensure satisfactory performance of structural system or member, serviceability and
durability requirements under service load shall be considered.

(2) For the verification of serviceability requirements, the effects of crack, deflection, and fatigue shall be
considered as specified in this Code.

4.1.2 Notations

 ：Elastic modulus of concrete, MPa

 ：Smallest dimension of member, mm
 ：2nd moment of inertia of cracked cross-section
 ：2nd moment of inertia of effective cross section
 ：2nd moment of inertia of gross cross section, neglecting reinforcing steel
  ：Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
 ：Rupture strength of concrete, MPa
 ：Specified yield strength of reinforcing steel, MPa
  ：Splitting tensile strength of concrete, MPa
 ：Live load
 ：Member length, mm
 ：Clear span of beam, or larger of the clear spans of two-way slab
 ：Maximum flexural moment considered for the calculation of deflection.

  ：Flexural moment, causing flexural crack in cross-section

55
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

 ：Mass per unit volume of concrete, kg/m3

 ：Distance from the center of gravity of a gross cross section to the extreme tensile fiber,
neglecting reinforcing steel

 ： Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to that of slab bounded by centerlines of two adjacent
panels

 ： Average of  values of all edge beams in a slab panel

 ： Ratio of long clear span to short clear span for two-way slab
 ：Coefficient of light weight concrete (see Table 3.4.4)
 ：Coefficient of long-term deflection
 ：Elapsed time coefficient for sustained loading
′ ：Ratio of compressive steel reinforcement
4.2 Crack

(1) Except as considered in 4.2 (2) and (3), the design shall be regarded to be satisfied against
cracking, if the design satisfies all requirements specified in this Code, including section 6.3.3.

(2) Particularly for watertight structures, crack evaluation shall be made by an adequate method.
When necessary, allowable crack width can be established to ensure the required level of
watertightness.

(3) When aesthetic view of structure is critical, allowable crack width shall be specified on the basis of
aesthetic criteria.

(4) Reinforcements shall be provided to control cracking due to temperature, and drying shrinkage
according to section 5.7, in addition to the reinforcements required to resist applied loads. The
additional reinforcements shall be distributed around the perimeter of the cross section. The
reinforcements shall have as small diameter and spacing as possible.

4.3 Deflection

4.3.1 One-way System or Member

(1) For one-way structural members not supporting partition walls or other members that are vulnerable

56
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

to damage due to large deflection member thickness shall be not less than the values specified in
Table 4.3.1. However, when the deflection satisfies the limits specified in Table 4.3.2, the
thickness shall be permitted to be less than the minimum thickness in Table 4.3.1.

Table 4.3.1 Minimum thickness for beam or one way slab, unless deflections are calculated

minimum thickness, 

one-end both-end
simply supported cantilever
Member type continuous continuous

structural members not supporting or attached to partition walls or

other members that are likely to be damaged by large deflection

·One-way slab /20 /24 /28 /10

·beam
/16 /18.5 /21 /8
·ribbed One-way slab

The values in Table 4.3.1 are applicable to members using normal weight concrete (  ＝2,300 kg/m ) 3

and steel reinforcing bars with the specified yield strength of 400 MPa. For the use of other materials,
the minimum thickness shall be modified as follows:
① For structural lightweight concrete (1,500-2,000 kg/m3), the minimum thickness obtained from the
table shall be multiplied by a factor of (1.65 －0.00031 ), but not less than 1.09.
② For 


other than 400 MPa, the minimum thickness obtained from the table shall be multiplied by
＋  /700).


a factor of (0.43 

(2) Immediate deflection due to applied loads shall be determined using formulas for elastic deflections,
considering the effects of cracks and reinforcements on the stiffness.

(3) Unless detailed analysis is performed to estimate the stiffness of member, the immediate deflection
of the member shall be calculated using the modulus of elasticity for concrete   (normal weight
and light weight concrete) and effective moment of inertia  (Eq. 4.3.1, not greater than  ).

    
 
＝   ＋ － 
 

  
   (4.3.1)

where,
  
  ＝  (4.3.2)


  ＝  
  (4.3.3)

57
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

    
 
＝   ＋ － 
 
  
  
 (4.3.1)

(4) For continuous members, it shall be permitted to use the average of  values (Eq. 4.3.1) at the
critical sections for positive and negative moment.

(5) Unless detailed analysis is used, additional long-term deflection of normal weight or lightweight
concrete flexural members due to creep and drying shrinkage, shall be permitted to be calculated
by multiplying the following coefficient to the immediate deflection value due to sustained loads.


 ＝  (4.3.4)
＋′

where ′ shall be computed at the midspan of a simple or continuous beams, or at the support of
cantilevers. Time-dependent coefficient, , for sustained load at a given loading period is defined
as follows.

more than 5 years 2.0

12 months 1.4
6 months 1.2
3 months 1.0

(6) The sum of the immediate deflection and additional long-term deflection shall not exceed the
deflection limits specified in Table 4.3.2

(7) For a structure subject to dynamic loads, such as pedestrians and vehicle loads, deflection shall
satisfy the following.
① For simple or continuous beams, deflection due to live loads and impact, shall not exceed 1/800
of the span. However, for bridges partially used by pedestrians in urban areas, deflection shall be
not greater than 1/1,000 of the span.
② Deflection of a cantilever, due to live load impact, shall not exceed 1/300 of the length. If
pedestrian usage is considered, deflection shall be not greater than 1/375 of the cantilever length.

58
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

Table 4.3.2 Maximum allowable deflection

Deflection
Type of structural member Deflection type to be considered
limit

Flat roofs that are neither attached to nor supporting

Instantaneous deflection due to  1)
non-structural members likely to be damaged by large 
live loads,  
deflection

Floors that are neither attached to nor supporting

Instantaneous deflection due to 
non-structural members likely to be damaged by 
live loads,  
large deflection

Roofs or floors that are attached to or supporting

 2)
non-structural members likely to be damaged by Deflections occurring after 

large deflection non-structural elements are
attached (i.e. sum of long-term
deflection due to all sustained
Roofs or floors that are attached to or supporting loads and instantaneous deflection
 4)
non-structural members likely to be damaged by due to additional live loads)3) 

large deflection

1) This limit shall not warrant safety against ponding

. A necessary analysis shall be performed to determine deflection due to ponding, including long-term
effects of all possible sustained loads, camber, construction error, and efficiency of drainage system.
2) This limit may be waived if appropriate measures are taken to prevent any damage to the
supporting or attached non-structural members.
3) Although Long-term deflection is calculated in accordance with 4.3.1(5) or 4.3.3(2), the deflection
occurring before placement of non-structural members may shall be permitted to be reduced.
This reduction shall be determined on the basis of appropriate technical data on characteristics of
time-dependent deflection of similar members.
4) Deflection shall be not greater than the allowable tolerance for the non-structural members.
However, where camber is provided, the this limit may be exceeded, unless the net deflection
obtained by subtracting the camber from the total deflection is greater than the limit.

4.3.2 Two-way Structure

(1) For a slab with a ratio of long-side span to short-side span not exceeding 2, or other two-way
structure, the minimum thickness shall conform to the requirements of 4.3.2

(2) For a slab without interior beams or a slab with stiffness ratio   not greater than 0.2, minimum
thickness shall satisfy the values in Table 4.3.3 and shall be not less than the following.
① For a slab without drop panel conforming to 10.3.4 : 120 mm
② For a slab with drop panel conforming to 10.3.4 : 100 mm

59
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

Table 4.3.3 Minimum thickness of slabs without interior beams

Design Without drop panels With drop panels

yield Exterior slabs Exterior slabs
Interior Interior
strength Without edge With edge Without edge With edge
slabs slabs
  (MPa) beams beams beams beams
300  / 32  / 35  / 35  / 35  / 39  / 39
350  / 31  / 34  / 34  / 34  / 37.5  / 37.5

400  / 30  / 33  / 33  / 33  / 36  / 36
500  / 28  / 31  / 31  / 31  / 33  / 33

600  / 26  / 29  / 29  / 29  / 31  / 31

(3) Where beams with stiffness ratio   greater than 0.2 are located around the slab, the minimum
slab thickness shall conform to the following provisions.
① For 0.2 <   < 2.0, the slab thickness shall be not less than the value of Eq. 4.3.5, nor less
than 120 mm.

＝ 

 ＋ 

  (4.3.5)
 ＋     －  

② For  ≧ 2.0, the slab thickness shall be not less than the value obtained by Eq. 4.3.6, nor
less than 90 mm.

＝ 

 ＋ 

   (4.3.6)
 ＋  

③ At discontinuous edges, an edge beam with stiffness ratio  not less than 0.8 shall be provided,
or the minimum slab thickness specified by Eq. (4.3.5) or Eq. (4.3.6) shall be increased by at
least 10 %.

(4) Where computed deflections are not greater than the limit of Table 4.3.2 in 4.3.1(6) or the limit in
4.3.1(7), it shall be permitted to use a slab thickness less than the minimum thickness specified in
4.3.2(1) through 4.3.2(3). Deflections shall be computed considering dimension and shape of panels,
support condition, and restraint at the panel edge.

4.3.3 Prestress concrete structures

(1) For a flexural member designed according to the provisions of Chapter 9, immediate deflection shall
be calculated based on a general analysis method or elastic deflection formula. For uncracked

60
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

members in accordance with 9.2.2(3), it shall be permitted to use the moment of inertia for
concrete gross section,  .

(2) For cracked or partially cracked members in accordance with 9.2.2(3), deflections shall be calculated
using a moment-deflection relationship consisting of two straight lines or an effective moment of
inertia (  ) by Eq. 4.3.1, which is based on a cracked transformed section analysis.

(3) Additional long-term deflection in a prestressed member shall be calculated considering stresses of
concrete and reinforcing steel under sustained load, including creep and shrinkage of concrete and
relaxation of tendon.

(4) Defections computed according to (1) and (2) shall not exceed the limits specified in Table 4.3.2
and 4.3.1(7).

4.3.4 Composite structures

(1) When composite flexural member is propped during construction so that dead load is carried by the
full composite section after removal of temporary supports, the composite can be considered as a
monolithic member. For a non-prestressed member, minimum thickness of Table 4.3.1 for normal
weight or lightweight concrete shall be determined by the portion of concrete in compression.
When calculating deflections, curvature resulting from differential shrinkage between precast and
cast-in-place portions and effects of axial creep in prestressed members shall be considered.

(2) For structures without shoring, deflection need not be calculated in non-prestressed precast flexural
members if thickness satisfies the requirements of Table 4.3.1. In non-prestressed composite flexural
members satisfying the requirements of Table 4.3.1, deflection occurring after the member becomes
composite need not be calculated, but the long-term deflection of precast member shall be
investigated for the magnitude and duration of load prior to composite behavior.

(3) Deflection computed in accordance with (1) and (2) shall not exceed the limits specified in Table
4.3.2. and 4.3.1(7).

4.4 Fatigue

4.4.1 Scope

(1) This provisions shall apply to the structures that require safety check against fatigue due to large
live loads or high loading frequencies.

(2) Fatigue of beams or slabs shall be examined for bending and shear.

(3) Fatigue check is not required for columns, except when effects of bending moment and axial tension force
are significant, in which case column fatigue shall be checked according to the same provision as beam.

61
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

4.4.2 Safety Check Against Fatigue

(1) Safety check against fatigue is not required if stresses of reinforcing steel and prestressing tendon,
due to live loads including impacts, are within the limits of Table 4.4.1.

(2) Safety check against fatigue is required using appropriate methods if stresses of reinforcing steel
bars exceed the limits of Table 4.4.1.

(3) In structural members requiring fatigue check, reinforcement shall not be bent at locations where
high stresses are expected.

Table 4.4.1 Stress limits of steel reinforcements and prestressing tendons

Steel type Design yield strength or locations Stress limits (MPa)

300 MPa 130
Deformed rebar 350 MPa 140
400 MPa or higher 150
Connection or anchorage 140
Prestressing tendon
others 160

4.5 Durability Design

4.5.1 General

(1) Concrete structures shall be designed, constructed, and maintained to provide safety, serviceability,
durability, aesthetics for a given environment during the design lifetime.

(2) Before the beginning of design process, owner and structural engineer shall determine the importance of
structure, exposure condition, structural behavior, and maintenance method.

4.5.2 Durability Design Provisions

(1) Concrete exposed to ocean wind, sea water, sulfate, and other deleterious substances shall satisfy
the requirements stipulated in 4.5.4

(2) Structural engineer shall select appropriate design methods to assure durability of the structure.

(3) In the preliminary design phase, a structural layout vulnerable to environmental exposure conditions
shall be avoided and structural shape of concrete shall be selected to be accessible for maintenance
and inspection.

(4) Concrete quality shall be assured for the structure or structural members with exterior face exposed
to external environments. The Concrete with high density, high strength, and low water permeability

62
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

shall be used through proper compaction and curing, and shall ensure adequate cover thickness.

(5) Structural details of reinforced and prestressed concrete structural members shall be appropriate to ensure
robustness at the corners and joints of the members.

(6) If a structure is exposed to highly corrosive environmental conditions, surface of the structure shall
be protected to secure durability.

(7) Structural engineer shall check provisions and requirements regarding durability including concrete
material, cover thickness, reinforcement, tendon, deflection, cracking, fatigue, and others.

4.5.3 Exposure Types and Levels

(1) Qualified structural engineer shall select an appropriate exposure level in accordance with Table
4.5.1, based on the expected exposure conditions of structural concrete members.

63
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

Table 4.5.1 Exposure type and levels

Type Levels Exposure conditions

Negligible F0 Concrete not exposed to freezing-and-thawing cycle

Concrete occasionally exposed to moisture and

Normal F1
freezing-and-thawing cycles
F
Concrete in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to
(Freeze and thaw) Severe F2
freezing-and-thawing cycles

Concrete in continuous contact with moisture and exposed to

Extreme F3
freezing-and-thawing cycles

Mass percentage of
Sulfate(SO4) dissolved in water
water-soluble sulfate(SO4) in soil
(ppm)
(%)

S
Negligible S0 SO4 ＜0.10 SO4 ＜150
(Sulfate)

Normal S1 0.10≤SO ＜0.20

4 150 ≤SO ＜1,500, Sea water
4

Severe S2 0.20≤SO ＜2.00

4 1,500≤SO ≤10,000
4

Extreme S3 SO ＞2.00
4 SO ＞10,000
4

Negligible P0 Exposed to wet conditions where low permeability is not required

P
(Low permeability )
Required P1 Exposed to wet conditions where low permeability is required

Negligible C0 Dry or protected from wetting

C Normal C1 Exposed to wet conditions but not exposed to external chlorides

(corrosion
resistance)
Exposed directly to chlorides such as deicing chemicals, salt,
Severe C2
brackish water, and seawater or to spray from these sources

4.5.4 Specific durability requirements

(1) When exposure levels are determined by Table 4.5.1, concrete mix proportion shall satisfy the most
strict requirement specified in Table 4.5.2.

64
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

Table 4.5.2 Durability requirements

Minimum design
Maximum
Exposure compressive
water-binder Additional minimum requirements
level strength
ratio
 (MPa)

Limits on
Air content binding
materials
F0 - 21 - -
F1 0.45 30 -
F2 0.45 30 -
Table 4.5.3
Table
F3 0.45 30
4.5.4

Use of
calcium
Cement type
chloride as
admixture

No
S0 - 21 All types
restriction
Portland cement (type 1) ＋Pozzolan or slag 1)

Flyash cement (KS L 5211)

No
S1 0.5 27 Moderate heat Portland cement(type 2)
restriction
(KS L 5201)
Blast furnace slag cement (KS L 5210)
Sulfate resistant Portland cement
(type 5, KS L 5201) Not
S2 0.45 30
Blast furnace slag cement (KS L 5210) ＋ permitted
flyash
Sulfate resistant Portland cement (type 5, KS L Not
S3 0.45 30
5201) ＋pozzolan or slag 2)
permitted
P0 - 21 Not applicable
P1 0.50 27 Not applicable
Maximum water-soluble chloride ion (Cl-)
content in concrete Related
-
(Mass ratio of Cl to cement mass in %) provisions
Reinforced concrete Prestressed concrete
C0 - 21 1.00 0.06
None
C1 - 21 0.30 0.06
C2 0.40 35 0.15 0.06 5.4
1) Pozzolan or slag proven to improve resistance to sulfate in field application or proven by testing, when used
with type 1 Portland cement
2) Pozzolan or slag proven to improve resistance to sulfate in field application or proven by testing, when used
with type 5 Portland cement

65
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

(2) For normal weight or lightweight concrete corresponding to exposure levels F1, F2, and F3, the air
content specified in Table 4.5.3 shall be secured with a tolerance of ±1.5 % . If the specified
concrete strength exceeds 35 MPa the air content in Table 4.5.3 may be reduced by 1 %.

Table 4.5.3 Total air content for freeze-thaw resistance concretes

Air content(%)
Maximum aggregate size (mm)
Exposure level F1 Exposure level F2 and F3
10.0 6.0 7.5
15.0 5.5 7.0
20.0 5.0 6.0
25.0 4.5 6.0
40.0 4.5 5.5

(3) To prevent corrosion of steel reinforcing bars, the total chloride ion content in fresh concrete shall
not exceed 0.30 kg/m3. However, a chloride content up to 0.60 kg/m3 may be allowed with permission
from the qualified structural engineer. For a hardened concrete, its total chloride ion content may be
gauged by verifying maximum aqueous chloride ion concentration, obtained in accordance with KS F 2713
or KS F 2715, against the limits specified in Table 4.5.2.

(4) For concrete of exposure level C2, requirements of the maximum water-binder ratio and minimum
specified compressive strength specified in Table 4.5.2, and minimum cover thickness of 5.4 shall
be satisfied.

(5) For concrete of exposure level F3, mix proportions of flyash, silica fume, slag, and pozzolan used
in the concrete shall satisfy the maximum admixture replacement ratios specified in Table 4.5.4.

Table 4.5.4 Maximum ratio of mineral admixture for exposure level F3 concrete

Mass of admixture/Total mass of binder

Admixture type
(%)
Flyash or other pozzolanic materials conforming to KS L
25
5405
Granulated blast furnace slag conforming to KS F 2563 50
Silica fume 10
Sum of flyash or other pozzolanic admixtures, granulated
501)
blast furnace slag, and silica fume
Sum of flyash, other pozzolanic admixtures, and silica
351)
fume
1) Flyash or other pozzolanic admixtures shall not exceed 25 %; silica fume shall not exceed 10 %.

66
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 4 Serviceability and Durability Requirements

4.6 Repair, Retrofit, and Maintenance

4.6.1 General

(1) Concrete structures shall be maintained to ensure safety, serviceability, durability, aesthetics during
the design lifetime under given environmental conditions. Concrete structures shall be maintained
through periodic inspection and repair·retrofit when necessary, to maintain the original function and
ensure the convenience and safety of user.

(2) For cracked structures, causes and detrimental effects of concrete cracking shall be investigated in
accordance with appendix III.

(3) Structural safety assessment of existing concrete structures shall be carried out in accordance with Chapter
20.

(4) Structural safety assessment and repair·retrofit design of existing concrete structures shall be performed
by qualified structural engineer.

4.6.2 Repair·retrofit design

(1) Proper design methods shall be used for repairs to restore structural safety, serviceability, durability, aesthetics
of damaged concrete structures.

(2) Proper retrofit or strengthening design methods shall be used to restore or enhance load-carrying capacity of
existing concrete structures.

(3) In the design for repair and retrofit, structure shall be examined to investigate cause and degree of
damage and resistance strength, and to determine environmental conditions, load conditions, required
strength, and the extent and scale of repair and retrofit. In addition, design of sections and
members shall be performed by selecting appropriate materials for repair·retrofit and proper
construction methods shall be considered.

(4) Retrofit design shall consider not only increase in strength of the retrofitted structure, but also
improvement in durability and serviceability.

(5) Qualified structural engineer shall perform quality control inspection for each construction phase, to secure
construction quality during repair·retrofit of existing structures.

67
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

5.1 General

5.1.1 Scope

(1) The provisions of this chapter shall apply to fabrication and detailing of reinforcement and welded
wire reinforcement of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete members, and to placement of
tendons and ducts.

(2) The provisions of this chapter shall also apply to concrete cover thickness, and to reinforcement for
shrinkage and temperature change.

5.1.2 Notations

 : Effective depth of beam, mm

 : Nominal diameter of reinforcement, wire or prestressing strand, mm

 : Specified yield strength of tension reinforcement, MPa

 : Development length of reinforcement, refer to Chapter 8

 : Volumetric ratio of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core(measured between out-to-out of

spiral) strengthened by spiral reinforcement in compression members

5.2 Fabrication of Reinforcement

5.2.1 Standard hooks

(1) Standard hooks of longitudinal reinforcement are classified as 180 degree and 90 degree standard
hooks. Each standard hook shall satisfy the following.
180-degree standard hooks shall be extended by 4  or greater, but not less than 60 mm at bent
end of semicircle.
90-degree standard hook shall be extended by 12  or greater at bent end of semicircle.

(2) Standard hooks of stirrup and tie are classified as 90 degree and 135 degree bend hooks. The
hooks shall be fabricated as follows.
90 degree standard hook
(a) bars not greater than D16 shall be extended by 6  or greater at bent end of semicircle.
(b) D19, D22 and D25 bars shall be extended by 12  or greater at bent end of semicircle.
135-degree standard hook
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

bars not greater than D25 shall be extended by 6  or greater at bent end of semicircle.

5.2.2 Minimum inner radius of bend

(1) Minimum inner radius of bend for 180 degree and 90 degree standard hooks of longitudinal
reinforcement shall not be less than the values given in Table 5.2.1.

Table 5.2.1 Minimum inner radius of bend

Bar size Minimum inner radius

D10 ~ D25 3 
D29 ~ D35 4 
D38 and larger 5 

(2) Inner radii of standard hook for stirrup and tie shall satisfy the following.
① For stirrup and tie not greater than D16, inner radius of hooks shall not be less than 2 . 

② For stirrup and tie not less than D19, inner radius of hooks shall be in accordance with Table
5.2.1.

(3) For welded wire reinforcement (round or deformed) used for stirrups and ties, inner radius of bend
in standard hooks shall not be less than 2 for deformed wire with not less than 7 mm diameter,
and  for other wires. In addition, bends with inner radius of less than 4 shall be placed no
less than 4 away from nearest welded intersection.

(4) Inner radius of bend for all other reinforcements except standard hooks shall not be less than the
values given in Table 5.2.1.

5.2.3 Bending reinforcement

(1) All reinforcements shall be bent in room temperature except for the case permitted by the qualified
structural engineer.

(2) Reinforcements partially embedded in concrete shall not be bent in field. However, the
reinforcements embedded in concrete shall be bent in field for the case as specified in the design
drawings or permitted by the qualified structural engineers.

5.2.4 Surface conditions of reinforcement

(1) When concrete is placed, surface of reinforcement shall be free from mud, oil, or other nonmetallic
coatings that decrease bond. Epoxy-coating of reinforcement in accordance with 2.2.3(5) shall be
permitted.

(2) Except for tendons, rust, mill scale, or a combination of both in reinforcement need not be

69
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

removed, unless dimensions including height of knots and weight of reinforcement is less than the
requirements in KS D 3504.

(3) Surface of tendons shall be clean and free from oil, dirt, scale, pitting and excessive rust. However,
a light coating of rust that does not affect the strength shall be permitted.

5.3 Placing Reinforcement

5.3.1 Principles

(1) Reinforcements, tendons and ducts shall be accurately placed, and adequately supported against
displacement, and arranged for easy construction before concrete is placed.

(2) Reinforcements, tendons and ducts shall be placed within the tolerances given in Table 5.3.1, unless
otherwise permitted by the qualified structural engineer.
① Tolerances for effective depth,  and for the minimum concrete cover in flexural members, walls
and compression members shall be in accordance with the values given in Table 5.3.1.

Table 5.3.1 Tolerances

Effective depth (  ) Allowable range Minimum concrete cover1)

 ≤200 mm ±10 mm －10 mm
 ＞200 mm ±13 mm －13 mm
– 7 mm, In addition, tolerances for all cases
1) Tolerance for the clear distance to the soffit of form shall be
of concrete cover shall not exceed –1/3 of the minimum concrete cover required by the design drawings or
this Code.

② Tolerances for longitudinal location of bends and ends of reinforcement shall be ±50 mm.
However, tolerance shall be ±13 mm at the discontinuous ends of brackets and corbels , and ±
25 mm at the discontinuous ends of other members. In addition, the minimum concrete cover
provisions in 5.3.1(2) ① shall also apply at the discontinuous ends of members
③ Where placement of reinforcement is to deviate the location specified in the design drawings by
more than  , approval of qualified structural engineer is required.

(3) When welded wire reinforcement with diameter not greater than 6.4 mm used in slabs not greater
than 3 m in span is either continuous over the support or securely anchored at the support, the
welded wire reinforcement shall be bent from a point near the top of slab over the support to a
point near the bottom of slab at midspan.

(4) Welding of crossing bars for assembly of reinforcement shall not be allowed. However, welding of
such reinforcements shall be allowed for a case permitted by the qualified structural engineer.

70
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

5.3.2 Spacing limits

(1) Clear spacing between parallel reinforcements in a layer shall not be less than 25 mm, nor less than
the nominal diameter of the reinforcements. In addition, the clear spacing shall also be in
accordance with provision of 2.2.1(2) ④.
(2) Reinforcements in the upper layer shall be placed directly above reinforcements in the lower layer
for the case that reinforcements are placed in two or more layers at both top and bottom. The
clear spacing between the upper and the lower reinforcements shall not be less than 25 mm.

(3) Clear spacing of longitudinal reinforcements shall not be less than 40 mm, nor less than 1.5 times
the nominal diameter of reinforcement in compression members confined by spirals or ties . The
clear spacing shall be in accordance with provision of 2.2.1(2) ④.
(4) Provisions for clear spacing of reinforcement shall apply to the clear spacing between a contact lap
splice and adjacent splices or reinforcements.

(5) In walls or slabs, spacing between flexural longitudinal reinforcements shall not be greater than
three times the wall or slab thickness, nor greater than 450 mm. However, this provision shall not
be applied for concrete joist structure.

(6) Bundled reinforcements shall be in accordance with the following.

① Bundled reinforcements binding two or more reinforcements shall be deformed bars and of the
number of bars in a bundle shall not be greater than 4. Bundled reinforcements shall be enclosed
by stirrups or ties.
② Individual reinforcement in a bundled reinforcement terminated within the span of flexural
members shall terminate at different points with a stagger of not less than 40 .
③ In case that spacing between bundled reinforcements and the minimum concrete cover are
represented by reinforcement diameter, diameter of a bundled reinforcement shall be treated as a
single reinforcement diameter transformed by the equivalent sectional area.
④ Reinforcements greater than D35 shall not be bundled in beams.
(7) Tendons and ducts shall comply with the following.
① Center-to-center spacing of pretensioning tendons at the end of a member shall not be less than 5
 for steel wire, and 4 for steel wire strands. If, however, specified compressive strength of
concrete is greater than 27 MPa at time of initial prestress, minimum center-to-center spacing shall
be 45mm for steel wire strands with not greater than 13mm nominal diameter and 50 mm for
steel wire strands with not less than 15mm nominal diameter. In addition, provision of 2.2.1(2) ④
shall be satisfied. In the middle portion of a span, closer vertical spacing and bundling of tendons
shall be permitted.
② Bundling of ducts shall be permitted for post-tensioning members if shown that concrete can be
properly placed and provision is made to prevent tendons from damaging the duct when
tensioned.

71
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

5.4 Minimum Concrete Cover Thickness

5.4.1 Cast-in-place concrete of non-prestressed members

Minimum cover thickness for cast-in-place concrete of nonprestressed members shall comply with the
following provisions and also satisfy provisions of 5.4.6.

① Concrete cast in water 100 mm

② Concrete cast against earth and permanently embedded in earth 80 mm
③ Concrete in contact with earth or exposed to outdoor air
(a) Reinforcements not less than D29 60 mm
(b) Reinforcements not greater than D25 50 mm
(c) Reinforcements not greater than D16, and wires not greater than 16 mm in diameter 40 mm
④ Concrete not exposed to outdoor air or not in contact with earth
(a) Slabs, walls, joists
ⓐ Reinforcements exceeding D35 40 mm
ⓑ Reinforcements not greater than D35 20 mm
(b) Beams, columns 40 mm
Cover thickness can be reduced by 10mm from the specified value if specified compressive
strength of concrete,   is not less than 40 MPa.
(c) Shells, folded plate members 20 mm

5.4.2 Cast-in-place concrete of prestressed members

Minimum cover thickness for cast-in-place concrete of prestressed members shall comply with the
following provisions and also satisfy provisions of 5.4.6.

① Concrete cast against earth and

permanently embedded in earth 80 mm
② Concrete in contact with earth or exposed to outdoor air
(a) Walls, slabs, joists 30 mm
(b) Other members 40 mm
③ Concrete not exposed to outdoor air or not in contact with earth
(a) Slabs, walls, joists 20 mm
(b) Beams, columns
ⓐ Longitudinal reinforcements 40 mm
ⓑ Ties, stirrups, spirals 30 mm
(c) Shells, folded plate members
ⓐ Reinforcements not less than D19 
ⓑ Reinforcements not greater than D16, and wires not greater than 16 mm in diameter
10 mm
④ If prestressed concrete members exposed to earth, outdoor air or corrosive environments are
classified as partially cracked or completely cracked class members in accordance with 9.2.2(3),

72
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

minimum cover thickness shall be increased by no less than 50%, except that pre-compressed
tensile zone is in compression under sustained loads.
⑤ Minimum cover thickness for non-prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with 5.4.3 in
prestressed concrete members manufactured under identical plant control conditions.

5.4.3 Precast concrete

Minimum cover thickness for precast concrete shall comply with the following provisions and also the
provisions of 5.4.6.
① Concrete in contact with earth or exposed to outdoor air
(a) Walls
ⓐ Reinforcements exceeding D35 and tendons exceeding 40 mm in diameter 40 mm
ⓑ Reinforcements not greater than D35, tendons not greater than 40 mm in diameter and wires not
greater than 16 mm in diameter 20 mm
(b) Other members
ⓐ Reinforcements exceeding D35 and tendons exceeding 40 mm in diameter 50 mm
ⓑ Reinforcements not greater than D35 nor less than D19, and tendons exceeding 16 mm in
diameter and not greater than 40 mm in diameter 40 mm
ⓒ Reinforcements not greater than D16, and wires not greater than 16 mm in diameter and
tendons not greater than 16 mm in diameter 30 mm
② Concrete not exposed to outdoor air or not in contact with earth
(a) Slabs, walls, joists
ⓐ Reinforcements exceeding D35 and tendons exceed 40 mm in diameter 30 mm
ⓑ Reinforcement not greater than D35 and tendons not greater than 40 mm in diameter 20 mm
ⓒ Wires not greater than 16 mm in diameter 15 mm
(b) Beams. columns
ⓐ Longitudinal reinforcements 
Minimum cover thickness shall not be less than 15 mm and need not exceed 40 mm
ⓑ Ties, stirrups, spirals 10 mm
(c) Shells, folded plate members
ⓐ Tendons 20 mm
ⓑ Reinforcements not less than D19 15 mm
ⓒ Reinforcements not greater than D16, and wires not greater than 16 mm in diameter 10 mm

5.4.4 Bundled reinforcements

Cover thickness for bundled reinforcements shall not be less than the equivalent diameter of the bundle.
However, cover thickness needs not to be greater than 60 mm. Cover thickness shall not be less than
80 mm for concrete cast against earth and permanently embedded in earth, and 100 mm for concrete
cast in water.

73
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

5.4.5 Headed shear stud

Cover thickness for headed shear stud shall not be less than the required cover thickness for the
reinforcement in a member in which the headed shear stud is placed.

5.4.6 Concrete exposed to special environments

(1) Cover thickness shall be increased in accordance with 5.4.6(2) for concrete under the following
conditions.
① For structural systems requiring high durability
② For structural systems located within 250 m from coast, and directly exposed to chloride attack
without additional surface protection
③ For a condition under severe erosion due to water flow or under chemical attack
(2) Cover thickness shall not be less than the following for cases specified in 5.4.6(1).
① Cast-in-place concrete
(a) Walls, slabs reinforced by reinforcing bars not greater than D16 50 mm
(b) Other members except for (a) 80 mm
② Precast concrete
(a) Walls, slabs 40 mm
(b) Other members 50 mm
③ For prestressed concrete members classified as partially cracked or completely cracked class
according to 9.2.2(3), minimum cover thickness shall not be less than 1.5 times the values
specified in 5.4.2, except that pre-compressed tensile zone is in compression under sustained
loads.

(3) Cover thickness of a structure requiring fire protection shall be determined considering temperature
and duration of fire and properties of used aggregate. When the required cover thickness is greater
than the minimum cover thickness specified in 5.4, equivalent fireproof or coating materials shall
be used or cover thickness shall be increased

(4) Exposed reinforcement for addition and extension shall be protected from corrosion.

5.5 Transverse Reinforcement for Members

5.5.1 Transverse reinforcement for flexural members

(1) Compression reinforcement in beams shall be enclosed by ties or stirrups or by welded wire
reinforcements of equivalent cross-sectional area. Sizes and spacings of ties or stirrups shall satisfy
provisions of 5.5.2(3). In addition, such ties and stirrups shall be provided over the distance where
compression reinforcement is placed.

(2) Transverse reinforcement for flexural framing members subjected to stress reversals or torsion at
supports shall be composed of closed ties, closed stirrups or spirals extending around the flexural reinforcement.

74
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

(3) Closed ties or closed stirrups shall be formed in one piece by overlapping standard hooks of stirrup
or tie around a longitudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces lap-spliced with class B splice
(lap of 1.3  ), or anchored in accordance with 8.5.4.

5.5.2 Transverse reinforcement for compression members

(1) Transverse reinforcement for each compression member shall conform to the following provisions.
① Transverse reinforcement for compression members shall conform to provisions of 5.5.2(2) and
5.5.2(3), and shall also conform to provisions of Chapter 7, in case that shear or torsion reinforcement
is required.
② Transverse reinforcement for composite compression members shall conform to 17.4
③ Transverse reinforcement for tendons shall conform to 9.7
④ When it is confirmed by experiment and analysis that compression member has sufficient strength
without transverse reinforcement, provisions of 5.5.2, 9.7 and 17.4 for transverse reinforcement
need not apply.

(2) Spirals for compression members shall conform to the following.

① Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous reinforcing bar or wire, and size of spirals shall
be ensured to be fabricated and placed without distortion from designed dimensions.
② Spiral reinforcement ratio  shall conform to provision of 6.4.2(3).


③ For cast-in-place concrete construction, diameter of spirals shall not be less than 10 mm.
④ Clear spacing between spirals shall not be less than 25 mm, but not greater than 75 mm.
⑤ Anchorage of spirals shall be ensured by additional 1.5 turns at the end of the spirals.
⑥ Splice of spirals shall conform to one of the following.
(a) Lap splices not less than the length defined in one of ⓐ through ⓔ, nor less than 300 mm.
ⓐ Deformed reinforcement or wire 48 
ⓑ Plain reinforcement or wire


72 
ⓒ Epoxy-coated deformed reinforcement or wire


72 
ⓓ Uncoated plain reinforcement or wire with standard hooks satisfying 5.2.1(2)


48  

The hooks shall be anchored within the core concrete confined by spirals.
ⓔ Epoxy-coated deformed reinforcement or wire with standard hooks satisfying 5.2.1(2) 48 
The hooks shall be anchored within the core concrete confined by spirals.
(b) Mechanical or welded splices satisfying 8.6.1(3)

⑦ Spirals shall be extended from top of footing or footing slab to the lowest horizontal
reinforcement in members supported above.
⑧ Where beams or brackets are not connected to all sides of a column, additional ties shall be
arranged from the termination point of spirals to bottom of slab, drop panel, or column shear cap.
⑨ Spirals in columns with capitals shall be extended to a point that diameter or width of the
capitals is two times that of the columns.
⑩ Spirals shall be assembled firmly in place by using vertical spacer.

75
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

(3) Ties for compression members shall conform to the following provisions.
① Longitudinal reinforcements not greater than D32 shall be enclosed by ties not less than D10.
Longitudinal reinforcements not less than D35 and bundled reinforcements shall be enclosed by
ties not less than D13. Instead of ties, deformed wire or welded wire of equivalent cross-sectional
area shall be permitted.
② Vertical spacing of ties shall not be greater than 16 times longitudinal reinforcement diameters, 48
times tie or wire diameters, or least dimension of the cross section of column.
③ Every corner and alternate longitudinal reinforcement shall be laterally supported by the corner of
a tie bent at an angle of not greater than 135-degree. However, where clear spacing between two
adjacent longitudinal bars laterally supported along a tie is not less than 150 mm, additional ties
shall be arranged to support laterally longitudinal reinforcement. In addition, where longitudinal
reinforcements are arranged in a circle, it shall be permitted to use circular ties. For anchorage,
circular tie shall overlap not less than 150 mm and then enclose longitudinal reinforcement with
standard hook.
④ The first tie in compression members above the top of footing or slab shall be located vertically
within one-half a tie spacing. In addition, the first tie located below the lowest horizontal
reinforcement placed in slab, drop panel, or column shear cap shall be located within one-half of
a tie spacing.
⑤ Where beams or brackets are connected to four sides of a column, ties shall be terminated within
75 mm below the lowest horizontal reinforcement of the beams or brackets. Width of beams shall
not be less than one-half width of the column.
⑥ Where anchor bolts are located in the top of columns or pedestals, the anchor bolts shall be
enclosed by transverse reinforcement surrounding at least four vertical reinforcements of the
columns or pedestals. The transverse reinforcement shall be arranged within 125 mm from the top
of the columns or pedestals, and shall be composed of at least two D13 or three D10
reinforcements.

5.6 Special Detailing of Reinforcements for Columns and Connections

5.6.1 Offset bent reinforcements

(1) Where cross-sectional dimensions vary at a column connection, offset bent reinforcements shall be
placed in accordance with the following provisions.

(2) Slope of an offset bent reinforcement at the inclined portion shall not exceed 1/6.

(3) Portions of offset reinforcement above and below offset bend shall be parallel to axis of column.

(4) Horizontal support shall be provided by ties, spirals or floor structure at the bend portion of offset
bent reinforcement. Horizontal support shall be designed to resist 1.5 times the horizontal component
of the offset reinforcement force computed in the inclined portion. Where ties or spirals are used
as horizontal support, such ties and spirals shall be placed within 150 mm from the points of
bend.

76
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

(5) Offset bent reinforcement shall be bent prior to the placement in the forms.

(6) Where upper column face is offset 75 mm or greater from lower column face in a column
connection, longitudinal reinforcement shall not be offset. In such case, separate dowels lap spliced
with longitudinal reinforcements of offset columns shall be used and the lap splice shall conform to
provisions of 8.8.

5.6.2 Steel cores

(1) Ends of steel core in composite compression members shall be precisely finished to bear at end
bearing splice, in a straight line with concentric contact between spliced steel cores.

(2) At end bearing splices, it shall be considered that not greater than 50 % of the total compressive
force of the steel core is transferred effectively by bearing.

(3) Interface between column base and footing shall be designed to transfer stress in accordance with
provisions of 12.4.

(4) Base of steel core shall be designed to transfer the total load of the entire composite member to
footing. However, if reinforced concrete section is large enough to transfer a portion of the total
load to the footing by concrete and reinforcement, it shall be permitted to design the base of the
steel core to transfer the load from the steel core only.

5.6.3 Connections

(1) At connections of primary framing members such as beams and columns, enclosing reinforcement
shall be arranged for splices of continuing reinforcement and anchorage of reinforcement terminating
in such connections.
(2) Enclosing reinforcement shall be composed of external concrete or internal closed ties, spirals, or
stirrups.

5.7 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement

5.7.1 General design

(1) Where flexural reinforcement in slab is placed in one direction only, shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement shall be arranged in normal direction to the flexural reinforcement.

(2) Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall conform to provisions of 5.7.2 or 5.7.3

(3) The amount of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement specified in 5.7.2 shall be the minimum for
flexural members where movements by shrinkage and temperature change is not significantly
restrained. For the members where movements by shrinkage and temperature change is significantly

77
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

restrained, minimum reinforcement shall be increased considering load combinations specified in

3.3.2.

5.7.2 Reinforced concrete one-way slab

(1) Deformed reinforcement and welded wire used as shrinkage and temperature reinforcements shall not
be less than the followings, but not less than 0.0014. Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement ratio
shall be defined as the ratio of reinforcement area to gross concrete area.
① Slabs where deformed reinforcements with a specified yield strength not greater than 400 MPa are
used 0.0020
② Slabs where deformed reinforcements or welded wire with a specified yield strength exceeding

400 MPa   × 


(2) However cross-sectional area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement calculated by multiplying
the reinforcement ratio required in 5.7.2(1) and gross concrete area need not be taken greater than
1,800 mm2 per unit width in meter.

(3) Spacing of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall not be greater than five times the slab
thickness, nor greater than 450 mm.

(4) Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be anchored to develop   .

5.7.3 Prestressed concrete one-way slab

(1) Tendons used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall conform to provisions of 5.7.3(2) and
5.7.3(3).

(2) Tendons shall be placed to provide a average compressive stress of not less than 0.7 MPa on gross
concrete area due to effective prestress. Spacing of tendons shall not be greater than 1.8 m.

(3) Where spacing of tendons exceeds 1.3 m, additional shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be
provided in accordance with 5.7.2. The additional reinforcement shall be placed between the tendons
extending from the slab edge for a distance equal to the tendon spacing.

5.8 Requirements for Structural Integrity

5.8.1 Cast-in-place concrete structure

(1) In joist structure, at least one bottom reinforcement shall be continuous or shall be spliced at
supports with Class B tension splice or with mechanical or welded splice satisfying 8.6.1(3), and
shall be anchored to develop specified yield strength at discontinuous supports using standard hook
satisfying 8.2.5 or headed deformed reinforcement satisfying 8.2.6.

78
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 5 Details of Reinforcement

(2) In the perimeter beams of structures, continuous reinforcement consisting of the followings shall be
placed over the entire span length passing through the portion surrounded by longitudinal
reinforcement of the column. At discontinuous supports, reinforcements specified in ① and ② shall
be anchored to develop specified yield strength at the support face with using standard hook
satisfying 8.2.5 or headed deformed reinforcement satisfying 8.2.6.
① At least, one-sixth of tension reinforcement required for negative moment at support, but not less
than two tension reinforcements
② At least, one-quarter of tension reinforcement required for positive moment at midspan, but not
less than two tension reinforcements

(3) Continuous reinforcement required in 5.8.1(2) shall be enclosed by transverse reinforcement of the
type specified in 7.6.3, and the transverse reinforcement shall be anchored in accordance with
7.6.3(2). The transverse reinforcements need not to be placed continuously into the inside of
connections.

(4) Where splices are required to ensure continuity, top and bottom reinforcement shall be spliced at or
near midspan and at or near supports, respectively, using class B tension splice or using
mechanical or welded splice satisfying 8.6.1(3).

(5) Members other than perimeter beams conform to the following, unless transverse reinforcement
specified in 5.8.1(3) is provided
① One-quarter or greater of tension reinforcement required for positive moment at midspan, but not
less than two tension reinforcements shall pass through the portion surrounded by longitudinal
reinforcement of the column.
② Reinforcements specified in 5.8.1(5)① shall be continuous at or near supports or shall be spliced
with class B tension splice, or with mechanical or welded splices satisfying 8.6.1(3).
③ Reinforcements specified in 5.8.1(5)① shall be anchored to develop specified yield strength at the
face of discontinuous supports using standard hook satisfying 8.2.5 or headed deformed
reinforcement satisfying 8.2.6.

(6) Two-way slab structure shall conform to provision of 10.6.4(5). However, prestressed concrete
two-way slab structure shall conform to provisions of 9.8.2(6) and 9.8.2(7).

5.8.2 Precast concrete structure

(1) For precast concrete structure, tensions ties shall be placed in the transverse, longitudinal, and
vertical directions and around the perimeter of the structure to tie member elements effectively. In
addition, provisions of 16.3.1 shall be satisfied.

(2) Lift-slab structure shall conform to provision of 10.6.4(6)

79
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

6.1 General

6.1.1 Scope

(1) Members under flexure or axial loads or combined flexure and axial load shall be designed by
provisions of this chapter.

(2) Design provisions of this Chapter shall apply for calculation of flexural loads, axial loads and
member strength.

(3) Shear force, torsional moment and corresponding strength of member cross section shall be
calculated according to provisions of Chapter 7.

6.1.2 Notations

 : Depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in 6.2.1(7) ①

  : Cross-sectional area of a core area measured from the center of spiral column to the outside
edges of spiral reinforcement, mm2

 : Gross area of concrete section, mm2

 : Area of nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement, mm2

   m in : Minimum area of flexural reinforcement, mm2, see 6.3.2

 : Total area of nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement (bars of steel shapes), mm2

 : Loaded area, mm2

 : Area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the support and having for its upper base the loaded area, and
having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal, mm2, see 6.8(1)

 : Width of compression face of member, mm

 : Web width of member, mm

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis, mm

80
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

 : Clear cover of reinforcement, mm

 : Factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram

 : Effective depth, distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension
reinforcement, mm

 m in : Minimum eccentricity, mm. see Eq. (6.5.11)

 : Modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

 : Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa

 : Flexural stiffness of compression member, see Eqs. (6.5.7) and (6.5.8)

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Calculated tensile stress in reinforcement at service loads, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

  : Specified yield strength of spiral reinforcement, MPa

 : Overall thickness or height of member, mm

 : Moment of inertia of section about centroidal axis, mm4

 : Moment of inertia of gross section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement, mm4

 : Moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member cross section, mm4

 : Effective length factor for compression member

 : Span length of member measured center-to-center of the joint in frame, mm

 : Length of compression member in a frame, measured center-to-center of the joints in the

frame, mm

 : Length of clear span measured face-to-face of supports, mm

 : Unsupported length of compression member, mm

81
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

 : Factored moment amplified for the effects of member curvature used for design of
compression member which is braced against sidesway

 : Factored moment due to loads causing sidesway

 : Factored moment at section

 : Smaller factored end moment on a compression member, to be taken as positive if member

is bent in single curvature, and negative if bent in double curvature

  : Factored end moment on a compression member at the end at which   acts, due to loads
that cause no sidesway, calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis

  : Factored end moment on a compression member at the end at which   acts, due to loads
that cause sidesway, calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis

 : Larger factored end moment on compression member : Value of   is always positive

  m in : Minimum value of  

  : Factored end moment on compression member at the end at which   acts, due to loads
that cause no sidesway, calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis

  : Factored end moment on compression member at the end at which   acts, due to loads
that cause sidesway, calculated using a first-order elastic frame analysis

 : Nominal axial strength at balanced strain conditions, see 6.2.2(2)

 : Critical or buckling load, see Eq. (6.5.6)

 : Nominal axial strength of cross section under specified eccentricity

 : Nominal axial strength at zero eccentricity

 : Factored axial force under specified eccentricity

 : Stability index for a story, see 6.5.3

 : Radius of gyration of cross section of a compression member, mm

 : Center-to-center spacing of reinforcements, mm

82
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

 : Factored horizontal shear force at a story

 ③
: Factor relating equivalent rectangular stress block, see 6.2.1(7)

  : Ratio maximum sustained axial load to maximum axial load calculated by load combination
in frames braced against sidesway

  : Ratio maximum sustained shear load to maximum factored shear force calculated by load
combination in frames not braced against sidesway

 : Moment magnification factor for frames braced against sidesway, to reflect effect of
curvature between the end of compression member

 : Moment magnification factor for frames not braced against sidesway, to reflect lateral drift
resulting from lateral and gravity loads

 : Relative lateral deflection between the top and bottom of a story due to lateral forces   ,
computed using a first-order elastic frame analysis and stiffness values satisfying 6.5.2(1)

 : Net tensile strain in extreme layer of longitudinal tension steel or prestressing tendon at
nominal strength

 : Factor considering exposure condition of reinforcement for cracking investigation using
reinforcement spacing

 : Ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core confined by the

spiral(measured out-to-out of spirals)

 : Strength reduction factor

6.2 General Design

6.2.1 Design Assumption

(1) Strength design of members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on assumptions specified in
6.2.1(2) through 6.2.1(7), and on satisfaction of force equilibrium and strain compatibility.

(2) Strain in reinforcement and concrete can be assumed proportional to the distance from the neutral
axis. However, nonlinear strain distribution shall be considered for deep beams specified in 6.3.4.
Alternatively, strut-and-tie model shall be permitted to use for the design of deep beams, instead of
considering the nonlinear strain distribution. See 6.3.4, 7.8.1 and Appendix I.

83
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

(3) Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fiber shall be assumed equal to 0.003 for
members under flexure or combined flexure and axial loads.

(4) Stress in reinforcement not exceeding   shall be taken as   times reinforcement strain. For
strains of reinforcement greater than that corresponding to   , stress in reinforcement shall be
considered independent of strain and equal to   .

(5) Tensile strength of concrete can be neglected in axial and flexural strength calculations of
reinforced concrete members, except for the conditions of provision 9.3.1.

(6) Compressive stress distribution and stress-strain relationship of concrete can be assumed to be
rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape that results in prediction of strength in
substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.

(7) Provision of 6.2.1(6) are satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete stress block defined by
following provisions.
① Concrete stress of 0.85   shall be assumed to be distributed uniformly over an equivalent
compression zone bounded by edges of the section and a straight line parallel to the neutral axis
at a distance      from the extreme fiber of maximum compressive strain.
② Distance  from the extreme fiber of maximum compressive strain to the neutral axis shall be
measured in a direction perpendicular to the neutral axis.
③ For compressive strength of concrete not greater than 28 MPa,   shall be taken as 0.85. For
compressive strength of concrete greater than 28 MPa,   shall be reduced linearly at a rate of
0.007 for each 1 MPa of strength in excess of 28 MPa, but   shall not be taken less than 0.65.

6.2.2 General principles

(1) Design of cross sections subject to flexure or axial loads, or to combined flexure and axial loads,
shall be based on force equilibrium and strain compatibility conditions used in assumptions of 6.2.1

(2) Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross section when tension reinforcement reaches the strain
corresponding to   just as concrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.

(3) Sections are compression-controlled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement,   ,
is less than or equal to the compression-controlled strain limit when the extreme fiber of concrete
in compression reaches the assumed ultimate strain, 0.003. The compression-controlled strain limit
shall be defined as the net tensile strain of tension reinforcement in the balanced condition. For
prestressed concrete, the compression-controlled strain limit of tendons shall be set to 0.002.

(4) Sections are tension-controlled if the net tensile strain,   , is greater than or equal to 0.005 when the
concrete in compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003. When yield strength of reinforcement
exceeds 400 MPa, the tension-controlled strain limit shall be taken as 2.5 times the yield strain of

84
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

reinforcements. Sections with   between the compression-controlled strain limit and 0.005 constitute a
transition region between compression-controlled and tension-controlled sections.

(5) Net tensile strain  of nonprestressed flexural members shall be not less than minimum allowable
strain. Minimum allowable strain of flexural members is set to 0.004 for reinforcement with a
specified yield strength of not greater than 400 MPa and two times the yield strain for
reinforcement with a specified yield strength of greater than 400 MPa. For a member with combine
flexure and axial loads with factored axial compressive load less than    , it shall be
permitted to compute its flexural strength neglecting effects of axial load.

(6) Additional tension reinforcements and corresponding compression reinforcements shall be permitted to
increase the flexural strength of members.

(7) Design axial strength   of compression members shall not exceed the value computed by Eq.
(6.2.1) or Eq. (6.2.2)
① For nonprestressed members with spiral reinforcement conforming to 5.5.2(2), design axial strength
shall be computed by :

  m ax  ＝       －   ＋     (6.2.1)

② For nonprestressed members with tie reinforcement conforming to 5.5.2(3), design axial strength
shall be computed by :
  m ax  ＝       －   ＋     (6.2.2)

③ For prestressed members, design axial strength,  , shall not exceed -0.85
  for members with
spiral reinforcement and 0.8  for members with tie reinforcement, where   is the design
axial strength at zero eccentricity.

(8) Members subjected to compressive axial load shall be designed for maximum bending moment that
shall accompany the axial load. The factored axial load,   , at given eccentricity shall not exceed
the value given in 6.2.2(7). The maximum factored bending moments,   , shall be magnified for
slenderness effects in accordance with 6.5.

6.3 Additional Requirements for Design of Flexural Members

6.3.1 Distance between lateral supports of flexural members

(1) Spacing of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the minimum width  of
compression face or flange.

(2) Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be considered to determine spacing of lateral support.

85
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

6.3.2 Minimum reinforcement of flexural members

(1) At every section of a flexural member where tensile reinforcement is required by analysis, except
as provided in 6.3.2(2), 6.3.2(3) and 6.3.2(4),   shall not be less than the greater of the values
computed by

 
 
  m in ＝    (6.3.1)
 


  m in ＝    (6.3.2)


(2) For statically determinate members with a flange in tension,   m in shall not be less than the value
given by Eq. (6.3.1) or (6.3.2), except that  is replaced by either  or  the effective width
of flange, whichever is smaller.

(3) The requirements of 6.3.2(1) and 6.3.2(2) need not apply if, at every section,   provided is not
less than one-third that required by analysis.

(4) For structural slabs and footings of uniform thickness,  m in in the direction of the span shall not
be less than the limit specified in 5.7. Maximum spacing of reinforcement shall not exceed the
smaller of three times the thickness and 450 mm.

6.3.3 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in beams and one-way slabs

(1) Provisions of 6.3.3 shall apply for the distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural
cracking in beams and in one-way slabs (reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction).

(2) Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way slabs shall conform to 10.6.

(3) Flexural tension reinforcement shall be distributed within maximum flexural tension zones of a
member cross section as required by 6.3.3(4).

(4) The spacing s of reinforcement closest to the tension face shall not exceed the least of the values
that given by Eq. (6.3.3) and Eq. (6.3.4), except that cracks are verified in accordance with
Appendix III.

 

      

(6.3.3)

 

   

(6.3.4)

86
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

where  is 280 if member is exposed to dry environment defined by Appendix III. For other
environmental conditions, it shall be permitted to use 210.  is the least distance from surface of
reinforcement or prestressing steel to the tension face. If there is only one bar or wire nearest to
the extreme tension face, s shall be taken as the width of the extreme tension face.   shall be
taken as the stress of reinforcement closest to the tension face at service load. It shall be
permitted to take   as 2/3  , approximately.

(5) When flange of T-beams is in tension, flexural reinforcements in tension shall be distributed over
the effective flange width defined in 3.4.10 or 1/10 of the span, whichever is smaller. If effective
flange width is larger than one-tenth of the span, additional longitudinal reinforcement shall be
arranged in the outer portions of the flange.

(6) Where depth of beam or joist, h, exceeds 900 mm, longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be
distributed uniformly along the both side faces of the member extending from the tension face to a
distance 0.5h. Spacing s of skin reinforcement shall be determined according to 6.3.3(4), where cc
is the least distance from adjacent side face of the member to the surface of the skin reinforcement.
When using a strain-compatibility analysis to determine the stress of each reinforcement or wire , it
shall be permitted to include the skin reinforcement in the strength calculation.

6.3.4 Design of deep beams

(1) Deep beams are structural members loaded in one face and supported on the opposite face so that
a compression strut develops between the load and support, and are defined as members satisfying
① or ②. Deep beams shall be designed considering nonlinear strain distribution or using the
strut-and-tie model specified in Appendix I. In the design of deep beams, lateral buckling shall be
taken into account.(see 7.8.1 and 8.5.1(5))
① Members with a clear span,  , not exceeding four times the member depth


② Region between concentrated load and support, where the concentrated force is applied within two
times the member depth from the face of the support.

(2) Shear strength of deep beams shall be calculated according to 7.8.

(3) Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall be conform to 6.3.2.

(4) Horizontal and vertical reinforcements at both side face of the deep beams shall comply with the
requirements of 7.8.2(1) and 7.8.2(2), or with the requirements of the strut-and-tie model stipulated
in Appendix I.3.3.

87
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

6.4 Limitations on Compression Members

6.4.1 Design dimensions for compression members

(1) Outer limit of effective section for isolated compression members with two or more interlocking
spirals shall be taken at a distance equal to the minimum concrete cover required by 5.4 from
the outermost surface of the spirals.

(2) Outer limits of effective section for compression members with spiral or tie, monolithically
constructed with a concrete wall or pier, shall not be greater than 40 mm from outer surface of
spiral or tie reinforcement.

(3) As an alternative to use the full gross area of compression members with square, octagonal, and
other cross sections, it shall be permitted to use an equivalent circular section with a diameter
equal to the least dimension of the actual shape. Gross area considered, required reinforcement ratio
and design strength shall be based on the equivalent circular section.

(4) For compression members with a cross section larger than required by load, it shall be permitted to
determine minimum reinforcement and design strength using a reduced effective section area, but
not less than half of the gross area.

6.4.2 Limits for reinforcement of compression member

(1) Longitudinal reinforcement area of noncomposite compression members shall be not less than 0.01
times the gross area   , not more than 0.08   . Where longitudinal reinforcement is lap spliced,
the longitudinal reinforcement area shall not be more than 0.04   .

(2) Minimum number of longitudinal reinforcement in compression member shall be 4 for bars enclosed
by rectangular or circular ties, 3 for bars enclosed by triangular ties, and 6 for bars enclosed by
spirals specified in 6.4.2(3).

(3) Volumetric reinforcement ratio of spiral shall be not less than the value of Eq. (6.4.1)


  
 ＝   － 
     (6.4.1)

where, specified yield strength of spiral,   , shall be equal to and less than 700 MPa. Spiral
reinforcement with specified yield strength larger than 400 MPa shall not be lap spliced according
to provision 5.5.2(2).

88
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

6.5 Design for Slender Compression Members

6.5.1 Slenderness effect of compression members

(1) Slenderness effect for compression members shall be permitted to be neglected when the following
is satisfied:
① For compression members not braced against sidesway :

 ≤  (6.5.1)


② For compression members braced against sidesway :


 ≤ －       (6.5.2)


where     is positive(+) for columns in single curvature and negative(-) for columns in
double curvature, and         shall not be larger than 40.

(2) When total stiffness of all structural elements resisting lateral displacement in a structure except for
columns is 12 times larger than total stiffness of all columns, the structure shall be considered as
braced against sidesway.

(3) Unsupported length of compression member can be calculated as follows.

① The unsupported length   shall be taken as the clear length between supporting members such as
slabs, beams and other members that can provide lateral restraint along the direction considered.

② For compression members with capitals or haunches, unsupported length shall be taken as the
distance measured to the lower surface of the capital or haunch in the plane considered.

(4) Radius of gyration, , shall be permitted to take as a value of 0.3 times the section dimension in
the direction considered for rectangular members, and 0.25 times the diameter for circular members.
Radius of gyration for other shapes shall be calculated for the gross section of concrete.

6.5.2 General consideration for moment magnification

(1) When slenderness effect shall not be neglected according to 6.5.1(1), compression members,
restraining beams and other supporting members shall be designed for factored axial load and
bending moment which are obtained from second order analysis according to provisions 6.5.3, 6.5.4
or 6.5.5.

89
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

(2) For compression members, restraining beams and other supporting members, total moment by second
order analysis shall not exceed 1.4 times the moment by elastic first-order analysis.

(3) Moment magnification of compression members due to slenderness effect shall be considered in all
locations between end region of compression members. These effects shall be calculated in
accordance with 6.5.6.

(4) For compression members subjected to bending moments about both principal axes, bending
moments about each axis shall be magnified based on restraint conditions of the axis considered.

6.5.3 Nonlinear second-order analysis

(1) Nonlinear second order analysis shall consider the material nonlinearity, cracking, member curvature,
lateral displacement, duration of load, shrinkage and creep and interaction with supporting
foundation.

(2) The second order analysis for slender columns shall use the analysis method which predicts a good
agreement with strength test results of columns of statically indeterminate concrete structures.

6.5.4 Elastic second order analysis

(1) Elastic second-order analysis shall use sectional properties considering effects of axial loads,
cracking regions along the length of the member, and effects of load duration.

(2) Following section properties of structural members shall be permitted to use for elastic second-order
analysis.
① Modulus of elasticity   (from 3.4.3(1))
② Moments of inertia:
columns 0.70 
uncracked walls 0.70 
cracked walls 0.35 
beams 0.35 
flat plates and flat slabs 0.25 
③ area 1.0  

(3) When sustained loads are applied to members, moment of inertia of compression members
calculated by 6.5.4(2) shall be divided by (1 ＋  ). where,   is ratio of maximum factored
sustained shear within a story to the maximum factored shear in that story associated with the
same load combination, but shall not be taken greater than 1.0.

90
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

6.5.5 General consideration of moment magnification

(1) Columns and stories in structure shall be divided into sway and nonsway according to 6.5.5(2) or
6.5.5(3). Columns in nonsway frames or stories shall be designed according to provision 6.5.6 and
columns in sway frames or stories shall be designed according to 6.5.7.

(2) When the increase of end moment in a column calculated by second-order analysis does not exceed
5 percent of the end moment calculated by first-order analysis, the column of this structure can be
assumed as a nonsway.

(3) It shall be permitted to assume as a nonsway structure If story stability index  calculated by Eq.
(6.5.3) is not greater than 0.05, the story of a structure can be assumed as a nonsway.

 
＝  (6.5.3)
  

where,    and   are the total factored vertical load and the horizontal story shear,
respectively, in the story being evaluated, and   is the first-order relative lateral deflection
between the top and the bottom of that story due to   .

6.5.6 Moment magnification of compression members in a nonsway frame

(1) Compression members in a nonsway frame shall be designed considering factored axial force,   ,
and amplified factored moment  considering the effect of member curvature.

  ＝    (6.5.4)

where,


 ＝  ≥  (6.5.5)

－ 
  

(2)   in Eq. (6.5.5)shall be permitted to calculate in accordance with Eq. (6.5.6).

  
  ＝  (6.5.6)
 

(3)  in Eq. (6.5.6) shall be permitted to calculate in accordance with Eq. (6.5.7) or Eq. (6.5.8).

   ＋    

 ＝  (6.5.7)
＋ 

91
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

    
 ＝  (6.5.8)
＋ 

(4)  considering the effects of sustained load, shall be taken as the ratio of maximum factored axial
sustained load to maximum factored axial load associated with the same load combination, but shall
not be taken greater than 1.0.

(5) The effective length factor, k, shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.

(6) For members without lateral loads between column ends,   in Eq. (6.5.5) shall be calculated as
follows:


 ＝ ＋  (6.5.9)


where,      is positive for columns in single curvature. For members with lateral loads
between column ends,  shall be taken as 1.0.

(7) Factored moment   in Eq. (6.5.4) shall be taken not less than the following values about each
principal axis.
  m in ＝    m in (6.5.10)

 m in ＝  ＋    (6.5.11)

where 15 and  are in millimeters. For members in which min exceeds  , the value of  in
Eq. (6.5.9) shall either be taken equal to 1.0, or shall be based on the ratio of the computed end
moments,   and   .

6.5.7 Moment magnification of compression members in a sway frame

(1) End moments  and  of compression members in a sway frame shall be designed by amplified
moments  calculates as below and factored axial force  .

  ＝   ＋  

  ＝   ＋   (6.5.12)

where, moment magnification factor  for a sway frame shall be calculated according to 6.5.7(2)
or 6.5.7(3).

92
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

(2) Moment magnification factor  for a sway frame shall be calculated by Eq. (6.5.13).


 ＝  ≥  (6.5.13)
－ 

if  calculated by Eq.(6.5.13) exceeds 1.5,  shall be calculated in accordance with elastic

second-order analysis or 6.5.7(3).

(3)  can also be taken as


 ＝  ≥  (6.5.14)
∑
－ 
∑  

where ∑   is the summation for all the factored vertical loads in a story and ∑   is the
summation for all critical axial forces of sway-resisting columns in a story.   is calculated using
Eq. (6.5.6) with  determined from 6.5.7(4) and  from 6.5.6(3), but  due to factored shear
force shall be replaced by  due to factored axial force in the calculation of  from 6.5.6(3).

(4) Effective length factor  for compression members in a sway frame shall be calculated using  
and  specified in 6.5.4. Effective length factor  shall not be less than 1.0.

(5) Flexural member framing into the joint shall be designed for amplified factored end moments of
compression members.

6.6 Compression Member under Biaxial Bending

(1) Compression members subjected to biaxial loading, due to lateral loads about two principal axes
and unbalanced moments of adjacent spans, shall be designed considering interaction of the biaxial
moments and axial force.

(2) Eccentricity at the section of compression members shall be taken as the distance from plastic
center to the point of axial load.

(3) Equilibrium of axial load and moment, and strain compatibility shall be used for the design of
compression members subjected to biaxial bending. However, the compression members can be
designed by approximate methods demonstrated in terms of extensive research and test.

93
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 6 Flexure and Axial Load

6.7 Compression Members Supporting Slab System

6.7.1 Axially loaded members supporting slab system

(1) Axially loaded members supporting a slab system conforming to the provisions of 10.1.1 shall be
designed in accordance with the requirements of this chapter and chapter 10.

6.7.2 Transmission of column loads through floor system

(1) If specified concrete compressive strength of column is greater than 1.4 times that of floor system,
transmission of column load through the floor system shall be provided by 6.7.2(2), 6.7.2(3) or
6.7.2(4). If specified concrete compressive strength of column is not greater than 1.4 times that of
floor system, additional consideration need not be applied.

(2) Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at the column location.
Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 600 mm into the slab from face of column. Floor
concrete shall be placed before hardening of column concrete for integration of each other.

(3) Column strength through floor system shall be based on the lower value of concrete strength with
vertical dowels and spiral reinforcement.

(4) For columns laterally restrained on four sides by beams approximately equal depth or by slabs,
joint strength of the columns can be calculated assuming by adding 75 percent of column concrete
strength and 35 percent of slab concrete strength. In this calculation, column concrete strength shall
not be larger than 2.5 times the slab concrete strength.

6.8 Bearing Strength

(1) Design bearing strength of concrete shall not exceed        . However, where the supporting
surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, the design bearing strength of the loaded area
shall be permitted to increase up to          , in which the value of   
shall not be greater than 2.

(2) Provision of 6.8(1) shall not be applied to post-tensioning anchorages.

94
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.1 General

7.1.1 Scope

(1) This chapter shall be applied to shear or torsion design of reinforced or prestressed concrete
members.

(2) Members shall be designed to resist torsional moment, if torsional equilibrium is required and
factored torsional moment is greater than minimum torsional moment specified in the provisions.

(3) The provisions of 7.7 for shear friction shall be applied to sections required to be considered for
shear friction. These sections include sections with existing cracks or possibility of cracking,
interfaces between different materials, interfaces of concretes with different ages, and so on.

7.1.2 Notations

 : Shear span which is distance from center of concentrated load to face of support

 : Area of concrete section contributing to shear transfer, mm2

  : Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section, mm2

 : Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting factored moment           ,

mm2

 : Gross area of concrete section, mm2

 : Total area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement, mm2

 : Total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2

 : Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting tensile force   , mm2

 : Gross area enclosed by shear flow path, mm2

  : Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional reinforcement, mm2

  : Area of prestressing steel in flexural tension zone, mm2

95
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 : Area of nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement, mm2

 : Area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within spacing  , mm2

 : Area of shear reinforcement within spacing  or total area of shear reinforcement

perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement within spacing  in deep beam, mm2

  : Area of shear-friction reinforcement, mm2

  : Area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement within spacing   ,

mm2

 : Width of compression face of member, mm

 : Perimeter of critical section for punching shear in slabs and footings, mm

 : Width of cross section containing the closed stirrups to resist torsion, mm

 : Web width, mm

 : Width of the critical section defined in 7.12.1, which is measured in the direction of the
span for which moments are determined, mm

 : Width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to  , mm

 : Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured in

the direction of the span for which moments are determined, mm

 : Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured in

the direction perpendicular to  , mm

  ,   : Distances from neural axis for eccentric shear to front and back faces, respectively, at
critical section in a slab-column connection

 : Average depth of compression zone calculated neglecting effect of compression reinforcement

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement in

reinforced concrete member, or distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
longitudinal tension reinforcement and prestressing steel, but not less than   (for circular
section, not less than the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension
reinforcement in the other half of the section) in prestressed concrete member, mm

96
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressing steel

 : Distance from slab-joint column face to slab end

  : Average compressive stress in compression zone at critical section of slab-column connections, MPa

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber of section where tensile stress is caused
by externally applied loads, MPa

  : Compressive stress in concrete (after all prestress losses) at centroid of cross section resisting
externally applied loads or at junction of web and flange when the centroid lies within the
flange, MPa

  : Effective prestress of prestressing steel, MPa

  : Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, MPa

  : Compressive stress in concrete (after all prestress losses) at extreme fiber where tensile stress
is caused by externally applied load, MPa

  : Split tensile strength of concrete, MPa

  : Tensile strength of concrete at compression zone in slab-column connections, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

  : Specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement, MPa

 : Overall thickness or height of member, mm

 : Depth of shearhead cross section, mm

 : Height of entire wall from base to top, mm

 : Moment of inertia of section about centroidal axis, mm4

 : Thickness factor for slab-column connections

 : Influence factor for perimeter of critical section in slab-column connections

97
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 : Length of clear span measured as face-to-face distance between supports, mm

 : Length of shearhead arm from centroid of concentrated load or reaction, mm

 : Horizontal length of wall, mm

   : Moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied loads, refer to Eq.
(7.3.9)

 : Sum of flexural strengths at front and back faces in slab-column connections

  : Flexural strength of slab where bottom main reinforcement at back face is tension
reinforcement, within critical section in slab-column connections

  : Flexural strength of slab where top main reinforcement at front face is tension reinforcement,
within critical section in slab-column connections

 : Modified flexural moment

 m ax : Maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads

 : Required plastic flexural strength of shearhead cross section

 : Moment strength due to eccentricity of shear and back faces in slab-column connections

 : Torsional strength due to eccentricity of shear at sides faces in slab-column connections

 : Factored moment

 : Moment resistance contributed by shearhead reinforcement

 : Factored axial force normal to cross section (considering effect of creep and shrinkage on tension)
＋ －
occurring simultaneously with   ; to be taken as positive ( ) for compression and negative ( ) for
tension

 : Factored tensile force applied at top of bracket or corbel acting simultaneously with   , to
be taken as positive ( ＋) for tension
 : Outside perimeter of concrete cross section, mm

 : Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional reinforcement, mm

98
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 : Spacing of shear or torsion reinforcements in direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, mm

 : Spacing of shear or torsion reinforcements in direction perpendicular to longitudinal reinforcement,

or spacing of horizontal reinforcements in wall, mm

 : Spacing of vertical reinforcements in wall, mm

 : Wall thickness of hollow section, mm

 : Nominal torsional moment strength

 : Factored torsional moment

 : Nominal shear strength of concrete for two-way action, MPa

 : Average direct shear stress acting on critical section in slab-column connections, MPa

 : Nominal shear strength, MPa

  : Strength for eccentric shear at sides of slab-column connections, MPa

   : Strength for eccentric shear at side at the intersection point between the side and with back
face of slab-column connections, MPa

   : Strength for eccentric shear at side at the intersection point between the side and back face
of slab-column connections, MPa

 : Nominal shear strength provided by concrete, refer to 7.10.2(2)

  : Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking is caused by combined
shear and moment

  : Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking is caused by high
principal tensile stress in web

 : Shear force at section due to unfactored dead load

 : Factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads, occurring simultaneously with
 m ax

 : Nominal shear strength at section

99
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 : Vertical component of effective prestress force at section

 : Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement

 : Factored shear force at section

 : Distance from centroidal axis to extreme tension side, for gross section neglecting
reinforcement mm

 : Angle between inclined stirrup and longitudinal axis of member

 : Angle between shear friction reinforcement and shear plane

 : Constant used to compute   in slabs and footings

 : Ratio of flexural stiffness of shearhead to that of the surrounding composite slab section

 : Ratio of long to short dimensions in a plane where concentrated load or reaction is acting

 : Factor used to compute   in prestressed slab

 : Factor used to determine the unbalanced moment transferred by eccentric shear at slab-column
connections

 : Number of shearhead elements

 : Angle between inclined compression strut and longitudinal axis, when truss model is
employed for torsional analysis

 : Factor for lightweight concrete (refer to 3.4.4)

 : Friction coefficient

 : Ratio of area of horizontal shear reinforcements to area of concrete gross section at vertical
section

 : Ratio of area of vertical shear reinforcements to area of concrete gross section at horizontal
section

 :     

 : Strength reduction factor

100
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

  : Design unbalanced flexural strength at critical section of slab-column connections, considering

strength reduction factor

 : Crack angle of flexural compression strut in slab

7.2 Shear Design Principles

7.2.1 Shear strength

(1) Except for members which are designed in accordance with Appendix I, cross sections subjected to
shear shall be designed by Eq. (7.2.1).

  ≤   (7.2.1)

where   is the factored shear force at the considered cross section, and   is the nominal shear
strength calculated by Eq. (7.2.2).

  ＝  ＋   (7.2.2)

where   is the nominal shear strength provided by concrete calculated in accordance with 7.3 or
7.12, and   is the nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in accordance with
7.4, 7.10.2(5), or 7.12.

(2) When   is calculated, the effect of opening in the member shall be considered.

(3) When   is calculated, effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in restrained member
shall be considered, and effects of inclined flexural-compression in members with variable depth
shall be considered.

(4) 
  in this chapter shall not exceed 8.4 MPa. However, 
  is permitted to exceed 8.4 MPa
in the calculation of   ,   , and   for reinforced or prestressed concrete beams and concrete
joist construction with the minimum shear reinforcement according to 7.4.3(3) and (4).

(5) When the following condition ① is satisfied, the maximum factored shear force   at supports is
permitted to be calculated in accordance with the following conditions ② or ③.
① Support reaction in direction of applied shear force introduces compression at the end of a
member, loads are applied at or near the top of a member, and no concentrated load is applied
between the support face and the critical section defined by the following ② and ③.
② In reinforced concrete member, the factored shear force for sections located within the distance of
 from the support face is permitted to be taken as   at the distance of  from the edge of
support.
③ In prestressed concrete member, the factored shear force for sections located within the distance

101
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

of   from the support face is permitted to be taken as   at the distance of   from the
edge of support.

(6) Deep beams, brackets and corbels, walls, slabs and footings shall be designed in accordance with
the special provisions provided in 7.8 through 7.12.

7.3 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete

7.3.1 Shear strength provided by concrete in reinforced concrete members

(1) Unless detailed method in accordance with 7.3.1(2) is applied, shear strength   shall be calculated
according to Eqs. (7.3.1) and (7.3.2).
① Shear strength in a member subjected to shear force and flexural moment only shall be calculated
by Eq. (7.3.1).


    
    (7.3.1)


② Shear strength in a member subjected to axial force shall be permitted to be calculated by Eq.
(7.3.2).


 
       
   
   


(7.3.2)

where      is in N  mm  .

③ In a member subjected to significant axial tension, the factored shear force shall be resisted by
shear reinforcement only unless a detailed method using Eq. (7.3.6) in 7.3.1(2) is used.

(2) Shear strength   shall be permitted to be calculated with more detailed methods provided in Eqs.
(7.3.3) through (7.3.6).
① Shear strength in a member subjected to shear force and flexural moment shall be permitted to be
calculated by Eq. (7.3.3).


   

       
  (7.3.3)

However,   shall not exceed  

   , and      in Eq. (7.3.3) shall not exceed 1.0,
where   is the factored flexural moment simultaneously occurring with   at the considered
section.

102
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

② For a member subjected to axial compression,   in Eq. (7.3.3) is permitted to be replaced with
  in order to calculate   , where     is not limited to 1.0.

－
 ＝ －   (7.3.4)


However,   shall not exceed the following.


   
      


  
(7.3.5)

where,      is in N/mm2. When   by Eq. (7.3.4) is negative (-),   shall be calculated by

Eq. (7.3.5).
③ For a member subjected to significant axial tension, the shear strength is permitted to be
calculated by Eq. (7.3.6).


  
       
 
   

(7.3.6)

where,   is negative (-) for tension, and      is in N/mm2.

(3) In a member with circular cross section, the area to calculate   shall be calculated as a product
of effective depth and diameter of the concrete section. The effective depth is permitted to be
taken as 0.8 times the diameter.

7.3.2 Shear strength provided by concrete in prestressed concrete members

(1) Shear strength provided by concrete shall be calculated in accordance with 7.3.2(2) or 7.3.2(3).
However, 7.3.2(3) shall be applied for a pretension member when the distance from the section at
 from the edge of support to the member end is shorter than the transfer length of the
prestressing steel, or when bonding of some tendons is not extended to the member end.

(2) For a member where effective prestress force is not less than 40 % of tensile strength of flexural
reinforcement,   shall be calculated by Eq. (7.3.7) unless 7.3.2(3) is applied.


   
  
       
  (7.3.7)

where,   shall not be less than 

     , but not greater than 
    , and
shall not exceed the value given by 7.3.2(4) or 7.3.5(5). In Eq. (7.3.7),      shall not exceed
1.0, and   is the factored flexural moment simultaneously occurring with   at the considered
section.  shall not be less than 0.8.

103
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

(3) Shear strength   shall be permitted to be calculated in accordance with Eq. (7.3.8) and (7.3.10),
where   shall be the lesser of   and   .
① Shear strength   shall be calculated by the following equation.

   
   
         (7.3.8)
 m ax

where  shall not be less than  , and    shall be calculated by Eq. (7.3.9).

 

     
 
         (7.3.9)

In Eq. (7.3.8),  m ax and   shall be calculated with the load combination causing the maximum
flexural moment at the considered section, and   shall not be less than 
   .
② Shear strength   shall be calculated by the following equation.

   
           (7.3.10)

where  need not be taken smaller than  . Alternatively,   shall be permitted to be
determined as the shear force corresponding to dead load plus live load causing the principal
tensile stress of     at the centroidal axis of cross section, or at the interface between
flange and web when the centroidal axis is in the flange. In a composite member, the principal
tensile stress shall be calculated using cross section resisting live load.

(4) In a pretensioned member, when the distance from the section at  from the edge of support
to the member end is shorter than the transfer length of the prestressing steel, the reduced prestress
shall be considered when   is calculated. In addition the maximum value calculated from Eq.
(7.3.7) shall be limited by the value of   . It shall be assumed that the prestress force varies
linearly from zero at the end of the prestressing steel, to the maximum at the distance of the
transfer length from the end of the prestressing steel. The transfer length shall be permitted to be
assumed 50 times the diameter of strand or 100 times the diameter of single wire.

(5) For a pretensioned member where bonding of some tendons does not extend to the member end,
the reduced prestressing force shall be used when   is calculated in accordance with 7.3.2(2) or
(3). The value of   calculated with the reduced prestressing force shall be taken as the
maximum limit of Eq. (7.3.7). When bonding of prestressing steel does not extend to the member
end, it shall be assumed that the prestress force varies linearly from zero at the end of the bond ,
to the maximum at the distance of the transfer length. The transfer length shall be permitted to
be assumed 50 times the diameter of strand or 100 times the diameter of single wire.

104
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.4 Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement

7.4.1 Shear reinforcement type

(1) The following types of shear reinforcement shall be used.

① Stirrup perpendicular to member axis
② Welded wire reinforcement perpendicular to member axis
③ Spirals, circular ties, or hoops
(2) The following types of shear reinforcement shall be permitted to be used in reinforced concrete
members.
① Stirrups with an angle not less than 45 ° to longitudinal tension reinforcement
② Reinforcement bent with an angle not less than 30 ° to main longitudinal tension reinforcement
③ Combination of stirrups and bent reinforcement
(3) Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 500 MPa. However, when welded
deformed wire reinforcement is used, specified yield strength of shear reinforcement shall not
exceed 600 MPa.

(4) When 7.4 is applied for prestressed concrete members, effective depth shall be taken as the distance
from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressing steel and nonprestressed reinforcement,
but shall not be less than  .

(5) Stirrups and other reinforcement or wires used for shear reinforcement shall be extended to the
distance of  from extreme compression fiber, and they shall be anchored in accordance with 8.5.4.

7.4.2 Spacing limit for shear reinforcement

(1) Spacing of shear reinforcement perpendicular to the member axis shall not exceed   in reinforced
concrete members, or   in prestressed concrete members, nor 600 mm.
(2) Inclined stirrups and bent reinforcement shall be crossed with at least one intersection by the 45 °
line extending along the reaction force direction from mid-depth of member () to the
longitudinal tension reinforcement.

(3) When   is greater than 

    , the maximum spacings given in the above (1) and (2)
shall be reduced to one-half.

7.4.3 Minimum shear reinforcement

(1) In all reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete flexural members where the factored shear force
  exceeds half the design shear strength   , minimum shear reinforcement shall be provided
except for the followings:
① Slabs and footings

105
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

② Concrete joist structures defined in 3.4.11

③ Beams where overall depth does not exceed 250 mm, or I-type or T-type beams where the depth
does not exceed the greater of 2.5 times thickness of flange and 1/2 times width of web
④ Plate member where the main behavior is flexural, such as wall and wing wall in abutment,
retaining wall, culverts, and so on.
⑤ Members with hollow section where the depth of net cross section does not exceed 315 mm, and
the factored shear force does not exceed  
⑥ Fiber reinforced concrete beams in which the depth does not exceed 600 mm, and specified
concrete compressive strength does not exceed 40 MPa, and the factored shear force does not
exceed     
 

(2) Minimum shear reinforcement requirements in 7.4.3(1) shall be permitted to be waived when it is
verified through test that the factored shear force and flexural moment can be resisted without
shear reinforcement.

(3) Where shear reinforcement is required by 7.4.3(1) or strength requirements and where the torsional
requirements in 7.5.1 is permitted to be neglected, minimum shear reinforcement for and prestressed
concrete members except for members corresponding to the following (4) and reinforced concrete
members shall be calculated by Eq. (7.4.1).

 
  m in  
   (7.4.1)
 

However, minimum shear reinforcement shall not be less than      , where  and  shall
be in mm.

(4) In prestressed concrete members where effective prestress force is not less than 40 % of the tensile
strength of flexural reinforcement, minimum shear reinforcement shall not be less than the smaller
of the values calculated from Eq. (7.4.1) and Eq. (7.4.2).

     
  m in    
    




(7.4.2)

7.4.4 Shear reinforcement design

(1) Where factored shear force   exceeds   , shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Eqs.
(7.2.1) and (7.2.2). Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement   shall be calculated in
accordance with the following requirements (2) through (9).

(2) For shear reinforcement perpendicular to member axis,   shall be calculated by Eq. (7.4.3).

106
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

    
   (7.4.3)


where   is area of shear reinforcement within a spacing  , and   is specified yield strength
of shear reinforcement.

(3) For circular ties, hoops, or spirals used as shear reinforcement,   shall be calculated by Eq.
(7.4.3), where  for circular cross section shall be calculated in accordance with 7.3.1(3), and  
shall correspond to the area of two legs in spirals, hoops, or circular ties within a spacing 
measured in the direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement.

(4) For inclined stirrups used as shear reinforcement,   shall be calculated by Eq. (7.4.4).

    sin  cos 
   (7.4.4)


where  is angle between inclined stirrups and member axis, and  is spacing of inclined stirrup
in the direction parallel to longitudinal direction.

(5) Where a single bent reinforcement or a single group of parallel reinforcements bent at the same
distance from support is used as shear reinforcement,   shall be calculated by Eq. (7.4.5).

       sin (7.4.5)

where,   shall not exceed   

   , and  is angle between bent reinforcement and
member axis.

(6) Where a series of parallel reinforcement bent at different distances from support or multiple groups
of parallel reinforcement is used as shear reinforcement,   shall be calculated by Eq. (7.4.4).

(7) When longitudinal bent reinforcement is used for shear reinforcement, only the middle 3/4 of the
inclined length shall be considered effective for shear reinforcement.

(8) When more than one type of shear reinforcement is used for shear reinforcement at a section,  
shall be calculated as the sum of the shear strengths of each type of shear reinforcement.

(9)   shall not exceed  

     .

7.5 Design for Torsion

Design for torsion shall comply with the provisions from 7.5.1 to 7.5.2 and from 7.6.1 to 7.6.4 or
7.6.5.

107
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.5.1 Exemptions from requirement of torsion design

(1) In the following cases, the influence of torsion shall be permitted to be ignored.
① For reinforced concrete members :
 
   
     (7.5.1)


② For prestressed concrete members :

 
   
    

   
 

   
(7.5.2)

③ For reinforced concrete members subjected to axial tension or compression :

 
   
    

   

  
   
(7.5.3)

  shall be replaced by   in hollow sections. The definition of the outer boundary of the
cross section shall conform to the provisions.

(2) For isolated members having a flange and for members cast integrally with a slab, the protruding
flange width used to compute   and  shall comply with 10.3.1(4), except that the width of
protruding flanges shall be permitted not to follow 10.3.1(4) when the parameter    calculated
including the flange is less than that calculated not including the flange.

7.5.2 Calculation of factored torsional moment

(1) If factored torsional moment,   , in a member exceeds the minimum value given in 7.5.1 and is
required to maintain the equilibrium conditions, the member shall be designed in accordance with
7.6.

(2) In a statically indeterminate structure where the torsional moment can be decreased due to
redistribution of internal forces caused by cracking, the maximum factored torsional moment  
shall be permitted to be reduced to the following values.
① For reinforced concrete members, at the sections described in 7.5.2(4)
 
 
     


② For prestressed concrete members, at the sections described in 7.5.2(5)

108
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 
 
     

 
 
 

  

③ For reinforced concrete members subjected to axial tension or compression

 
 
     

 
 

  
  

The bending moments and shear forces redistributed equally according to ①, ②, or ③, shall be
considered for the design of the adjacent members. For hollow sections,   shall not replace  
in 7.5.2(2).

(3) If detailed analysis is not performed, the torsional load transferred by slab can be assumed to be
uniformly distributed throughout the member.

(4) In reinforced concrete members, sections located within a distance  from the face of a support
shall be designed for the torsional moment not less than  computed at the distance . If a
concentrated torsional moment acts within the distance d, the critical section for design shall be the
face of the support.

(5) In prestressed concrete members, sections located within a distance   from the face of a support
shall be designed for the torsional moment not less than   computed at a distance  . If a
concentrated torsional moment acts within a distance , the critical section for design shall be
the face of the support.

7.6 Calculation of Torsional Moment Strength and Details of Reinforcement

7.6.1 Torsional Moment Strength

(1) Dimensions of the cross section in a member subjected to torsional moment shall satisfy Eqs.
(7.6.1) and (7.6.2).
① For solid sections: Eq. (7.6.1) based on the assumption that stress by shear is distributed over
the entire width of the section while stress by torsion is resisted by a thin walled tube section,
shall be satisfied.


  
 

 
 
   

  
≤ 

  
 

 
 
 
 (7.6.1)

② For hollow sections: Shear stresses caused by shearing force and torsional moment shall satisfy
the following relationship.

109
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

 
    
      
   
≤     (7.6.2)
       

(2) If the wall thickness varies around the perimeter of a hollow section, Eq. (7.6.2) shall be satisfied
at the location where the left side of Eq. (7.6.2) reaches the maximum.

(3) If the thickness of the wall is less than    , the second term on the left side of Eq. (7.6.2)

shall be replaced by  

      where  is the wall thickness of the hollow section at the location

where the stress is calculated.

(4) The specified yield strength of reinforcement for torsional design shall not exceed 500 MPa.

7.6.2 Calculation of area of reinforcement for torsional design

(1) Design of a member subjected to factored torsional moment exceeding the value specified in 7.5.1
shall satisfy Eq. (7.6.3).

  ≤   (7.6.3)

where,  is calculated by assuming that torsional moment is resisted by the stirrups and
longitudinal reinforcements and   . At the same time, it is assumed that the concrete shear
strength   is not reduced by torsion.

(2) Transverse reinforcement to resist torsional moment shall be calculated as follows.

      
   cot (7.6.4)


where,   shall be taken equal to 0.85   and the strut angle shall be 30°≤  ≤ 60°.It shall be
permitted to take as 45°for nonprestressed members or members with prestressing force less than
40% of the tensile strength of the longitudinal reinforcement, or 37.5°for members with
prestressing force greater than 40% of the tensile strength of the longitudinal reinforcement.

(3) The area of the additional longitudinal reinforcement to resist the torsional moment shall not be less
than the value of Eq. (7.6.5)


   
 
      cot 

(7.6.5)

where,  is the value used in Eq. (7.6.4), and    is calculated by Eq. (7.6.4), without applying
the requirement of minimum reinforcement area in 7.6.4 (2) or (3).

110
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

(4) The reinforcement required by torsional moment shall be added to those required by shear, flexural
moment, and axial force that act in combination with the torsional moment. The spacing and
arrangement of the reinforcement shall satisfy the most strict requirements.

(5) In flexural members, the required area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the flexural
compression zone can be reduced by      , where,   is the factored flexural moment
acting with  at the section. However, the area of the reinforcement shall satisfy the
requirements of 7.6.4 (3) or 7.6.4 (5).

(6) Prestressed concrete beams shall satisfy the following requirements.

① At each cross-section, the total longitudinal reinforcement including tendons shall be able to resist
the factored flexural moment   plus an additional concentric longitudinal tensile force equal to
    , due to the factored torsional moment   .
② Spacing of the longitudinal reinforcement including tendons shall satisfy the requirement of
reinforcement spacing in 7.6.4(5).

(7) In prestressed concrete members, the area of longitudinal torsional reinforcement placed in flexural
compression zone shall be permitted to be reduced below the value required by (6) according to
(5).

7.6.3 Details of Torsional reinforcement

(1) Torsional reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal reinforcement or longitudinal tendon and the
following transverse reinforcement.
① Closed stirrups or closed ties, perpendicular to the member axis.
② Closed welded wire reinforcement composed of transverse wires perpendicular to the member axis
③ Spiral reinforcement in reinforced concrete beam
(2) Transverse torsional reinforcement shall be anchored by one of the following:
① Anchored by 135°standard hook around the longitudinal reinforcement
② Anchored according to the provisions of 8.5.4(2) ①, ②, and ③ in the regions where spalling of
the concrete surrounding the anchorage is restrained by flange, slab or similar members.

(3) Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be anchored at the both ends.

(4) In a hollow section subjected to torsional moment, the distance from the center line of the
transverse torsional reinforcement to the interior surface of the wall shall not be less than
    .

111
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.6.4 Minimum torsion reinforcement and spacing

(1) Minimum torsional reinforcement shall be provided in all sections where the factored torsional
moment   exceeds the value specified in 7.5.1.

(2) When torsional reinforcement is required according to 7.6.4(1), the minimum area of the transverse
closed stirrup shall be calculated as follows.

 
          
   (7.6.6)
 

The value in Eq. (7.6.6) shall not be less than      .

(3) When torsional reinforcement is required according to 7.6.4 (1), the minimum area of the
longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be calculated as follows.

 

   
  m in      

 


 
 
(7.6.7)

where,    shall not be less than 0.175   

(4) Spacing of the transverse torsional reinforcement shall be less than the smaller of    or 300 mm.

(5) Longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be distributed at a spacing of 300 mm or less
along the perimeter of the closed stirrup. The longitudinal reinforcement or tendons shall be placed
inside the stirrup, and at each corner of the stirrup, at least one longitudinal reinforcement or
tendon shall be located. The diameter of the longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 1/24
stirrup spacing, and not less than D10.

(6) Torsional reinforcement shall be extended at least the distance     from the location required
by calculations.

7.6.5 Alternative torsion design method

For solid sections within the scope of this Code and with the cross-sectional aspect ratio of   ≥ ,
it shall be permitted to perform the torsional design using other methods verified by appropriate
analysis and tests. However, the requirements of 7.6.3 and 7.6.4 (4), (5) and (6) shall be satisfied.

112
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.7 Shear Friction

7.7.1 General Design

(1) Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer shall be based on Eq. (7.2.1), where   shall be
calculated in accordance with 7.7.1(2) and (3) or 7.7.2.

(2) A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered. The required area of shear
friction reinforcement   across the shear plane shall be calculated according to 7.7.2. If any
other shear transfer design methods result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with
results of comprehensive tests, the design methods shall be permitted to be used.

(3) For calculations of shear transfer strength, sections of 7.7.2 through 7.7.3 shall be applied.

7.7.2 Shear friction design method

(1) Where shear friction reinforcement is perpendicular to the shear plane, nominal shear strength  
shall be computed by Eq. (7.7.1)

       (7.7.1)

where  is coefficient of friction in accordance with 7.7.2(3).

(2) Where shear friction reinforcement is inclined to the shear plane, such that shear force produces
tension in the shear-friction reinforcement,   shall be computed by Eq. (7.7.2).

      sin   cos   (7.7.2)

where   is angle between shear friction reinforcement and shear plane.

(3) The coefficient of friction  in Eq. (7.7.1) and (7.7.2) shall be taken as:
Concrete placed monolithically 
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface intentionally roughened as specified in
7.7.3(1) 
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally roughened 
Concrete anchored to structural steel by shear connectors or by reinforcing bars (see 7.7.3(2))


Here,  is determined based on 3.4.4.

(4) For normal weight concrete either placed monolithically or placed against hardened concrete with
surface intentionally roughened as specified in 7.7.3(1),   shall not exceed the smallest of
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

   or        (Unit is N). For all other cases,   shall not exceed the smaller
of     or     . Here,   is area of concrete section resisting shear transfer. Where
different concrete strengths are cast, the value of   used to evaluate   shall be based on the
lower strength concrete.

(5) The specified design yield strength for shear friction reinforcement shall not exceed 500 MPa.

(6) When net tension across shear plane is applied, the additional reinforcement shall be provided to
resist the tension. When calculating required   , permanent net compression across shear plane
shall be permitted to be taken as additive to    , the force in the shear friction reinforcement.

(7) Shear friction reinforcement shall be appropriately placed along the shear plane and shall be
anchored to develop the specified design yield strength on both sides by embedment lengths, hooks,
or welding to special devices.

7.7.3 Treatment of interface

(1) For an effective use of 7.7, when concrete is placed against previously hardened concrete, the
interface for shear transfer shall be clean and free of laitance. If  is assumed equal to ,
interface shall be roughened to a full amplitude of approximately 6 mm.

(2) When shear is transferred between structural steel and concrete using headed studs or welded
reinforcing bars, steel shall be clean and free of paint.

7.8 Deep Beams

7.8.1 General design

(1) Provisions in 7.8 shall be applied to members with  not greater than  or members where
concentrated load is located at the opposite face to the support and within a distance  from the
support so that compression struts can develop between the load and support. Provisions of 8.5.1(5)
shall also be satisfied.

(2) Deep beams shall be designed in accordance with nonlinear analysis permitted in 6.3.4, or
Appendix I.

(3)   of deep beams shall not be greater than 

      .

7.8.2 Minimum shear reinforcement and its placement

(1) Area of vertical shear reinforcement perpendicular to flexural tension reinforcement,   , shall not be
less than    , where  shall not exceed the smaller of   and 300 mm.

114
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

(2) Area of horizontal shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement,   , shall not be
less than     , where   shall not exceed the smaller of   and 300 mm.

(3) Shear reinforcement shall be permitted to be placed in accordance with Appendix I, instead of
minimum shear reinforcement specified in 7.8.2(1) and (2).

7.9 Shear Design of Brackets and Corbels

7.9.1 General design

(1) Provisions in 7.9 shall be used for brackets and corbels where    does not exceed 1.0, and
factored horizontal tensile force,    , is not greater than   . Effective depth  shall be
determined at the face of the column.

(2) When shear span-to-depth ratio    does not exceed 2, shear design shall be permitted to be
performed according to Appendix I.

(3) Depth at the outside edge of bearing area in brackets and corbels shall not be less than  

7.9.2 Calculation of shear force and strength for design

(1) Section at the face of support shall be designed to resist factored shear force,   , factored
moment           , and factored horizontal tensile force,   , simultaneously.

(2) In all design calculations in accordance with 7.9, strength reduction factor for all member forces, ,
shall be taken as 0.75 that is the value for shear.

(3) Area of shear-friction reinforcement,   , to resist shear force,   , shall be determined in

accordance with 7.7.
①   of normal weight concrete shall not exceed the smallest of    ,      , and
 .
②   of all-lightweight or sand-lightweight concrete shall not exceed the smaller of     
and         .

(4) Area of reinforcement   to resist factored moment           shall be determined in

accordance with 6.2 and 6.3
(5) Area of reinforcement   to resist factored tensile force   shall be determined from
    ≥   . Factored tensile force,    , shall not be taken less than    unless special
apparatuses are made for brackets or corbels to avoid tensile forces.   shall be regarded as a
live load even when the tensile force results from creep, shrinkage, or temperature change.

115
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

(6) Area of primary tension reinforcement   shall not be less than the greater of       and
        .

7.9.3 Details of reinforcement

(1) Total area,   , of closed stirrups or ties parallel to tension reinforcement   shall not be less than
      , and shall be distributed uniformly within     adjacent to tension reinforcement
 .

(2) Primary tension reinforcement ratio     shall not be less than 0.04      .

(3) At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension reinforcement   shall be anchored by one of
the following methods:
① By structural welding to a transverse bar with at least equal size; welding shall be designed to
develop the specified yield strength   of primary tension reinforcement  
② By bending primary tension reinforcement in parallel to form a horizontal loop at the free end;
the tension reinforcement shall be anchored to the support member.
③ Besides, other reliable anchorage method shall be used.
(4) Bearing area on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight portion of primary tension
reinforcement, nor project beyond interior face of transverse anchor bar if transverse anchor bar is
provided.

7.10 Shear Design of Walls

7.10.1 General design

(1) Design for horizontal shear force parallel to plane of wall shall be in accordance with provisions in
7.10. Design for shear force perpendicular to plane of wall shall be in accordance with 7.12.
Alternatively, walls with height not exceeding two times the length shall be permitted to be
designed in accordance with Appendix I and 7.10.3(2) through 7.10.3(5).

(2) Design of horizontal section for shear force in plane of wall shall be based on Eqs. (7.2.1) and
(7.2.2), where   shall be in accordance with 7.10.2(1) and 7.10.2(2) and   shall be in
accordance with 7.10.2(5).

(3) In design for horizontal shear force in plane of wall,  can be taken as   . When determined
by a strain compatibility analysis,  shall be permitted to be determined as the distance from
extreme compression fiber to the center of forces of all reinforcements in tension.

116
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

7.10.2 Shear strength

(1) Unless calculated in accordance with 7.10.2(2),   for walls subjected to axial compression  
shall not be greater than 
     . For walls subject to axial tension   ,   shall not be
greater than the value given by Eq. (7.3.6).

(2) Shear strength   shall be permitted to be determined as the lesser of the values computed from
Eqs. (7.10.1) and (7.10.2)


   
     (7.10.1)

or
  
 


   
  
    
     

  

 


 


 (7.10.2)

where   is negative for tension. When           is negative, Eq. (7.10.2) shall not be
used.

(3) Shear strength   of horizontal section in plane of wall shall not be greater than 
    .

(4) When distance from a section to wall base is less than the smaller of    and one half the wall
height, the section shall be permitted to be designed for the same   as that evaluated at a
distance    or one half the wall height.

(5) Where factored shear force   exceeds   , horizontal shear reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Eqs. (7.2.1) and (7.2.2), where   shall be evaluated by Eq. (7.10.3).

    
   (7.10.3)
 

where   is area of horizontal shear reinforcement within spacing   , and  shall be in

accordance with 7.10.1(3). Vertical shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with
7.10.3(4).

7.10.3 Minimum shear reinforcement and its placement

(1) When   is less than   , reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with 7.10.3(2) through
7.10.3(5) or Chapter 11. When   exceeds  , reinforcement to resist shear shall be
provided in accordance with 7.10.3(2) through 7.10.3(5).

117
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

(2) Ratio of area of horizontal shear reinforcement to total vertical area of concrete  , shall not be
less than 0.0025.

(3) Spacing of horizontal shear reinforcement,   , shall not exceed the smallest of   , , and 450
mm.

(4) Ratio of area of vertical shear reinforcement to area of horizontal section,  , shall not be less
than the greater of the value from Eq. (7.10.4) and 0.0025.

 

               

(7.10.4)

The value of  need not be greater than the required area of horizontal shear reinforcement.

(5) Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement,   , shall not exceed the smallest of   ,  and 450 mm.

7.11 Shear Caused by Transfer of Moment to Column

(1) When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment at
connections of framing elements to columns, the shear caused by moment transfer shall be
considered in the design of transverse reinforcement of columns.

(2) Connections shall have transverse reinforcement not less than that required by Eq. (7.4.1). For
connections not part of a primary seismic load-resisting system that are restrained on four sides by
beams or slabs of approximately equal depth, transverse reinforcement need not be provided. The
connection depth is defined as the value of the greatest depth of the elements framing to column.

7.12 Shear Design of Slabs and Footings

7.12.1 Section for shear design

(1) Shear design of slabs and footings in the vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions shall be
performed considering the following conditions (2) and (3), whichever is more severe.

(2) For beam flexural action, the critical section of the slab or footing shall be defined as cross
section across the entire width, and the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with 7.2
through 7.4.

(3) For two-way flexural action, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with 7.12.2
through 7.12.7. The perimeter length of the critical section  shall be minimum. However, the
location of the critical section need not be closer than   from the perimeter of concentrated

118
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

loads, reaction areas, columns, column capitals or drop panels.

(4) In case of (3), the critical section for rectangular columns, concentrated loads or reaction areas shall
be permitted to be defined as four straight sides.

7.12.2 Shear strength for two-way action

(1) For two-way action, the design of slab or footing shall be based on Eqs. (7.2.1) and (7.2.2).  
shall be calculated in accordance with 7.12.2(2) or 7.12.2(3).   shall be calculated in accordance
with 7.12.3. For slabs with shearheads or headed shear studs,   shall be in accordance with
7.12.4 or 7.12.5. When combined punching shear and moment are applied to slab-column or
footing-column connections, both 7.12.2 and 7.12.7 shall be satisfied.

(2) Nominal shear strength of a reinforced concrete slab or footing,   , shall be computed by Eq.
(7.12.1).

       (7.12.1)

       cot     (7.12.2)

where,   is the average shear stress capacity of concrete,  is the perimeter of critical section
defined in 7.12.1(3),  is the modification factor for lightweight concrete,  is the size effect
factor of slab thickness,  is the aspect ratio factor of critical section,   is the tensile strength
of concrete in the compression zone,  is the average crack angle in the compression zone,  is
the average depth of the compression zone neglecting the contribution of compression
reinforcement and   is the average compressive stress developed in the compression zone of the
critical section.
     ≤  (7.12.3)

   
      ≤   (7.12.4)

    
  (7.12.5)

cot  
           (7.12.6)

    
         (7.12.7)

        (7.12.8)
where  in Eq. (7.12.3) is in mm.   is 1.0 for interior column, 1.33 for exterior column
(excepting corner column) and 2.0 for corner column. Eq. (7.12.7) shall be permitted to be used

119
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

for  ≤  ; and the value of 0.005 shall be permitted to be used when  is not greater than
0.005.

(3) Nominal shear strength,   , provided by concrete at a column in two-way prestressed concrete slab
or footing shall be computed by Eq. (7.12.9).

          (7.12.9)

where  is the perimeter of critical section defined in 7.12.1(3),   is the vertical component of
effective prestress force crossing critical section.   is computed by Eq. (7.12.2), where  is the
average depth of the compression zone and shall be calculated by a section analysis neglecting the
contribution of the compression reinforcement and considering the effect of compressive force
caused by prestressing.

(4) Shear strength shall be permitted to be determined by Eq. (7.12.9) when ①, ②, and ③ are
satisfied; otherwise, 7.12.2(2) shall apply:
① Distance from any portion of the column cross section to discontinuous slab edge shall not be
less than four times the slab thickness;
②  shall not be greater than 35 MPa; and


③ In each direction,  shall not be smaller than 0.88 MPa, nor be greater than 3.5 MPa.


(5) Nominal shear strength,   , shall not exceed     . where  is the perimeter of critical
section defined in 7.12.1(3).

(6) When computing   for slab-column connections, the effect of uniform loads located within a
distance 0.5 from the column face shall be permitted to be neglected. For footing-column
connections, the effect of uniform soil reactions within a distance 0.75 from the column face shall
be permitted to be neglected.

7.12.3 Shear reinforcement

(1) Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires and single or multiple leg stirrups are permitted to
be used for slabs and footings with  not less than 150 mm and 16 times the bar diameter of
shear reinforcement. Shear reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with 7.12.3(2) through
7.12.3(5).

(2) Nominal shear strength,   , shall be computed by Eq. (7.2.2); nominal shear strength of concrete,
  , shall be computed by Eq. (7.12.1) and (7.12.9); and nominal shear strength of shear
reinforcement,   , shall be computed in accordance with Eq. (7.12.10).
     
   (7.12.10)


120
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

where   is the cross sectional area of shear reinforcement placed along the shear critical section.
  shall not be greater than 400 MPa.

(3) Nominal shear strength,   , shall not be greater than     .  is the perimeter of critical
section defined in 7.12.1(3).

(4) The distance from the column face to the first line of stirrup legs that surround the column shall
not exceed  . In the first line of shear reinforcement, the spacing between adjacent stirrup legs
measured in a direction parallel to the column face shall not exceed . The spacing between
successive lines of stirrups that surround the column shall not exceed   in a direction
perpendicular to the column face.

(5) Shear reinforcement in slab shall be anchored safely at the top and bottom regions of the cross
section. The stirrups shall satisfy the requirements of 8.5 and surround the longitudinal flexural
reinforcement.

7.12.4 Shearheads design

(1) Shear reinforcement consisting of structural steel I or channel sections shall be permitted to be used
in slabs. Where shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior column supports, provisions of
the following (2) through (10) shall be applied. 7.12.7 shall be applied where moment is transferred
to column.

(2) Shearheads shall consist of structural steels with identical length that are rigidly connected
orthogonal to each other by full penetration welding. Shearhead arms shall not be interrupted in the
column section.

(3) The depth of shearheads shall not be greater than 70 times the web thickness of the structural
steel.

(4) The ends of each shearhead arm shall be permitted to be cut at an angle not less than 30 degrees
from the horizontal plane, provided the plastic moment strength of the remaining tapered section
shall be adequate to resist the shear force attributed to shearhead arm.

(5) All compression flanges of structural steel shall be located within  from slab compression
surface.

(6) Ratio   of the flexural stiffness of each shearhead arm to that of the surrounding composite
cracked slab section with a width     shall not be less than 0.15.

(7) Plastic moment strength   required for each shearhead arm shall be calculated by Eq. (7.12.11).

121
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

   
  
             
   (7.12.11)

where  is strength reduction factor for tension-controlled members,  is number of shearhead

arms, and  is minimum length of each shearhead arm determined by requirements of the
following (8) and (9).

(8) Critical slab section for shear shall be perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross each
shearhead arm at three-quarters of the distance       from the column face to the end of
the shearhead arm. The critical section shall be located so that its perimeter  is minimum, but
the distance from the critical section to column face is not necessarily less than   .

(9) Shear strength   shall not be greater than 

     , in the critical section defined in (8).
  shall not be greater than 
    in the critical section defined in 7.12.1(3) when
shearhead reinforcement is provided.

(10) Moment resistance,   , contributed to each slab column strip by a shearhead shall be permitted to
be taken by Eq. (7.12.12).

   
      


   (7.12.12)

where  is strength reduction factor for tension-controlled members,  is the number of shearhead
arms, and  is length of each shearhead arm actually provided. However,   , shall not be
greater than the smallest of the followings:
① 30 percent of total factored moment applied to each slab column strip;
② The variation in column strip moment over the length  ; 

③  calculated by Eq. (7.12.11).



(11) The shearhead shall have adequate anchorage to transmit   to the column when unbalanced moments
are considered.

7.12.5 Headed shear stud reinforcement

(1) Headed shear stud reinforcement placed perpendicular to the plane of a slab or footing shall be
permitted to be used for slabs and footings in accordance with the following (2) through (4). The
overall height of shear stud assembly shall not be less than a value subtracting the sum of the top
and bottom cover concrete and one half of the bar diameter of the tension flexural reinforcement
from the thickness of the member.

(2) For the critical section defined in 7.12.1(3),   shall be calculated by 7.12.3(2) and (3). In Eq.
(7.12.10),   is the cross sectional area of all the shear studs on a peripheral line that is parallel

122
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

to the perimeter of the column section, and  is the spacing of the peripheral lines of shear stud
reinforcement.

(3) The distance between the first peripheral line of shear stud and the column face shall not exceed
 . The spacing between peripheral lines of shear stud shall be measured in a direction
orthogonal to any face of the column and shall be uniform. For prestressed slabs and footings
satisfying 7.12.2(3) and (4), the spacing between shear studs in a peripheral line shall not be
greater than  . The spacing between shear studs shall not exceed   for all other slabs or
footings.

(4) At least one shear stud element shall be provided at each edge of critical section. The spacing
between adjacent shear stud elements, at each edge of critical section shall not exceed .

7.12.6 Openings in slabs

(1) When openings in slabs are located at a distance less than 10 times the slab thickness from a
concentrated load or reaction area, or when openings in flat slabs are located within column strips
defined in Chapter 10, the critical slab sections for shear defined in 7.12.1(3) and 7.12.4(8) shall
be modified as 7.12.6 (2) and (3).

(2) For slabs without shearheads, the perimeter of the critical section enclosed by straight lines
projecting from the centroid of the column, concentrated load, or reaction area to the boundaries
of the openings shall be considered ineffective.

(3) For slabs with shearheads, the ineffective portion of the perimeter shall be considered as one half
of that defined in 7.12.6(2).

7.12.7 Eccentric shear for moment transfer at slab-column connections

(1) When unbalanced moment,   , is developed by gravity load, wind load, earthquake, or other
lateral forces in slab-column or footing-column, this connection shall be designed to transfer
unbalanced moment.
  ≤   (7.12.13)

where   is the unbalanced moment acting to the critical section, and   is the design
unbalanced flexural strength at the critical section. The definition of the critical section for
unbalanced moment shall be accordance with 7.12.1.

(2) The design unbalanced flexural strength,   , shall be computed by Eq. (7.12.14) as sum of the
contributions of the front, back and side which consist of critical section.

  =    +    +    (7.12.14)

123
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

where   is slab flexural strength at the front and back of the critical section,   is moment
capacity developed by the eccentric shear at the front and back of the critical section,   is
torsional moment capacity developed by the eccentric shear at the side of the critical section,
   , and    . The front indicate a face of the critical section where the vertical
shear developed by unbalanced moment has the same direction as that developed by direct
punching shear. The back indicates a face of the critical section where the location is opposite to
the front. The sides indicate the other two faces orthogonal to the front and back.

(3) The flexural strength of the front and back shall be computed by Eq. (7.12.15).

       (7.12.15)

where    and    are the slab flexural strengths calculated from the top longitudinal
reinforcement in the front and the bottom longitudinal reinforcement in the back, respectively. In
case of exterior connections, when the front or back is located at the exterior of the slab
according to the direction of unbalanced moment,    and    shall be permitted not to be
provided.

(4)   and   are computed as the sum of the contributions of the shear strengths that are defined
as the product of the shear strength at each face of the critical section and the distance between
the face and the centroid of the column. The shear stress capacity shall be assumed to distribute
linearly in proportion to the distance from the neutral axis of the critical section. The location of
the neutral axis of the shear stress distribution is computed such that the force equilibrium for the
given direct punching shear is satisfied. The eccentric shear strength at the front, back and sides
are defined as follows;
① The eccentric shear strength at the front and back is computed by Eq. (7.12.16).
           ≤    (7.12.16)

where concrete eccentric shear strength,   , is defined by Eq. (7.12.2), and   is the average
stress at critical cross section at the front or back caused by vertical component of effective
prestress force.   is the eccentric shear strength provided by shear reinforcement placed at the
front and back.
To consider   in Eq. (7.12.16), shear reinforcements shall be provided uniformly in the front,
back and sides at the perimeter around the connection.         shall be permitted to be
calculated by using   defined by Eq. (7.12.10). In the calculation of   ,   shall not be
greater than 400 MPa.
② Eccentric shear strength at the sides shall be calculated by Eq. (7.12.17)
     
        ≤      (7.12.17)

where   is the average stress at critical cross section at the sides caused by vertical component
of effective prestress force, and   is the eccentric shear strength provided by shear reinforcement

124
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 7 Shear and Torsion

placed at the sides.

To consider   in Eq. (7.12.16), shear reinforcements shall be provided uniformly in the front,
back and sides at the perimeter around the connection.          shall be permitted to be
calculated by using   defined by Eq. (7.12.10). In the calculation of   ,   shall not be greater
than 400 MPa.

(5) When biaxial unbalanced moments are applied to a footing-column or slab-column connection, the
critical section shall be designed safe for the eccentric moment in each direction. The eccentric shear
strength in each direction shall be reduced considering the interaction between the eccentric shear
strengths in both direction. The following interaction of biaxial unbalanced moments shall be permitted
to be used.

               
        ≤
    (7.12.18)

where            ,            ; the subscript 1 and 2 indicates each direction of

the unbalanced moment.

(6) When structural steel I- or channel-shaped sections (shearheads) is used for shear reinforcement, the
sum of the shear stress due to vertical load acting on the critical section defined by 7.12.4(8) and
the shear stress resulting from moment transferred by eccentric shear at the centroid of the critical
section defined in 7.12.1(3) and 7.12.1(4) shall not exceed  
  .

125
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

Chapter 8 Development and Splices

8.1 General

8.1.1 Scope

(1) This chapter shall be applied to the development of reinforcement, welded wire fabric, and steel
strand.

(2) This chapter shall also be applied to the splices of reinforcement and welded wire mesh.

(3) The values of 

  used in this chapter shall not exceed 8.4 MPa.

(4) In addition to the requirements on the detailing of reinforcement in this chapter, the requirements
on the structural integrity in section 5.8 shall be satisfied.

8.1.2 Notations

 : Depth of equivalent rectangular stress block

 : Cross-sectional area of an individual bar, mm 

   : Net bearing area of the headed deformed bar, mm 

 : Cross-sectional area of tension reinforcement, mm 

  : Total cross-sectional area of all transverse reinforcement within spacing  that crosses the potential
plane of splitting through the reinforcement being developed, mm 

 : Area of shear reinforcement within spacing  , mm 

 : Area of an individual wire developed or spliced, mm 

 : Web width, or diameter of circular section, mm

 : Value regarding spacing between bars or cover thickness, mm. 8.2.2(3) ② reference
 : Effective depth of member, mm

 : Nominal diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing strand, mm

126
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

  : Specified compressive strength of the concrete, MPa.

  : Tensile stress in prestressing steel at nominal flexural strength, MPa

  : Effective stress in prestressing steel (after allowance for all prestress losses), MPa

  : Average split tensile strength of the concrete , MPa

 : Specified yield strength of steel, MPa

  : Specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement, MPa

 : Overall thickness or height of member, mm

  : Transverse reinforcement index.

 : Additional embedment length beyond centerline of support or point of inflection, mm

 : Development length, mm

 : Basic development length, mm

 : Development length in tension of deformed bar or deformed wire with a standard hook,
measured from critical section to outside end of hook (straight embedment length between
critical section and start of hook [point of tangency] plus inside radius of bend and one bar
diameter),mm =   × modification factors

 : Development length of headed deformed bar in tension, mm

 : Basic development length of standard hook in tension, mm

 : Nominal flexural strength of the cross section

 : Number of bars or wires being spliced or developed along the plane of splitting

 : Maximum center-to-center spacing of transverse reinforcement, within development length  ,

mm
 : Spacing of wires being developed or spliced, mm

 : Factored shear force at section

127
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

 : Factor used to modify development length based on reinforcement location, 8.2.2(2) reference

 : Factor used to modify development length based on reinforcement coating, 8.2.2(2), 8.2.6(1)
reference

 : Ratio of cut off reinforcement area to total tension reinforcement area at section

 : Factor used to modify development length based on reinforcement size, 8.2.2(3) reference

 : Modification factor of lightweight concrete, 3.4.4 reference

8.2 Development of Reinforcement

8.2.1 General development

(1) Reinforcing bar shall be developed according to embedment length, hook, mechanical anchorage, or
a combination thereof so that the tensile or compressive force, which is applied to each reinforcing
bar cross section of RC members, can be shown from the both sides of cross section. At this time,
the hook is no longer valid to the development of compression steel.

8.2.2 Development of deformed bar and deformed wire in tension.

(1) The development length  for deformed bar and deformed wire in tension can be applied by
selecting any one of the method according to method (2) which considers modification factors to
the basic development length  or method (3). The development length  computed by this
method shall always not be less than 300 mm.
(2) The basic development length  for deformed bar and deformed wire in tension shall be computed
by following Eq. (8.2.1). Modification factor according to bars arrangement, status of coated or
covered steel reinforcement surface, and type of concrete shall be computed by Table 8.2.1.

   
   (8.2.1)
  

, ,  given in the Table 8.2.1 are computed as follows.

128
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

Table 8.2.1 Modification factors

Bar
Bar and deformed wire
Bar not less than D22
Diameter not exceed D19
Condition
Condition where developed or spliced clear
spacing and cover thickness are not less than
 and placed stirrup or ties throughout  is
not less than the minimum amount of steel
 
provided in this Code, or in condition where
developed or spliced clear spacing is not less
than  and cover thickness is not less than

Other cases  
= position factor of bars arrangement
(a) Top reinforcing bars (Horizontal bars cast by fresh concrete in order to make the development
length or under bonded lap joint greater than 300 mm) 1.3
(b) Other bars 1.0
= coated factor of bars
(a) Epoxy coated bars or wire whose cover thickness is less than  or whose clear spacing is
less than  1.5
(b) Other epoxy coated bars or wire 1.2
(c) Galvanized bars 1.0
(d) Uncoated bars 1.0
If the epoxy coated bar is top reinforcing bar, multiplication between position factor of top
reinforcing bar  and coated factor of bars ,  need not be greater than 1.7.
 shall be in accordance with 3.4.4

(3) The development length  of deformed bar and deformed wire in tension can be computed by
following Eq. (8.2.2)

  
     (8.2.2)
   

  
  
The value (    )/ in Eq. (8.2.2) shall not be greater than 2.5. The values ,  and   in
Eq. (8.2.2) are as follows.
 = Size factor of reinforcing bar or wire
(a) Bar and deformed wire not greater than D19 ···················································································· 0.8
(b) Bar not less than D22 ··························································································································· 1.0
 = Size related to bar spacing or covering depth Expression mm units by using the smaller of
the shortest distance from the center of reinforcing bar or wire to the surface of concrete and 1/2
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

of center to center distance values for developed reinforcing bar or wire.

  =Transverse reinforcement index

 
=

It shall be permitted to use   =0 as a design simplification even if transverse reinforcement is
placed.

(4) Reduction in  shall be permitted by multiplying    


  to the computed development

length where reinforcement in a flexural member is in excess of that required by analysis. But at
this time, the reduced development length  shall not be less than 300 mm. Also, it shall not be
applied where development for   is specifically required.

(5) The followings shall be satisfied where specified yield strength of reinforcing bar exceeds 550 MPa.
If transverse reinforcement is not placed, the  shall not be less than 2.5.
If transverse reinforcement is placed,    ≥  and      ≥  shall be satisfied.

8.2.3 Development of deformed bars in compression

(1) Development length  of deformed bars in compression is computed by multiplying all applicable
modification factors in 8.2.3(3) to the basic development length  of the following (2). In
addition, the computed  shall not be less than 200 mm.

(2) Basic development length  of deformed bars in compression shall be computed according to
following Eq. (8.3.2).

  
   (8.2.3)
 
 

where  shall be in accordance with 3.4.4.

(3) Modification factors to the basic development length of deformed bars in compression are as
follows.
   
If the area of reinforcement is in excess of that required by analysis 
   
Deformed bars in compression within spiral reinforcement not less than 6 mm diameter and not
more than 100 mm pitch or within D13 ties in accordance with 5.5.2(3) and spaced at no more
than 100 mm in center
0.75
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

8.2.4 Development of bundled bars

(1) Development length  of individual bars within a bundle in tension or compression, compared to
development length in a case of non-bundled bars, shall be increased 20 % for three-bar bundle
and 33 % for four-bar bundle.

(2) For determining the development length  of bundled bars and in a case of calculating the clear
spacing, cover thickness, and coated factor in 8.2.2(2), and the confinement term in 8.2.2(3),
bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar having a centroid and the equivalent total area with
total of bundled bars.

8.2.5 Development for a tension deformed bars with standard hooks

(1) Development length  for a tension deformed bars with standard hook in an end shall be
determined by multiplying all applicable modification factors from the following (3) to the following
(2) of basic development length  . However, development length  determined by this, shall not
be less than  and 150 mm.

(2) Basic development length  can be determined according to the following Eq. (8.2.4).  and  is
determined according to 8.2.2(2).

   
   (8.2.4)
 
 

(3) Modification factors for basic development length  for a tension deformed bars with standard
hooks are as in the following.
For D35 and smaller bars and side cover thickness which is normal to plane of hook not less
than 70 mm, and 90 degree hook with cover thickness on bar extension beyond hook not less
than 50 mm 0.7
For 90-degree hooks of D35 and smaller bars that are either enclosed within ties or stirrups
perpendicular to the bar being developed , spaced not greater than  along development length
 ; or enclosed within ties or stirrups parallel to the bar being developed, spaced not greater than
 along the length of tail extension of the hook plus bend 0.8
For 180-degree hooks of D35 and smaller bars that are enclosed within ties or stirrups
perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not greater than  along development length
 0.8
For the cross section where development for total   is not specifically required, flexural
   
reinforcement in excess of that required 
   
But, in and , the first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the hook, within 
of the outside of the bend.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

(4) Hooks shall not be considered effective in developing bars in compression.

(5) For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of member with both side
cover thickness and top or bottom cover thickness over hook less than 70mm, the hooked bar shall
be enclosed within ties or stirrups or perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not greater
than  along development length  . The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the
hook, within  of the outside of the bend. For this case, factors in (3) and of 0.8 shall
not be applied.

(6) In case of using bars in excess of the specified yield strength of 550 MPa, factors in (3) and
of 0.8 shall not be applied.

8.2.6 Development of headed and mechanically anchored deformed bars in tension

(1) Development length of headed deformed bars in tension can be determined by the following
equation.

   
    (8.2.5)
  

where  is 1.2 for epoxy-coated reinforcement, and 1.0 for the other cases, and the development
length shall not be less than the larger of  and 150 mm. In order to apply the Eq. (8.2.5),
following conditions from to shall be satisfied.
The specified minimum yield strength shall not exceed 400 MPa.
The specified compressive strength of concrete shall not exceed 40 MPa.
Diameter of reinforcement shall not exceed 35 mm.
The equation cannot be applied for light-weight concrete. Instead, normal-weight concrete shall be
used.
Net bearing area of head (   ) shall not be less than   .
Clear cover thickness for bar shall not be less than  .
Clear spacing between bars shall not be less than  . However, clear spacing between bars can
be designated as not less than  in case of using beam main reinforcement at the
beam-column connection which has the top and bottom columns, transverse steel bar at the
connection is not less than 0.3% and if the back of heads are located within 50 mm from the
outside surface of transverse steel bar.

(2) Headed deformed bars shall not be considered effective in compression.

(3) Any mechanical attachment device capable to develop bars specified minimum yield strength can be
used as development method. In this case, test results approving the adequacy of mechanical
attachment device shall be submitted to the structural engineer in charge. Development of
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

reinforcement shall be permitted to consist of a combination of mechanical anchorage and bar

maximum stress point, and embedment length between mechanical attachments.

8.3 Development of Welded Wire Reinforcement

8.3.1 Development of welded deformed wire reinforcement in tension

(1) Development length for welded deformed wire reinforcement in tension measured from the point of
critical section to the end of wire shall be determined by multiplying wire reinforcement factor
described in following (5) and (6) to the development length  determined in 8.2.2(2) or 8.2.2(3).

(2) If the area of reinforcement located in flexural member is in excess of minimum area of
   
reinforcement required, development length  can be reduced by multiplying  to
   
the development length determined in (1). However, the reduced development length  shall not be
less than 200 mm, except in computation of lap splices by 8.7.1.

(3) It shall be permitted to use an epoxy-coating factor  of 1.0 in accordance with 8.2.2(2) , when
obtaining development length  for epoxy-coated welded deformed wire reinforcement by using the
following (5) and (6).
(4) When plain wire reinforcement is placed in the development length direction inside welded
deformed wire reinforcement, wire reinforcement shall be developed in accordance with 8.3.2.

(5) For welded deformed wire reinforcement with at least one cross wire within the development length
and not less than 50 mm from the point of critical section, the wire reinforcement factor shall be
the greater of

    
   and   
 

But this factor shall not be greater than 1.0.

(6) For welded deformed wire reinforcement with no cross wire within the development length or with
a single cross wire less than 50 mm from the point of the critical section, the wire reinforcement
factor shall be taken as 1.0 and the development length  shall be determined as for deformed
wire.

8.3.2 Development of welded plain wire reinforcement in tension

(1) The specified yield strength of welded plain wire reinforcement could be considered developed by
embedment of two cross wires with the closer cross wire not less than 50 mm from the point of
the critical section. However, the development length  which is shown as a distance from the
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

critical section to the outermost cross-wire, shall not be less than 150 mm.

(2) Development length  shall not be less than 150 mm except in computation of lap splices of
welded plain wire reinforcement in tension by 8.7.2.

(3) Development length  of welded plain wire reinforcement in tension is determined as follows.
     
      (8.3.1)
  
     

where  is determined in accordance with provisions in 8.2.2(2).

8.4 Development of Prestressing Strand

(1) Seven strands shall be proportioned by making a bond greater than the following value in order to
pass beyond the critical section except for the following section (2).

 
            (8.4.1)


The value inside parenthesis is considered as constants without units.

(2) Embedment length less than  shall be permitted if the design stress of a strand at arbitrary cross
section is not in excess of   when determining development length  in accordance with Eq.
(8.4.1).

(3) When bonding of a strand does not extend to the end of the member and a service load is
applied, development length determined by (1) shall be doubled if the allowable tension stress from
9.3.1(2) of tension zone, where a compressive force is already applied, is considered in design.

(4) Investigation of development length shall be limited to the nearest cross section from each end of
the member that are required to develop full design strength under specified factored loads. This
investigation can be excluded for the case that bonding of at least one strand does not extend to
the end of the member, or where concentrated loads are applied within the strand development
length.

8.5 Detail in Development of Reinforcement

8.5.1 General development of flexural reinforcement

(1) The safety in development of reinforcement at critical section or terminated tension reinforcement
within span or maximum stress point at flexural member shall be investigated. The provisions of
8.5.2(3) and 8.5.2(4) shall also be satisfied.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

(2) Flexural reinforcement shall extend for a distance equal to  or  , whichever is greater, beyond
the point at which it is no longer required to resist flexural moment. However, this provision
cannot be applied to supports of simple spans and a free end of cantilevers.

(3) Continuing reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than  beyond the point where
bent or terminated tension reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure.

(4) Development of tension reinforcement by bending across the web to be anchored or made
continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face of member shall be permitted.

(5) Adequate anchorage shall be provided for tension reinforcement in flexural members where
reinforcement stress is not directly proportional to flexural moment. Such members are sloped,
stepped, or tapered footings, brackets, deep beams, or members in which tension reinforcement is
not parallel to compression face. Refer to 8.5.2(5) and 8.5.3(4) for deep beams.

(6) Flexural reinforcement shall not be terminated in a tension zone unless satisfying one of following
the conditions, and the reinforcement shall not be terminated, in principle, at a section which is in
50% excess of total reinforcement.
For   at the cutoff point does not exceed (2/3) 
For the stirrup area in excess of that required for shear and torsion is provided along each terminated
bar or wire over a distance  from the termination point. Excessive stirrup area   shall not be
less than    , and spacing s shall not exceed   .
For D35 bars and the smaller, if continuing reinforcement provides double the area required for
flexure at the cutoff point and   does not exceed   .

8.5.2 Development of positive moment reinforcement

(1) At least 1/3 of the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and 1/4 of the positive
moment reinforcement in continuous members shall be extended along the same face of members
into the support. In beams, this reinforcement shall be extended into the support at least 150 mm.

(2) When a flexural member is part of a primary lateral-load-resisting system, positive moment
reinforcement required to be extended into the support by (1) shall be anchored to develop
specified minimum yield strength   in tension at the inner face of support.

(3) At simple supports and at points of inflection, diameter of positive moment reinforcement shall be
limited so that development length  computed for   by 8.2.2 satisfies Eq. (8.5.1).


 ≤  (8.5.1)
 

where an increase of 30 percent in the value of     shall be permitted when the ends of
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

reinforcement are pressed and confined by a compressive reaction.

(4) Eq. (8.5.1) does not need to be satisfied for reinforcement terminating beyond centerline of simple
supports by a standard hook or a mechanical anchorage whose performance, at least, is equivalent
to a standard hook, and development of straight reinforcement shall satisfy the following equation.

     
 ≤ (8.5.2)
 

(5) At simple supports of deep beams, positive moment reinforcement shall be anchored to develop  
at the face of the support. As an exception, if design is carried out using Appendix I, the positive
moment reinforcement shall be anchored in accordance with Appendix I.4.3. At interior supports of
deep beams, positive moment reinforcement shall be continuous or be spliced with that of the
adjacent spans.

8.5.3 Development of negative moment reinforcement

(1) Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous or restrained member, cantilever member, or in any
member of rigid frame shall be anchored in or through the supports by embedment length, hooks,
or mechanical anchorage.
(2) Negative moment reinforcement shall have an embedment length into the span as required by 8.2.1
and 8.5.1(2).

(3) At least 1/3 of the total tension reinforcement provided for negative moment at a support shall
have an embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less than ,  , or  of clear
span whichever is greater.

(4) At interior supports of deep beams, negative moment reinforcement shall be continuous with that of
the adjacent spans.

8.5.4 Development of web reinforcement

(1) Web reinforcement shall be placed as close to the compression and tension surfaces of the member
as cover thickness requirements and proximity of other reinforcement shall be permitted.

(2) Ends of single U-stirrup or multiple U-stirrups shall be anchored as required by one of the
following methods.
D16 and smaller bars or wire with diameter 16 mm and smaller shall be developed with a
standard hook around longitudinal reinforcement.
D19, D22, and D25 stirrups with   greater than 300 MPa shall be developed by ensuring a
standard stirrup hook around a longitudinal bar plus an embedment between midheight of the
member and the outside end of the hook equal to or greater than   
 .
  

Each leg of welded plain wire reinforcement forming simple U-stirrups shall be developed by the
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

following (a) or (b) method.

(a) Two longitudinal wires at a 50 mm spacing along the member at the top of the U-stirrups shall
be arranged.
(b) One longitudinal wire shall be located not more than  from the compression face and
another longitudinal wire shall be spaced not less than 50 mm from the first wire and closer to
the compression face. The second longitudinal wire shall be located outside the curvature. In
case of the inner diameter above  , the wire can be located inside the curvature.
For the development of each end of a single leg stirrup of welded plain or deformed wire
reinforcement, two longitudinal wires are spaced not less than 50 mm, but the inner wire is
spaced at least the greater of  or 50 mm from . Outer longitudinal wire at tension face
shall not be farther from the face than the portion of primary flexural reinforcement closest to the
face.
In joist construction as defined in 3.4.11, D13 and smaller bars or stirrup wire with diameter 13
mm and smaller shall use a standard hook.

(3) Between anchored ends, each bend in the continuous portion of a simple U-stirrup or multiple
U-stirrup shall enclose a longitudinal bar.

(4) When longitudinal bars, which is bent to be used as shear reinforcement, extend into a tension
region, the longitudinal bars shall be continuous with longitudinal reinforcement and, if the
longitudinal bars extend into a compression region, shall be anchored beyond mid-depth  as
specified for development length in 8.2.2 with the stress   required to satisfy Eq. (7.4.5)

(5) When the lap length of a pair of closed U-stirrups or ties is not less than 1.3 , the stirrups or ties
shall be considered properly spliced. In members with at least 450 mm depth, if stirrup legs extend
the full available depth of the members, the splice of closed stirrups shall be considered adequate.
The tension force    of a single splice shall not be more than 40 kN per leg.

8.6 Splices of Reinforcement

8.6.1 General

(1) Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as required or permitted in contract documents, or as
authorized by the structural engineer in charge.

(2) Lap splices shall be in accordance with the following provisions.

Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than D35. But it shall not be applied as provided in
8.6.3(2) and 12.4.2(4).
Lap splices of bars in bundle shall be based on the lap splice length required for individual bars
within the bundle, and increased in accordance with 8.2.4. But, individual bar splices within a
bundle shall not be overlapped. Entire bundles shall not be lap spliced.
Bars spliced by non-contact lap splices in flexural members shall not be spaced transversely
farther apart than the smaller of 1/5 of the required lap splice length and 150 mm.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

(3) Mechanical and welded splices shall be in accordance with the following provisions.
For welded splices, weldable bars shall be used and a full welded splice shall develop greater
than 125 % of specified minimum yield strength   .
A mechanical splices shall be full mechanical spliced greater than 125% of specified minimum
yield strength   .
Mechanical or welded splices not satisfying requirements of and shall be in accordance
with 8.6.2(5) and permitted only for D16 and smaller bars.

8.6.2 Splices of deformed bars and deformed wire in tension

(1) The lap splices length of deformed bars and deformed wire in tension is divided into class A and
B and shall not be less than 300 mm and the following values.
Class A splice :  
Class B splice :  
where the development length of deformed bars in tension is calculated in accordance with 8.2.2
without the modification factor of 8.2.2(4) and it shall be permitted to be less than the minimum
length 300mm specified in 8.2.2(1).

(2) In lap splices, Class A and B are classified by the followings.

Class A splice : The area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by analysis
over the entire length of the splice and the spliced reinforcement within the required lap length is
not more than 1/2 of the total reinforcement.
Class B splice : When not relevant to

(3) When bars of different size are lap spliced in tension, splice length shall be the larger of the
development length of larger bar and lap splice length of smaller bar.

(4) When area of the reinforcement provided within the required lap length is less than twice of that
required by analysis, mechanical or welded splices shall satisfy requirements of 8.6.1(3) or
8.6.1(3) .

(5) Mechanical or welded splices not meeting the requirements of 8.6.1(3) or 8.6.1(3) where area
of reinforcement provided is not less than twice that required by analysis shall be permitted for
D16 and smaller bars if the following requirements of and are met.
Splices at each section shall be staggered at least 600 mm and the total tensile force in splices
that can be developed shall be at least twice. Moreover, the total reinforcement provided shall
develop at least 140 MPa.
In computing the tensile forces that can be developed at each section, the spliced reinforcement
stress shall be taken as the specified splice strength, but not greater than   . The tensile stress in
the unspliced continuous reinforcement shall be taken as   times the ratio of the shortest length
embedded beyond the section to the development length  so that the specified minimum yield
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

strength   can be developed, but not greater than   .

(6) Splices in tie members shall be made with a full mechanical or full welded splice in accordance
with 8.6.1(3) or 8.6.1(3) . In addition, the splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered at least
750 mm.

8.6.3 Splices of deformed bars in compression

(1) Compression lap splice length shall be permitted to be computed by the following equation.


  
 
   
   (8.6.1)

where the lap splice length by Eq. (8.6.1) need not be greater than 0.072   for   of 400 MPa
or less, or it need not be greater than (0.13   24) for   greater than 400 MPa. Compression
lap splice length shall not be less than 300 mm and for the compressive strength of concrete less
than 21 MPa, length of lap shall be increased by 1/3. Lap slice length in compression need not
be longer than lap splice length in tension computed by 8.6.2.

(2) When bars of different size are lap spliced in compression region, splice length shall be the larger
of development length of larger bar and lap splice length of smaller bar. In addition, D41 and D51
bars shall be permitted to be spliced with D35 and smaller bars.

(3) Mechanical or welded splices used in compression region shall meet requirements of 8.6.1(3) or
8.6.1(3) .

(4) In bars subjected to compression only, transmission of compressive stress by bearing of square cut
ends held in concentric contact by a suitable device shall be permitted. Both ends of bars shall
have flat surfaces within 1.5° of a angle to the normal surface to axis of the bars and shall be
fitted within 3° of the bearing surface after assembly.

(5) End-bearing splices shall be used only in compression members where closed ties, closed stirrups,
or spirals are placed.

8.7 Splices of Welded Wire Reinforcement

8.7.1 Splices of welded deformed wire reinforcement

(1) Minimum lap splice length of welded deformed wire reinforcement measured between the ends of
each reinforcement sheet shall be not less than the larger of 1.3 and 200 mm. The overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each reinforcement sheet shall be not less than 50 mm,
where  is calculated in accordance with 8.3.1 for   .
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

(2) Lap splices of welded deformed wire reinforcement, with no cross wires within the lap splice
length, shall conform to the provisions of deformed wire.

(3) Where any plain wires are present in the welded deformed wire reinforcement in the direction of
the lap splice or where welded deformed wire reinforcement is lap spliced to welded plain wire
reinforcement, the reinforcement shall be lap spliced in accordance with 8.7.2.

8.7.2 Splices of welded plain wire reinforcement

(1) Where provided area of reinforcement is less than twice that required by analysis at splice location,
length of overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each reinforcement sheet shall be not
less than the largest of one spacing of cross wires plus 50 mm, 1.5 , and 150 mm, where  is a
development length calculated in accordance with 8.3.2 for specified yield strength   .

(2) Where provided area of reinforcement is at least twice that required by analysis at splice location,
length of overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each reinforcement sheet shall not be
less than the larger of 1.5 and 50 mm, where  is calculated in accordance with 8.3.2 for
specified yield strength   .

8.8 Special Requirements for Splice of Column Reinforcement

(1) Lap splices, butt welded splices, mechanical splices, and end-bearing splices shall be used with the
limitations from (2) to (6). A splice shall satisfy requirements for all load combinations for the
column.

(2) When the bar stress under factored loads is compressive, lap splices shall conform to 8.6.3(1) and
8.6.3(2), and, if applicable, to the following and .
In tied reinforced compression members, where ties throughout the lap splice length have an
effective area not less than 0.0015 in both directions, lap splice length shall be permitted to be
multiplied by 0.83. However, lap splice length shall not be less than 300 mm. The effective area
means the total area of tie legs perpendicular to the dimension of member .
In spirally reinforced compression members, lap splice length of bars within a spiral shall be
permitted to be multiplied by 0.75. However, lap splice length shall not be less than 300 mm.

(3) Where the bar stress does not exceed 0.5  in tension under factored loads, lap splices shall be
Class B lap splices if more than one-half of the bars are spliced at any section, or Class A lap
splices if half or fewer of the bars are spliced at any section and alternate lap splices are
staggered by  .

(4) Where the bar stress due to factored loads is greater than 0.5  in tension, lap splices shall be
Class B lap splices.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 8 Development and Splices

(5) Mechanical or welded splices of column reinforcement shall meet the requirements of 8.6.1(3) or
8.6.1(3) .

(6) End-bearing splices according to 8.6.3(4) and 8.6.3(5) shall be permitted to be used for column
bars stressed in compression if the splices are staggered or additional bars are provided at splice
locations. The continuing bars in each face of the column shall have a tensile strength, not less
than 0.25  times the area of the vertical reinforcement in that face.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

9.1 General

9.1.1 Scope

(1) The provision of this chapter shall apply to prestressed members with tendon such as wire, bars, or
strands described in 2.2.3(6).

(2) All provision of this Code not specially excluded, or not in conflict with provisions of this chapter,
shall apply to design of prestressed concrete.

(3) The following of this Code shall not apply to design of prestressed concrete except as specifically
noted : Provisions 3.4.10(1), 3.4.10(2), 3.4.11, 5.3.2(5), 6.2.2(2), 6.2.2(3), 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.4.2(1),
6.4.2(2), Chapter 10(except one-way slab), 11.3, 11.4.2, and 11.5(1).

9.1.2 Notations

  : Larger cross-sectional area of the slab-beam strips of the two orthogonal equivalent frames
intersecting at a column of a two-way slab, mm

  : Area of cross section between the flexural tension face and center of gravity of concrete
gross section , mm

  : Area of tendon, mm

 : Aidth of compression face of member, mm

 : Effective depth of member: distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of

longitudinal tension reinforcement, mm

′ : Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal compression reinforcement,

mm

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tendon, mm

  : Compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestress, MPa

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

  : Stress in the tendon when concrete stress is zero at the centroid of the tendon, MPa
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

  : Effective prestress in tendon, MPa

  : Tensile stress in tendon at nominal flexural strength, MPa

  : Specified tensile strength of tendon, MPa

  : Specified yield strength of tendon, MPa

 : Modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa

 : Extreme fiber stress in tension in the pre-compressed tensile zone calculated based on gross
section at service loads, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa,

 : Height of member, mm

 : Wobble friction coefficient of tendon per unit meter

 : Length of tendon from jacking end to an arbitrary point , m, see Eqs. (9.4.1) and (9.4.2)

 : Tension force in concrete due to dead load plus live load(  ＋  ), N

  : Prestressing force in tendon at jacking end, N

  : Prestressing force in tendon at an arbitrary point , N

  : Total angular change of tendon from jacking end to an arbitrary point x, radians

 : Factor for type of tendon

 : Curvature friction coefficient of curved tendon

 : Ratio of   to 

 : Tension reinforcement index

′ : Compression reinforcement index

 : Prestressing steel index

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

9.2 General Design

9.2.1 Design principles

(1) Prestressed concrete members shall meet the strength requirement of this Code.

(2) Design of prestressed concrete members shall be based on strength and on behavior at service
conditions at all stages during the life of structure from the time prestress is first applied.

(3) Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be considered in design.

(4) Effects of elastic and plastic deformations, deflections, changes in length, and rotations due to
prestressing on adjoining structures shall be considered. Effects of temperature and shrinkage shall
also be considered.

(5) The possibility of buckling in a member, thin webs, and flanges between points where there is
partial contact between the tendon and oversize duct shall be considered.

(6) The loss of area due to duct shall be considered in computing section properties before bonding of
tendon.

9.2.2 Design assumptions

(1) Strength design of prestressed concrete members for flexure and axial loads shall be based on
assumptions in 6.2.1. However, the 6.2.1(4) shall apply only to reinforcement which is not
tensioned.

(2) Stress calculations at transfer of prestress, at service load, and at cracking loads shall be based on
linear elastic theory with following assumptions.
Strains are proportional to the distance from neutral axis.
At cracked sections, concrete shall not resist tension.

(3) Prestressed concrete flexural members shall be classified as Class Uncracked, Class Partially
Cracked, and Class Completely Cracked according to   , extreme tension fiber stress in
pre-compressed tension zone at service loads.
Class uncracked :  ≤ 
  

Class partially cracked : 

   ≤ 


Class Completely Cracked :    

 
Prestressed two-way slabs shall be designed as members of Class Uncracked with   ≤ 
 

(4) For Class Uncracked and Class Partially Cracked flexural members, stresses at service loads shall
be calculated using the uncracked section. For Class Completely Cracked flexural members, stresses
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

at service loads shall be calculated using the cracked transformed section according to 4.3.3(2).

(5) Deflections of prestressed concrete flexural members shall be calculated according to 4.3.3.

9.3 Serviceability of Flexural Members

9.3.1 Allowable stresses in concrete

(1) Before time dependent prestress losses are occurred, stresses immediately after prestress transfer
shall not exceed the following values.
Flexural compressive stress (except )  
Flexural compressive stress at ends of simply supported members  
Flexural tensile stress (except ) 
 
Flexural tensile stress at ends of simply supported members 
 
If computed tensile stress exceeds above mentioned values in or , additional bonded
reinforcement (nonprestressed reinforcement or prestressing steel) shall be provided in tensile zone
to resist the total tensile force in concrete computed with the assumption of an uncracked section.

(2) For Class Uncracked and Class Partially Cracked prestressed concrete flexural members, flexural
stresses in concrete at service loads after all prestress losses shall not exceed the following values.
At this time, section properties can be calculated as assuming uncracked section.
Extreme fiber stress in compression(effective prestress sustained load)   
Extreme fiber stress in compression(effective prestress total load)   

(3) Permissible stresses shall be permitted to exceed the allowable stresses provided in (1) and (2),
when the safety is confirmed by test or accurate analysis.

(4) For Class Completely cracked prestressed concrete flexural members not subject to fatigue or exposed to
corrosive environments, the spacing of bonded reinforcement nearest the extreme tension face shall not
exceed that regulated in 6.3.3(4). However, special investigations and precautions listed in , , ,
and are required, for members subject to fatigue or exposed to corrosive environments.
The spacing shall be satisfied by the required condition by nonprestressed reinforcement and
bonded tendons. The spacing of bonded tendons shall not exceed 2/3 of the maximum spacing
allowable for nonprestressing reinforcement. In order to meet the spacing requirement, the spacing
between a reinforcement and a tendon shall not exceed 5/6 of that permitted by 6.3.3(4).
In applying Eqs. (6.3.3) and (6.3.4) to tendons,   shall be substituted for   , where  
shall be permitted to be taken as the calculated stress in the prestressing steel at service loads
based on a cracked section analysis minus the decompression stress   . The   shall be
permitted to be taken as equal to effective stress of tendon   .
In applying Eq. (6.3.3) and Eq. (6.3.4),   shall not exceed 250 MPa. If   is less than
or equal to 140 MPa, the spacing requirements of above and shall not apply.
Where depth of a beam exceeds 900 mm, skin reinforcement in 6.3.3(6) shall be provided.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

9.3.2 Allowable stress in tendon

(1) When prestressing, tensile stress in tendon shall be less than or equal to smaller of   and
  , and shall not also exceed the maximum value recommended by the manufacturer of
tendon or anchorage devices.

(2) Tensile stress in tendon, immediately after prestress transfer, shall be less than or equal to smaller
of    and    .

(3) Stress of post tensioned tendon at anchorage devices and couplers, immediately after prestress
transfer, shall be less than or equal to    .

9.4 Loss of Prestress

9.4.1 Sources of loss

To determine effective prestress,   , the following sources of loss of prestress shall be considered.
Sliding of anchorage device due to tendon seating at transfer
Elastic shortening of concrete
Friction loss between post-tensioning tendons and ducts
Creep of concrete
Shrinkage of concrete
Relaxation of tendon stress

9.4.2 Friction loss in post-tensioning tendons

(1) Friction loss in post-tensioning tendons shall be computed by Eq. (9.4.1).

－    ＋  
  ＝   (9.4.1)

Where        is less than or equal to 0.3, the following approximate equation shall be
permitted to be used instead of Eq. (9.4.1)

  ＝           (9.4.2)

(2) When friction loss is computed, wobble friction coefficient,  , and curvature friction coefficient,  ,
shall be determined experimentally, and shall be verified during tensioning operations.

(3) Wobble friction coefficient and curvature friction coefficient used in design shall be specified on
design drawings.

(4) Where loss of prestress in a member occurs due to connection of the member to adjoining
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

structure, such loss of prestress shall be considered in design.

9.5 Flexural Member

9.5.1 Flexural strength

(1) The calculation of design moment strength of flexural members shall be based on ultimate strength
design method of the Code. The stress of tendon shall be   instead of   .

(2) The   shall be computed based on strain compatability. When   is not calculated more
accurately and   is not less than   ,   shall be permitted to be computed approximately
by using the following (3) and (4).

(3) For members with bonded tendons,   shall be permitted to be computed by Eq. (9.5.1).

｛ ｝
    
  ＝   － 

  ＋  －′  (9.5.1)
      

where,     ,      ,′  ′    , and  is 0.55 for     0.80, 0.40 for    
0.85, and 0.28 for     0.90. If any compression reinforcement is considered when calculating  
   
in Eq. (9.5.1), the value of    ＋  －′ 

shall not be less than to 0.17, ′ shall be less
    
than or equal to 0.15 .

(4) For members with unbonded tendons,   shall be permitted to be taken according to Eq. (9.5.2)
and (9.5.3).
For a span-to-depth ratio is less than or equal to 35,

 
         (9.5.2)


where   shall be less than or equal to   and     MPa.

For a span-to-depth ratio is greater than 35,

 
         (9.5.3)


where   shall be less than or equal to   and     MPa.

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

(5) The reinforcement used with tendon steel shall be permitted to contribute to the tensile force in
flexural strength calculation, where tensile force shall be based on the stress in reinforcement
performed by strain compatability analysis.

9.5.2 Limits for reinforcement of flexural members

(1) The sections of prestressed concrete shall be classified as either tension-controlled sections, transition
sections, or compression-controlled sections, specified in 6.2.2(3) and 6.2.2(4). The strength
reduction factors, , shall apply in accordance with 3.3.3 .

(2) Total amount of reinforcements and tendon steels in members with bonded tendons shall be enough
to resist a factored load at least 1.2 times the calculated cracking load based on the modulus of
rupture of concrete,   , specified in Eq. (4.3.3). The flexural members with shear and flexural
strength at least twice that factored loads specified in 3.3.2 need not be conformed to this
condition.

(3) In prestressed concrete flexural members, part or all of bonded reinforcement including bars and
tendons shall be arranged as close as possible to the tension face. In members prestressed with
unbonded tendons, the minimum bonded reinforcement consisting of bars or tendons shall be as
specified in 9.5.3

9.5.3 Minimum area of bonded reinforcement

(1) A minimum bonded reinforcement shall be needed in all flexural members with unbonded tendons
as required by (2) and (3).

(2) Except the case in 9.5.3(3), the minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be calculated in
accordance with Eq. (9.5.4).

     (9.5.4)

The minimum area of bonded reinforcement computed by Eq. (9.5.4) shall be uniformly
distributed over pre-compressed tensile zone as close as possible to tension face.
Minimum bonded reinforcement shall be distributed regardless of service load stress conditions.

(3) For two-way flat slabs with constant thickness, minimum bonded reinforcement and distribution shall
be as following provisions.
Minimum area of bonded reinforcement distributed in positive moment zone shall be computed by
Eq. (9.5.5), where tensile stress in concrete at service loads exceeds 
 after allowance for


all prestress losses.


   (9.5.5)
 
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

Where,   shall not exceed 400 MPa, minimum bonded reinforcement computed by Eq. (9.5.5)
shall be uniformly distributed over precompressed tensile zone as close as possible to the extreme
tension face.

Minimum area of bonded reinforcement computed by Eq. (9.5.6) in negative moment zone at
column support shall be distributed in each direction.

     (9.5.6)

Minimum bonded reinforcement computed by Eq. (9.5.6) shall be distributed with at least four
bars or wires at most 300 mm spacing in each direction which is 1.5 outside from the front
face of column support inside the slab width.

(4) Minimum length of bonded reinforcement computed by above (2) and (3) shall be as required the
following provisions.
In positive moment areas, bonded reinforcement shall extend one-sixth of the clear span to each
side of the center of positive moment area.
In negative moment areas, bonded reinforcement shall extend one-sixth of the clear span length on
each side of support.
For design moment strength in accordance with 9.5.1(5) or tensile stress condition in accordance
with 9.5.3(3) , minimum length of bonded reinforcement shall conform to provisions of Chapter 8.

9.6 Statically Indeterminate Structures

9.6.1 Design principles

(1) Frames and continuous structure of prestressed concrete shall be designed for satisfactory
performance at service load conditions and for adequate strength.

(2) Performance of structure at service load shall be determined by elastic analysis, considering
reactions, moments, shears, and axial forces induced by prestressing, creep and shrinkage of
concrete, temperature change, axial deformation, restraint of attached structural elements, and
foundation settlement.

(3) Flexural moments used to compute required strength shall be the sum of the flexural moments due
to reactions induced by prestressing with a load factor of 1.0 and the flexural moments due to
factored loads. Flexural moment calculated with factored loads can be adjusted by considering
redistribution of negative moments according to the provision 9.6.2.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

9.6.2 Redistribution of moments in continuous prestressed concrete flexural members

(1) Where area of reinforcement provided is not less than that of the minimum bonded reinforcement at
supports in accordance with 9.5.3, it shall be permitted to decrease negative or positive moments
calculated by elastic theory for any assumed loading in accordance with 3.4.2.

(2) The reduced moment shall be used for calculating redistributed moments at all other sections within
the spans. static equilibrium shall be satisfied after redistribution of moments for each loading
arrangement.

9.7 Design of Compression Members

9.7.1 Design principles

(1) Prestressed concrete members subject to axial forces or both flexural moments and axial forces,
with or without reinforcement, shall be designed by the strength design methods of this Code
applied to reinforced concrete members.

(2) Effects of prestress, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change shall be considered for design of
compression members.

9.7.2 Reinforcement arrangement

(1) Members with average compressive stress in concrete less than 1.6 MPa, due to effective prestress
force, shall have minimum reinforcement arranged in accordance with 5.5.2, and 6.4.2(1), (2) for
columns, or 11.3 for walls.

(2) Except for walls, members with average compressive stress in concrete not less than 1.6 MPa, due
to effective prestress force, shall have all tendons enclosed by spirals or ties in accordance with the
following provisions.
Spirals shall conform to 5.5.2(2).
Ties shall be at least D10 in size or welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area, and vertical
spacing of ties shall not exceed 48 times tie bar or wire diameters, or less than and equal to the
minimum dimension of compression member cross section.
Spacing of ties located above top of spread footing or lower part of column of slab in any story,
shall be not more than 1/2 tie spacing mentioned in provision , and spacing of ties located
below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in upper part of column shall not be more than 1/2 tie
spacing mentioned in provision .
Where beams or brackets frame into four sides of a column, tie bars shall be permitted to be
terminated not more than 75 mm below lowest reinforcement in such beams or brackets.

(3) For walls with average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force greater than
or equal to 1.6 MPa, minimum reinforcement required by 11.3 need not be applied where structural
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

analysis shows adequate strength and stability.

9.8 Design of Slab

9.8.1 Required strength and serviceability

(1) Factored moments and shears in prestressed concrete slabs reinforced for flexure in not less than
two directions shall be calculated in accordance with provisions of 10.5, excluding 10.5.7(4) and
(5), or by more detailed analysis methods.

(2) Flexural strength at every section of prestressed concrete slabs shall be greater than or equal to
design section force according to 3.3.2, 3.3.3, 9.6.1(3), and 9.6.2.

(3) Shear strength of prestressed concrete slabs at columns shall be greater than or equal to design
section force according to 3.3.2, 7.2.1, 7.12.2, and 7.12.7.

(4) At service load conditions, all serviceability limitations, including deflections, shall be satisfied with
the described factors listed in 9.6.1(2).

9.8.2 Arrangements of tendons and reinforcements

(1) For uniformly distributed loads, spacing of tendons shall be less than or equal to eight times the
slab thickness and 1.5 m in at least one direction.

(2) Spacing of tendons shall be determined to provide an average concrete compressive stress of at
least 0.9 MPa due to effective prestress.

(3) For slabs with varying cross section along the slab span, either parallel or perpendicular to the
tendon direction, the minimum average concrete compressive stress due to effective prestress shall
be designed at least 0.9 MPa at every cross section.

(4) Concentrated loads and opening in slabs shall be considered when determining tendon spacing.

(5) In slabs with unbonded tendons, minimum bonded reinforcement shall be placed according to
9.5.3(3) and (4).

(6) Except the case of 9.8.2(7), in slabs with unbonded tendons, at least two 12.7 mm diameter or
larger, seven-wire strands shall be provided in each direction at columns. These tendons shall be
passing through or anchored within the region bounded by the longitudinal main reinforcement of
the column. Outside column and shear cap faces, these tendons shall pass under any orthogonal
tendons in adjacent spans. These tendons shall extend to be anchored beyond the column centroid.
(7) Prestressed concrete slabs, not satisfying 9.8.2(6), shall contain bottom reinforcement in two
direction passing through the region bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column and
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

be anchored at exterior supports according to 10.6.4(5). The area of reinforcement shall be not less
than 1.5 times minimum reinforcement that required by 6.3.2(1) and not less than    ,
where  is the width of the column face through which the reinforcement passes. The length of
these reinforcements beyond the column or shear cap face shall be greater than or equal to
development length by 8.2.2 (1).

(8) In lift slabs, bonded bottom reinforcement shall be placed according to 10.6.4(6).

9.9 Prestress Anchorage Zones

9.9.1 Post-tensioned tendon anchorage zones

(1) The anchorage zone shall be considered as composed of two zones.

The local zone is defined as the rectangular prism of concrete surrounding the anchorage device
and any confining reinforcement, where equivalent rectangular prism can be used for circular or
oval anchorages.
The general zone is defined as the anchorage zone including the local zone.

(2) Local zone shall be designed in accordance with the following provisions.
Local zone shall be designed by the factored prestressing force   of 3.3.2(5), and the design
strength by strength reduction factor of 3.3.3(2) .
Local zone reinforcement shall be provided for proper functioning of the anchorage device.
Local zone requirements of shall satisfy the provision 9.9.2(1) or 9.9.3(1) and 9.9.3(2).

(3) General zone shall be designed based on the following provisions.

General zone shall be designed by the factored prestressing force   by load factor of 3.3.2(5),
and the design strength by strength reduction factor of 3.3.3(2) .
General-zone reinforcement shall be reinforced to resist bursting, spalling, and longitudinal edge
tension forces induced by anchorage devices. Effects of abrupt change in section shall be
considered.
Design of general zone shall satisfy the provisions of 9.9.1(4), 9.9.1(5), and 9.9.1(6), and satisfy
one of provisions of 9.9.2(2), 9.9.2(3) or 9.9.3(3).

(4) Nominal material strength shall satisfy the following provisions.

Nominal tensile strength of bonded reinforcement shall not exceed   and nominal tensile strength
of bonded tendon shall not exceed   . Nominal tensile strength of unbonded tendon shall not
exceed        (MPa).
Except for concrete confined with spirals or tied reinforcements corresponding to Eq. (6.4.1), nominal
compressive strength of concrete in the general-zone shall be less than or equal to 0.7  .
Compressive strength of concrete at time of post-tensioning shall be specified in design documents.
Unless oversize anchorage devices are used to compensate for the lower compressive strength or the
tendon is not stressed over 50 % of the final prestressing force, tendon shall not be stressed until
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

compressive strength of concrete is at least 28 MPa for multistrand tendons or at least 17 MPa for
single-strand or bar tendons.

(5) Design of anchorage zone permits the following methods.

The following methods shall be permitted to be applied to the design of general-zones.
(a) Plastic model based on equilibrium condition (strut-tie model)
(b) Linear stress analysis (finite element analysis or similar analysis)
(c) Applicable simplified equations
Simplified equations shall not be used for the following cases.
(a) Where member cross sections are nonrectangular
(b) Where discontinuities in or near the general zone cause changes in the force flow path
(c) Where minimum edge distance is less than 1.5 times anchorage device dimension in that
direction
(d) Where multiple anchorage devices are not close enough, so can not be treated as one anchorage
group
The stressing sequence shall be considered in the design, and specified on the design drawings.
3-Dimensional effects shall be considered in the design by 3-D analysis procedures or considering
the summation of effects for two orthogonal plane approximately.
For anchorage devices located away from the end of the member, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided to transfer at least   into the concrete section behind the anchor. Such
reinforcement shall be placed symmetrically around the anchorage devices and shall be fully
anchored both behind and ahead of the anchorage devices.
Where tendons are curved in the general zone, except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where
analysis shows reinforcement is not required, reinforcement shall be provided to properly resist
radial and splitting forces.
Except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where reinforcement is not required by analysis, minimum
reinforcement corresponding to a nominal tensile strength equal to 2 % of each factored prestressing
force shall be provided in orthogonal directions to tension force and parallel to the back face of all
anchorage zones to limit spalling forces.
Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in calculations of reinforcement requirements.

(6) Selection of reinforcement sizes, spacings, cover, and other details for anchorage zones shall be
determined by considering tolerances on the bending, fabrication, and placement of reinforcement,
by the size of aggregate, and by placement and consolidation of the concrete.

9.9.2 Design of anchorage zones for monostrand or single 16 mm diameter bar tendons

(1) Monostrand or single 16 mm or smaller diameter bar anchorage devices and local zone
reinforcement shall satisfy the requirements of anchorage device in 9.9.3(2).
(2) General-zones of slab tendons shall be designed as the followings.
For anchorage devices for 12.7 mm or smaller diameter strands in normal weight concrete slabs,
minimum reinforcement meeting the requirements of following and shall be provided unless
such reinforcement is not required by detailed analysis satisfying 9.9.1(5).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 9 Prestressed Concrete

At least two D13 bars shall be provided parallel to the slab edge. They shall be provided in the
front face of the anchorage device and shall be within a distance of  ahead of each device.
Those bars shall extend at least 150 mm either side of the outer edges of each device.
If the center-to-center spacing of anchorage devices is 300 mm or less, the anchorage devices shall
be considered as a group. For each group of six or more anchorage devices,    hairpin bars
or closed stirrups at least D10 shall be provided, where  is the number of anchorage devices.
One hairpin bar or stirrup shall be placed between each anchorage device and one on each side
of the group. The hairpin bars or stirrups shall be placed with the legs extending into the slab
perpendicular to the edge. The center portion of the hairpin bars or stirrups shall be placed
perpendicular to the plane of the slab from  to  ahead of the anchorage devices.
For anchorage devices not conforming to , minimum reinforcement shall be placed based on a
detailed analysis satisfying 9.9.1(5).

(3) Design of general zones for monostrand tendons groups in beams or girders shall satisfy the
provisions 9.9.1 (3) through (5).

9.9.3 Design of anchorage zones for multistrand tendons

(1) Design of anchorage devices of multistrand tendons and local zone reinforcement shall meet
9.9.1(2).

(2) Where special anchorage devices are to be used, skin reinforcement shall be arranged in anchorage
zone, in addition to the confining reinforcement specified for the anchorage devices. This
supplemental reinforcement shall be at least equivalent in steel ratio to any skin reinforcement used
in the qualifying acceptance tests of the anchorage device and their placing configuration shall be
similar.

(3) Design of general zones for multistrand tendons shall satisfy the provisions 9.9.1(3) through (5).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

Chapter 10 Slab Systems

10.1 General

10.1.1 Scope

(1) The provisions in 10.2 shall apply for the design of one-way slabs, and the other provisions of
Chapter 10 shall apply for the design of slab systems reinforced for flexure in two or more
directions, with or without beams between supports.

(2) Two-way slabs of rectangular panels shall be permitted to be designed in accordance with Appendix IV.

(3) The design of solid slabs and slabs with recesses or openings made by permanent or removable
fillers between joists or ribs shall conform to Chapter 10.

(4) The minimum thickness of slabs designed per Chapter 10 shall be determined by 4.3.

10.1.2 Notations

 : Dimension of the critical section  defined in 7.12.1, measured in the direction of the
span for which moments are calculated, mm

 : Dimension of the critical section  defined in 7.12.1, measured in the direction

perpendicular to  , mm

 : Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured in

the direction of the span for which moments are calculated, mm

 : Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured in

the direction perpendicular to the span for which moments are calculated, mm

 : Cross-sectional constant to define torsional properties

 

∑      
 
The constant C for T- or L-sections is to be evaluated by dividing the section into multiple
rectangular parts and summing the C values for all parts.

  : Modulus of elasticity of beam concrete

  : Modulus of elasticity of column concrete

  : Modulus of elasticity of slab concrete

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

 : Overall thickness of member, mm

 : Moment of inertia of cross section of torsional beam defined in 10.3.1(4) about neutral axis

 : Moment of inertia of gross section of slab about centroidal axis (  times the width of
slab defined for calculating  and   )

 : Torsional stiffness of torsional member, torsional moment per unit rotation, see 10.5.5

 : Length of clear span in the direction that moments are calculated, between the faces of
supports

 : Length of span in the direction that moments are calculated, between the centers of supports

 : Length of span in the direction perpendicular to  , between the centers of supports, see
10.4.2(3) and 10.4.2(4)

 : Factored moment that is resisted by columns above and below, see 10.4.9(2)

 : Sum of moment strengths of slabs in front and back of the critical section of slab-column
connection

 : Total factored static moment

 : Factored moment at section

 : Nominal shear strength provided by concrete, see 7.10.2(2)

 : Factored shear force at section

 : Factored dead load per unit area

 : Factored live load per unit area

 : Factored load per unit area

 : Shorter dimension of rectangular part of cross section

 : Longer dimension of rectangular part of cross section

 : Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of slab section bounded by
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

the centerlines of slab panels on both sides of the beam =      

 :  in the direction of 

 :  in the direction of 

 : Ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to flexural stiffness of slab section, where
the width of slab is equal to the span length of edge beam between the centers of supports
=     

 : Ratio of longitudinal tension reinforcement

 : Ratio of longitudinal tension reinforcement at balanced strain condition

 : Strength reduction factor

10.2 One-way Slabs

10.2.1 Design principles

(1) One-way slabs supported at only two opposite sides shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 6
(Bending and Compression).

(2) Slabs supported at four sides in which the longer-to-shorter span ratio is greater than 2 shall be
designed as one-way slabs. Such slabs shall be designed only in the shorter span direction in
accordance with Chapter 6, and the span shall be defined by 3.4.7.

10.2.2 Continuous slabs monolithic with reinforced concrete beams

(1) For continuous slabs monolithic with reinforced concrete beams, moment and shear shall be permitted
to be calculated by elastic analysis or approximate methods in 3.4.1, assuming the slabs as continuous
beams on simple supports. In this case, the span shall be defined by 3.4.7, and calculated moment
shall be adjusted as follows:
Negative moment due to live load at midspan may be taken only one-half of the calculated value.
Positive moment at midspan shall be taken larger than or equal to the value calculated assuming
that both ends are fixed.
When the clear span is longer than 3.0m, moment within the clear span can be used. However,
the moment used for design shall not be less than the value calculated assuming fixed ends of
the clear span.

(2) Differential deflections of the beams at the ends of slab shall be considered.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

10.2.3 Design details

(1) The thickness of one-way slabs shall be in accordance with 4.3.1, and more than or equal to 100
mm.

(2) At critical sections, the center-to-center spacing of flexural reinforcement for both positive and
negative moments shall not be greater than two times the slab thickness, nor than 300 mm. At
other sections, the center-to-center spacing shall not be greater than three times the slab thickness,
nor than 450 mm.

(3) In one-way slabs, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with
5.7.2 in the direction normal to flexural reinforcement for both positive and negative moments.

(4) Where a slab cantilevers beyond a simple support, reinforcement for negative moment shall be
provided appropriately.

(5) To control cracks caused by negative moment across shorter span beams of the slab, reinforcement
shall be provided at the top of the slab section in the longer span direction. The reinforcement
shall be arranged in accordance with 3.4.10(3).

10.3 Design of Two-way Slabs

10.3.1 Definitions

(1) For slabs supported by columns or walls,  ,  , and the clear span  shall be based on an
effective support section at the bottom of the slab. The effective support section is defined by the
intersection of the bottom surface of the slab, or the drop panel if present, with the largest right
circular cone, right pyramid, or tapered wedge whose surfaces are oriented within 45 degrees to the
axis of the column and are within the column and the capital or bracket.

(2) Column strip is a portion of slab on each side of the column centerline, with a width equal to the
smallest of 0.25 and 0.25 . Column strip includes the beam between supports.

(3) Middle strip is a portion of slab bounded by two adjacent column strips.

(4) When a beam is monolithic or fully composite with slab, the section of the beam includes a
portion of slab on each side of the beam, with a width equal to the greater projection of the beam
above or below the slab. The width of slab on each side of the beam shall be smaller than or
equal to four times the slab thickness.

(5) To enlarge critical sections for shear at a slab-column connection, a shearhead projecting below the
slab shall be provided with an extension in each direction from the column edges larger than the
projecting thickness.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

10.3.2 Analysis and design methods

(1) A slab system can be designed by any method satisfying conditions of equilibrium and geometric
compatibility. The design strength at every section shall be greater than or equal to the required
strength specified in 3.3, and serviceability conditions such as limits on deflections shall be
satisfied.

(2) For gravity loads, a slab system, including the slab and beams (if any) between supports, and
supporting columns or walls that form orthogonal frames, can be designed by either the direct
design method in 10.4 or the equivalent frame method in 10.5.

(3) Lateral load analysis of frames shall account for the effects of reinforcement and cracking on the
stiffness of frame members.

(4) For a slab system subjected to lateral loads, the results of lateral load analysis shall be combined
with the results of gravity load analysis.

(5) The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be designed to be capable of resisting factored
moments at every section.

10.3.3 Transfer of unbalanced moment

(1) When gravity loads, wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads induce the transfer of moment between
a slab and column, the unbalanced moment shall be designed in accordance with 7.12.7.

(2) The unbalanced moment   determined by Eq. (7.12.14) and (7.12.15) in 7.12.7 shall be deemed
to be transferred by flexure within the critical sections of slab, which represents a width between
points equal to one-half the slab or drop panel effective thickness from each face of the column or
column capital.

(3) Design for the load transferred from slabs to columns or walls by shear and torsion shall be in
accordance with Chapter 7.

10.3.4 Drop panels in flat slabs

(1) When a drop panel is used in a flat slab to reduce the amount of reinforcement for negative
moment over a column, dimensions of the drop panel shall be in accordance with (2) through (4)
below:

(2) A drop panel shall extend in each direction from the centerline of support a distance not less than
one-sixth of the span length from the center-to-center of supports in that direction.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

(3) A drop panel shall project below the slab not less than one-forth the slab thickness excluding the
projecting portion.

(4) When calculating the amount of slab reinforcement at a drop panel, the thickness of drop panel
projecting below slab shall be assumed not greater than one-forth of the distance from the edge of
drop panel to the face of column or column capital.

10.4 Direct Design Method

10.4.1 Limitations

(1) Slab systems meeting the conditions of (2) through (8) below shall be permitted to be designed by
the direct design method.

(2) There shall be three or more continuous spans in each direction.

(3) Slab panels shall be rectangular, with the longer-to-shorter span ratio not greater than 2.

(4) Two successive spans in each direction, measured from the center-to-center of supports, shall not be
differed by more than one-third of the longer span.

(5) The offset of a column from the centerline of successive columns shall not be more than 10 % of
the span length in that direction.

(6) All loads shall be vertical and uniformly distributed over entire slab panels. The live load shall not
be greater than two times the dead load.

(7) For a slab panel supported by beams on all sides, the stiffness ratio of beams in the two
perpendicular directions shall be in accordance with Eq. (10.4.1).

 
 ≤  ≤  (10.4.1)
 

(8) For slab systems designed by the direct design method, moment redistribution allowed in 3.4.2 shall
not be applied. See 10.4.7 for moment redistribution.

(9) Direct design method shall be permitted to be applied for variations from the conditions of 10.4.1,
if it is verified by analysis that the requirements in 10.3.2 are satisfied.

10.4.2 Total factored static moment

(1) Total factored static moment for a span shall be calculated in a design strip bounded by the
centerlines of slab panels on both sides of the centerline of supports.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

(2) In each direction, the absolute sum of positive and average negative factored moments shall be not
less than the following.

  
   (10.4.2)


(3) In case the transverse spans of slab panels on both sides of the centerline of supports are different,
 in Eq. (10.4.2) shall be taken as the average of the two transverse spans.

(4) For a span adjacent and parallel to an edge,  in Eq. (10.4.2) shall be taken as the distance from
the edge to the panel centerline.

(5) Clear span  is a distance from the face to face of columns, capitals, brackets, or walls.  in Eq.
(10.4.2) shall not be less than  . Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports shall be
considered as a square support with the same area.

10.4.3 Positive and negative factored moments

(1) Negative factored moment shall be determined at the face of a rectangular support. Circular or
regular polygon-shaped supports shall be permitted to be assumed as a square support with the
same area.

(2) In an interior span, the total factored static moment   shall be allocated as follows:
Negative factored moment 0.65
Positive factored moment 0.35

(3) In an end span, the total factored static moment   shall be allocated according to Table 10.4.1.

(4) Slab sections at a support shall be designed by distributing unbalanced moment based on the
stiffnesses of adjoining members, or to resist the larger of the two negative factored moments in
the spans framing into the support.

(5) Edges of slab or edge beams shall be designed to resist torsion caused by negative factored
moments at exterior supports.

(6) The gravity load moment transferred from slab to an edge column according to 10.3.3(2) shall be
taken as   .
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

Table 10.4.1 Portion of positive and negative factored moments in end span

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Slab without beams between
Slab with Slab with Slab with fully
Classification interior supports
unrestrained beams between restrained exterior
Without edge With edge
exterior edge all supports edge
beams beams

Interior negative
factored 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
moment

Positive
factored 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
moment
Exterior
negative
0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
factored
moment

10.4.4 Factored moments in column strips

(1) Column strips shall be designed to resist the portions of interior negative factored moments
specified in Table 10.4.2.

Table 10.4.2 Portion (%) of interior negative factored moment in a column strip

 0.5 1.0 2.0

(   ) 0 75 75 75
(   ) 1.0 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be applied between the above values.

(2) Column strips shall be designed to resist the portions of exterior negative factored moments
specified in Table 10.4.3.
Table 10.4.3 Portion (%) of exterior negative factored moment in a column strip

 0.5 1.0 2.0

 0 100 100 100
(   ) 0
 2.5 75 75 75
 0 100 100 100
(   ) 1.0
 2.5 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be applied between the above values.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

(3) Where three-forth or more of  used to compute   is supported by columns or walls, negative
moments can be assumed to be uniformly distributed across  .

(4) Column strips shall be designed to resist the portions of positive factored moments specified in
Table 10.4.4.
Table 10.4.4 Portion (%) of positive factored moment in a column strip

 0.5 1.0 2.0

(   ) 0 60 60 60
(   ) 1.0 90 75 45
Linear interpolations shall be applied between the above values.

(5) For slabs with beams between supports, the slab portions in column strips shall be designed to
resist the portions of column strip moments not resisted by beams.

10.4.5 Factored moments in beams

(1) If (   ) is equal to or greater than 1.0, beams between supports shall be designed to resist 85
% of column strip moments.

(2) If (   ) is between 1.0 and zero, the portion of column strip moments resisted by beams shall
be determined by linear interpolation between 85 and 0 %.

(3) Beams shall be designed to resist not only moments caused by uniform loads according to
10.4.2(2), 10.4.5(1), and 10.4.5(2), but also moments caused by the weight of beam projections
above or below the slab, and concentrated or distributed loads applied directly to the beams.

10.4.6 Factored moments in middle strips

(1) The portions of positive and negative factored moments not resisted by a column strip shall be
allocated in proportion to half middle strips at both sides of the column strip.

(2) Each middle strip shall be designed to resist the sum of the moments allocated to the two half
middle strips.

(3) A middle strip adjacent and parallel to a wall-supported edge shall be designed to resist twice the
moment allocated to the half middle strip of the first interior supports.

10.4.7 Modification of factored moments

Positive and negative factored moments shall be permitted to be modified by 10 % if the total factored
static moment for a slab panel in the considered direction is not less than that required by Eq. (10.4.2).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

10.4.8 Factored shear in slab systems with beams

(1) Beams with (   ) equal to or greater than 1.0 shall be designed to resist shear due to factored
loads on the tributary areas that are defined by 45-degree lines extending from the corners of slab
panels and the panel centerlines parallel to the long sides.

(2) If (   ) is less than 1.0, the shear resisted by beams shall be permitted to be determined
through linear interpolation assuming that beams support no load when    .

(3) Beams shall be designed to resist not only shears calculated according to 10.4.8(1) and 10.4.8(2),
but also shears caused by factored loads applied directly on the beams.

(4) Shear strength of a slab shall be calculated assuming that load is distributed to beams according to
10.4.8(1) or 10.4.8(2). Also, a slab shall be designed to resist the total shear occurring on the slab
panel.

(5) The shear strength shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 7.

10.4.9 Factored moments in columns and walls

(1) Columns and walls monolithic with a slab system shall be able to resist moments caused by
factored loads applied on the slab system.

(2) Unless overall analysis is conducted, supporting members above and below the slab at an interior
support shall be designed to resist the moment specified by Eq. (10.4.3) in direct proportion to
their stiffnesses.

            ′′  ′  (10.4.3)

where,  ′,  ′, and  ′ are defined for the shorter span.

10.5 Equivalent Frame Method

10.5.1 Assumptions

(1) Design of slab systems by the equivalent frame method shall be based on the assumptions in 10.5.2
through 10.5.6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be designed to resist
moments and shears obtained.

(2) Where metal column capitals are used, their contributions to the stiffness and resistance to moment
and shear shall be permitted to be taken into account.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

(3) Change in length of columns and slabs due to direct stress and the deflection due to shear shall be
permitted to be neglected.

10.5.2 Equivalent frame

(1) An overall structure shall be permitted to be assumed to be composed of equivalent frames

spanning along longitudinal and transverse column lines.

(2) Each frame shall consist of a series of columns or supports, and slab-beam strips bounded by the
centerlines of slab panels on both sides of the centerline of columns or supports.

(3) Columns or supports are assumed to be connected to slab-beams by torsional members (see 10.5.5),
which can be assumed to be perpendicular to the span for which moments are determined and
extended to the centerlines of slab panels bounded by equivalent frame from both sides of columns.

(4) A frame adjacent and parallel to an edge shall be bounded by that edge and the centerline of the
adjacent slab panel.

(5) Each equivalent frame shall be permitted to be analyzed in its entirety. For gravity loads, each
floor or roof shall be permitted to be separately analyzed assuming that far ends of upper and
lower columns are fixed.

(6) Where slab-beams are analyzed separately, moment at a certain support shall be permitted to be
determined assuming that the slab-beam is fixed at any supports two spans apart from that support,
if the slab continues beyond those supports.

10.5.3 Slab-beams

(1) Moment of inertia of slab-beams at any cross section outside of joints or column capitals shall be
calculated using the gross section area of concrete.

(2) Variation in the moment of inertia along the axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account when
the frame is analyzed.

(3) Moment of inertia of a slab-beam from the center of column to the face of column, bracket, or
capital shall be assumed equal to the moment of inertia of the slab-beam at the face of column,
bracket, or capital divided by     , where  and  are measured perpendicular to the span
for which moments are determined.

10.5.4 Columns

(1) Moment of inertia of columns at any cross section outside of joints or column capitals shall be
calculated using the gross section area of concrete.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

(2) Variation in the moment of inertia along the axis of columns shall be taken into account when the
frame is analyzed.

(3) Moment of inertia of columns between the top and bottom of slab-beams at joints shall be assumed
to be infinite.

10.5.5 Torsional members

(1) Torsional members (see 10.5.2(3)) shall be assumed to have the same cross section over the entire
length, and the cross section shall be taken as the largest of , , and .
A portion of slab having a width equal to the dimension of column, bracket, or capital in the
direction of the span for which moments are determined
For monolithic or fully composite structures, the portion of slab defined in plus the transverse
beam above and below the slab
The transverse beam defined in 10.3.1(4)

(2) The stiffness of a torsional member   shall be permitted to be approximately determined by Eq.
(10.5.1).

  
   ∑  (10.5.1)
     

(3) Torsional constant  for a beam with an effective slab width shall be determined by dividing the
section into separate rectangular parts according to Eq. (10.5.2).

 
 ＝ ∑        (10.5.2)
 

where,  represents the shorter dimension of a rectangular part, and  represents the longer
dimension of that part.

(4) Where beams frame into a column in the direction of the span for which moments are determined,
the torsional stiffness shall be multiplied by the ratio of the moment of inertia of the slab with the
beam to that of the slab without beam.

10.5.6 Arrangement of live load

(1) In case the loading pattern of live load is known, the equivalent frame shall be analyzed for that
load condition.

(2) In case the loading pattern of live load is variable but the magnitude is less than or equal to
three-quarters of dead load, or in case live load is essentially applied on all panels at the same
time, it shall be permitted to be assumed that maximum factored moments occur at all sections
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

when the full factored live load is applied on the entire slab system.

(3) For load conditions different from those in 10.5.6(2), it shall be permitted to be assumed that the
maximum positive factored moment near the midspan of a slab panel occurs when three-quarters of
the full factored live load is applied on that panel and on alternate panels. It shall be also permitted
to be assumed that the maximum negative factored moment at a support occurs when three-quarters
of the full factored live load is applied only on the two panels adjacent to that support.

(4) Factored moments at all sections shall be taken greater than or equal to those occurring when the
full factored live load is applied on all slab panels at the same time.

10.5.7 Factored moments

(1) For interior supports, the critical section for negative factored moment (in both column and middle
strips) shall be at the face of a rectangular support, but within a distance not farther than 
from the center of column.

(2) For exterior supports with brackets or column capitals, the critical section for negative factored
moment in the span perpendicular to an edge shall be within one-half of the projection of bracket
or capital from the face of supporting element.

(3) For circular or regular polygon-shaped supports, the critical section for negative factored moment
shall be determined by assuming as a square support with the same area.

(4) When slab systems meeting the limitations of 10.4.1 are analyzed by the equivalent frame method,
it shall be permitted to reduce positive and negative moments in a way that the absolute sum of
positive and average negative moments is not less than the value from Eq. (10.4.2).

(5) Moments at critical sections across the slab-beam strip shall be permitted to be distributed to
column strips, beams, and middle strips according to 10.4.4, 10.4.5, and 10.4.6, if the limitation of
10.4.1(7) is met.

10.6 Reinforcement Details in Two-way Slabs

10.6.1 Amount and spacing of reinforcement

(1) Area of reinforcement in each direction for two-way slab systems shall be determined by flexural
moments at critical sections, and shall not be less than the minimum reinforcement required by 5.7.

(2) Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not be greater than two times the slab thickness
as well as 300 mm, except for slab portions of waffle or ribbed systems. Slab reinforcement over
waffle systems shall be in accordance with the requirements of 5.7.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

10.6.2 Anchorage of reinforcement

(1) Positive moment reinforcement normal to a discontinuous edge shall be extended to the edge of
slab, and be embedded with straight ends or hooks, at least 150 mm in edge beams, columns, or
walls.

(2) Negative moment reinforcement normal to a discontinuous edge shall be developed at the face of
support with bents, hooks, or other methods in edge beams, columns, or walls, according to
Chapter 8.

(3) For a slab not supported by an edge beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or for a slab
cantilevering beyond the support, slab reinforcement shall be permitted to be anchored within the
slab.

10.6.3 Reinforcement at exterior corners

(1) Where exterior corners of slabs are supported by edge beams having a value of α greater than 1.0,
the top and bottom of slab at exterior corners shall be reinforced in accordance with (2) through
(4) below.

(2) Special reinforcement at the top and bottom of slab shall be provided enough to resist a moment
equal to the maximum positive moment per unit width of the slab.

(3) The moment shall be permitted to be assumed to be applied to an axis normal to the diagonal
drawn from the corner at the top of slab, and about an axis parallel to the diagonal from the
corner at the bottom of slab.

(4) Special reinforcement shall be extended to a distance equal to one-fifth of the longer span from the
corner in each direction.

(5) Special reinforcement shall be arranged parallel to the diagonal at the top of slab, and normal to
the diagonal at the bottom of slab. Alternatively, special reinforcement shall be permitted to be
arranged in two layers parallel to each side of slab at both the top and bottom of slab.

10.6.4 Reinforcement details in slabs without beams

(1) Reinforcement in slabs without beams shall meet the minimum extension requirements specified in
Fig. 10.6.1, along with all the requirements of 10.6.

(2) Where adjacent span lengths are unequal, the minimum extension of negative moment reinforcement
from the face of support shall be as specified in Fig. 10.6.1, based on the longer span length.

(3) In two-way slabs, bent bars shall be used only when bent angles can be 45 degree or less for the
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

given slab depth-to-span ratio.

(4) In two-way slabs resisting lateral loads, the length of reinforcement shall be determined by
structural analysis, but shall not be less than those specified in Fig. 10.6.1.

(5) All bottom bars or wires within the column strip in each direction shall be continuous or spliced
with a Class A splice as shown in Fig. 10.6.1. In each direction, at least two of the column strip
bottom bars or wires shall pass over the column, and shall be anchored at exterior supports.

(6) In slabs with shear heads and in lift-slab construction, at least two bonded bottom bars or wires in
each direction shall pass through the shear head or lifting collar as close to the column as
possible, and shall be continuous or spliced with a Class A splice. At exterior columns, the
reinforcement shall be anchored in the shear head or lifting collar.



   

   

mm

   

mm
mm   mm

  
 
mm



CL CL CL

Figure 10.6.1 Minimum extension lengths of reinforcement in slabs without no beams (Refer 8.5.2(1) for reinforcement
anchorage at supports)

10.7 Openings in Slab Systems

(1) Openings of any size can be placed in slab systems if it is confirmed by structural analysis that
the design strength is greater than or equal to the required strength, and all serviceability conditions
including deflection limits are satisfied.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 10 Slab Systems

(2) Without analysis required in 10.7(1), openings can be placed in slab systems without beams in
accordance with through below:
Openings of any size can be placed in the area common to intersecting middle strips, if the total
amount of reinforcement required without the opening is provided.
In the area common to intersecting column strips, openings shall not interrupt more than or equal
to one-eighth the width of column strip in either span. The amount of reinforcement interfered by
an opening shall be additionally supplied on the sides of the opening.
In the area common to intersecting column and middle strips, openings shall not interfere more
than one-quarter of the reinforcement in either strip. The amount of reinforcement interfered by an
opening shall be additionally supplied on the sides of the opening.
Provisions for shear in 7.12.6 shall be satisfied.

(3) For openings relatively small compared with the slab panels, an amount of reinforcement equal to
that interfered by an opening shall be additionally supplied on the sides of the opening.

(4) For openings relatively large compared with the slab panels, the opening boundaries can be
considered as discontinuous edges of cantilever slabs, and the effect of openings shall be taken into
account in the design of adjacent slabs.

(5) Slabs with large openings that are located close to one side can be considered to be continuous at
three sides and free at one side, and the effect of openings shall be taken into account in the
design of adjacent slabs.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 11 Walls

Chapter 11 Walls

11.1 General

11.1.1 Scope

(1) Provisions of this chapter shall be applied to design of walls subjected to axial force regardless of
flexural moment.

(2) Design of cantilever retaining walls shall be in accordance with Chapter 13.

11.1.2 Notations

 : Gross area of concrete section, mm

 : Area of nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement, mm

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis, mm

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement,

mm

 : Eccentricity, mm

 : Modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

 : Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

 : Height of member, mm

 : Moment of inertia of cracked section, mm4

 : Effective length factor for compression members

 : Vertical height between supports, mm

 : Length of entire wall, or length of wall segment, mm

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 11 Walls

 : Maximum moment in member used to compute the deflection

  : Moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied loads, or cracking
moment

11.2 General Design

(1) Walls are defined as the members which are subjected to the factored axial loads not greater than
0.4  and the sectional area of longitudinal reinforcements is not greater than 0.01 times sectional
area. Otherwise, the members shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Chapters 5
and 6.

(2) Walls shall be designed to safely resist applied eccentric axial load, lateral load and other loads.

(3) Design of walls subjected to axial loads shall be in accordance with 11.2, 11.3, and either 11.4.1,
11.4.2, or 11.4

(4) Unless detailed structural analysis is performed, the effective horizontal length of wall for each
concentrated load shall not be greater than the smaller of center-to-center distance between loads
and the load bearing width added by 4 times the thickness of wall.

(5) Design for shear shall be in accordance with provisions of 7.10

(6) Design of compression members combined with walls shall be in accordance with provisions of
6.4.1(4).

(7) Reinforcements in walls shall be anchored to intersecting structural members such as slabs, roofs,
columns, pilasters, buttresses, intersecting walls, and footings.

(8) Amount of reinforcement and limit on wall thickness shall be in accordance with 11.3 and
11.4.2(3), respectively. However, this provision need not be applied if sufficient safety and
structural stability are confirmed by detailed structural analysis

(9) Transfer of force from base of wall to footing shall be in accordance with provisions of 12.4.

11.3 Minimum Reinforcement Ratio

(1) Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement ratio in walls shall be in accordance with provisions
of 11.3(2) and 11.3(3). However, shear reinforcement required by provisions of 7.10.2(5) and 7.10.3
shall be applied if the shear reinforcement is greater than that by provisions of 11.3(2) and 11.3(3).

(2) Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement to gross sectional area of wall shall be as follows.
For deformed bars not larger than D16 with specified yield strength not less than 400 MPa
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 11 Walls

0.0012
For other deformed bars 0.0015
For welded wire reinforcements with diameter not larger than 16mm 0.0012

(3) Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross sectional area of wall shall be as follows.
For deformed bars not larger than D16 with specified yield strength not less than 400 MPa
0.0020
For other deformed bars 0.0025
For welded wire reinforcements with diameter not larger than 16 mm 0.0020

(4) For walls with thickness not less than 250 mm, vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall be placed
on both sides in parallel with faces of wall. However, this provision need not be applied to
basement walls.
Reinforcement on exterior surface of wall shall be not less than 1/2 and not greater than 2/3 of
total required reinforcement for each direction, and shall be placed not less than 50mm and not
greater than 1/3 of wall thickness from the exterior face.
Remaining required reinforcement shall be placed not less than 20 mm and not greater than 1/3 of
wall thickness from the interior face for reinforcement on interior surface of wall.

(5) Spacing of vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be greater than 3 times wall thickness nor greater
than 450 mm.

(6) Transverse tie reinforcement according to provision of 5.5.2 shall be placed if vertical reinforcement
ratio at part of wall with closely placed vertical reinforcement is not less than 0.01. Otherwise,
transverse tie reinforcement need not be placed. Vertical spacing of tie reinforcement shall be not
greater than wall thickness, and vertical tie reinforcement need not be placed unless vertical
reinforcement is subjected to compression.

(7) In addition to the minimum reinforcement specified in 11.3(1), two bars not less than D16 for
doubly reinforced walls and one bar not less than D16 for singly reinforced walls in vertical and
horizontal directions shall be placed around openings such as windows or entrance. These
reinforcements shall be anchored to develop specified yield strength at the corners of the openings.

11.4 Design of Walls

11.4.1 Design of walls as compression members

Design of walls subject to axial forces or combined axial force and flexural moment shall be in
accordance with 6.2, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7.1, 6.8, 11.2 and 11.3. However, practical design method specified in
11.4.2 shall be permitted if corresponding conditions are met.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 11 Walls

11.4.2 Practical design method

(1) Walls of rectangular cross section shall be permitted to be designed by practical design method
specified in 11.4.2. if all conditions in 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4.2 are satisfied and the resultant of the
factored loads is applied within 1/3 of the middle of the wall thickness.

(2) Design axial strength   of a wall shall be computed by Eq. (11.4.1) when the provisions of
11.4.2(1) are satisfied. However, this provision shall not be applied when the provisions of 11.4.1
are applied.

  
  
   ＝       －  
  
(11.4.1)

where =0.65 and effective length factor  shall be as follows.

For walls laterally restrained at top and bottom ends,

(a) Restrained against rotation at one or both ends 0.8
(b) Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0
For walls not laterally restrained 2.0

(3) Minimum thickness of walls shall satisfy following provisions of and .

Thickness of walls shall not be less than 1/25 of the smaller of vertical and horizontal lengths
between supporting points, nor less than 100mm.
Thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation walls shall not be less than 200 mm.

11.4.3 Alternative design method for slender walls

(1) When flexural tension governs the design of a wall in out-of-plane direction, 6.5.1 shall be
considered satisfactory if provisions of this clause are satisfied.

(2) Walls designed by 11.4.3 shall satisfy provisions of 11.4.3.(2).

Wall panel shall be designed as compression members which are simply supported and subjected
to out-of-plane uniform lateral load that develops maximum moments and deflections at the
middle of the wall.
Sectional area over the height shall be constant
Wall shall be designed as tension-controlling behavior.
Reinforcements shall be computed to provide design flexural strength as Eq. (11.4.2).

  ≥   (11.4.2)
Concentrated vertical loads applied to the wall above the design flexural section shall be assumed
to be distributed over the width as follows.
(a) Equal to the bearing width plus the width extended from both bearing surfaces in the ratio of 2
vertical to 1 horizontal.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 11 Walls

(b) Not greater than the spacing of the concentrated load.

(c) Not extending beyond the edges of the wall panel.
Vertical stress      shall not exceed   at the middle of wall height.

(3) Design flexural strength   at the middle of the height of wall subject to axial force and
flexural moment shall satisfy the condition of Eq. (11.4.3).

  ≥   (11.4.3)

where   is given by following equation.

          (11.4.4)

where,   is the maximum factored flexural moment at the middle of the height of wall due to
factored lateral and eccentric vertical loads, not including    effects, and   is evaluated by
Eq. (11.4.5).

  
  
 
(11.4.5)

  shall be permitted to be obtained by iteration for deflections, or by Eq. (11.4.6).

 
   (11.4.6)
  
 
 

where  is given by Eq. (11.4.7).

  

  

            
    
(11.4.7)

In Eq. (11.4.7),     shall not be less than 6.

(4) Maximum out-of-plane deflection,   , due to service loads, including    effects, shall not
exceed , and   shall be calculated by Eq. (11.4.8) if maximum moment at the middle of
the height of wall   , due to service lateral and eccentric vertical loads, including    effects,
exceeds   .

    
         (11.4.8)
     
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 11 Walls

where if   does not exceed   ,   shall be calculated by Eq. (11.4.9).


 
     
 
(11.4.9)

  and   in Eq. (11.4.8) and Eq. (11.4.9) are given by Eqs. (11.4.10) and (11.4.11),
respectively.

  
   (11.4.10)
  

  
   (11.4.11)
  

where  shall be calculated by Eq. (11.4.7), and   shall be computed by iteration for
out-of-plane deflections.

11.5 Nonbearing Walls and Grade Beams

(1) Thickness of nonbearing walls shall not be less than 100 mm, nor less than 1/30 of the least
distance between members laterally supporting the wall.

(2) Reinforcement required for the flexural moment computed by 6.2 and 6.3 shall be placed at top
and bottom of the walls designed as grade beams. Design for shear reinforcement shall be in
accordance with provisions of Chapter 7.

(3) Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade shall satisfy provisions of 11.3.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 12 Footings

Chapter 12 Footings

12.1 General

12.1.1 Scope

(1) In principle, provisions of this chapter shall apply for design of isolated footings and shall be
permitted to be applied for design of wall footings, combined footings, and mats.

(2) Design of wall footings, combined footings, and mats shall be in accordance with additional
provisions in 12.5.2.

12.1.2 Notations

  : Diameter of pile at footing base

 : Ratio of long to short sides of a footing

12.2 General Design

(1) Footings shall be designed to resist the factored loads and reactions induced by the loads, in
accordance with the provisions in this chapter.

(2) Base area of footing, and number and arrangement of piles shall be determined from forces and
moments transmitted by footing to soil or piles and allowable soil pressure or pile capacity
determined through principles of soil mechanics. Service loads not multiplied by load factor shall
be applied to forces and moments.

(3) For design of footings on piles, moment and shear shall be permitted to be calculated on the
assumption that the reaction from any pile is concentrated at pile center.

(4) For location of critical sections for moment, shear, and development of reinforcement in footings, it
shall be permitted to treat circular or regular polygon-shaped concrete columns or pedestals as
square members with the same area.

(5) Depth from top of footing to bottom reinforcement shall not be less than 150 mm for footings on
soil, nor less than 300 mm for footings on piles.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 12 Footings

12.3 Footing Design

12.3.1 Design on moment

(1) Moment on any section of a footing shall be determined by passing a vertical plane through the
footing, and computing the moment of the forces acting over entire area of footing on one side of
the vertical plane.

(2) Maximum factored moment for a footing shall be computed at critical sections located as follows:
At face of column, pedestal, or wall, for footings supporting a concrete column, pedestal, or wall.
Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings supporting a masonry wall.
Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base plate, for footings supporting a column
with steel base plate.

(3) Reinforcement shall be placed uniformly across entire width of footing in one-way footings or
two-way square footings.

(4) In two-way rectangular footings, reinforcement in each direction shall be placed in accordance with
provisions as follows:
Reinforcement in long direction shall be placed uniformly across entire width of footing.
For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement by Eq. (12.3.1) shall be
placed uniformly over a effective width and remainder of reinforcement shall be placed uniformly
over other region except effective width.

rein forcement placed within ef fective width 

 (12.3.1)
total rein forcment in short direction 

where effective width is aligned to the centerline of column or pedestal and equal to the short
side of footing.

12.3.2 Design on shear

(1) Shear strength of footings supported on soil or rock shall be in accordance with provisions in 7.12
for slabs and footings.

(2) Critical section for shear of footings supporting a column, pedestal, or wall shall be determined
from location defined in 12.3.1(2) . For footings supporting a column or pedestal with steel base
plates, the critical section shall be determined from location defined in 12.3.1(2) .

(3) Where the distance between the center of any pile to the center of column is more than two times the
distance between the top of the pile and the top of the footing, the footing shall satisfy 7.12 and
12.3.2(4). Other footings shall satisfy either Appendix I, or both 7.12 and 12.3.2(4). If Appendix I is
applied, the effective concrete compression strength of the struts,   , shall be determined by I.3.2.(2) .
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 12 Footings

(4) Shear on any section through a footing supported on piles shall be computed by provisions as
follows.
Entire reaction from any pile with its center located   /2 or more outside the section shall
develop shear on that section.
Reaction from any pile with its center located   /2 or more inside the section shall not develop
shear on that section.
For pile center positioned between and , the portion of the pile reaction to develop shear on
the section shall be calculated by straight-line interpolation between full value at   /2 outside
the section and zero value at   /2 inside the section.

12.3.3 Development of reinforcement in footings

(1) Development of reinforcement in footings shall be in accordance with provisions in Chapter 8.

(2) Reinforcement shall be developed by embedment length, standard hook or mechanical device, or a
combination of these to produce tension or compression of reinforcement on both sides calculated
on each section.

(3) Critical sections for development of reinforcement shall be assumed at the same locations as defined
in 12.3.1(2) for maximum factored moment, and at all other vertical planes where section or
reinforcement changes. Provisions of 8.5.1(5) shall also be followed.

12.4 Transfer of Force at Base of Column, Wall, or Pedestal

12.4.1 Transfer devices of force

(1) Forces and moments at base of column or wall shall be transferred to footing by bearing of
concrete and by reinforcement, dowels, and mechanical connectors.

(2) Bearing stress on concrete at contact surface between supporting member and supported member
shall not exceed concrete bearing strength given in 6.8.

(3) Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors between supporting member and supported member
shall sufficiently transfer force as given and . In addition, reinforcement, dowels, or
mechanical connectors shall follow provision of 12.4.2 or 12.4.3.
All compressive force that exceeds bearing strength of concrete in either member
Tensile force between interface

(4) Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors shall be designed in accordance with provisions of
8.8 if flexural moments are transferred from wall or column to pedestal or footing.

(5) Lateral forces shall be transferred to pedestal or footing in accordance with shear-friction provisions
of 7.6, or by other appropriate methods.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 12 Footings

12.4.2 Transfer of force in cast-in-place construction

(1) Longitudinal reinforcement shall be extended or connected by dowels into supporting pedestal or
footing as a reinforcing method satisfying 12.4.1 in cast-in-place concrete construction.

(2) In case of cast-in-place concrete columns and pedestals, cross-sectional area of reinforcement
between interface shall not be less than 0.005 times the sectional area of the supported member.

(3) In case of cast-in-place concrete walls, cross-sectional area of reinforcement between interface shall
not be less than minimum vertical reinforcement specified in 11.3(2).

(4) Longitudinal reinforcement of D41 and D51 shall be permitted to be lap spliced to satisfy the
required transfer of force in 12.4.1 in case of footings subjected to compression only. Dowels shall
not be larger than D35, and shall extend into supported member a distance not less than the larger
of development length of D41 or D51 and the compression lap splice length of the dowels, and
extend into the footing a distance not less than development length of the dowels.

(5) If a pinned or rocker connection is used in cast-in-place concrete construction, it shall conform to
12.4.1 and 12.4.3.

12.4.3 Transfer of force in precast concrete construction

(1) In precast concrete construction, anchor bolts or suitable mechanical connectors in accordance with
following (2) to (4) shall be permitted to be used as a reinforcing method satisfying 12.4.1. Anchor
bolts shall be designed in accordance with Appendix II.

(2) Connection between precast concrete columns or pedestals and supporting members shall satisfy the
requirements of 16.3.1(4) .

(3) Connection between precast concrete walls and supporting members shall satisfy the requirements of
16.3.1(4) and .

(4) Anchor bolts and mechanical connections shall be designed to reach their design strength before
failure of anchoring devices or surrounding concrete. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance
with Appendix II.

12.5 Special Footings

12.5.1 Sloped or stepped footings

(1) In sloped or stepped footings, angle of slope, and depth and location of steps shall satisfy design
requirements at every section. Provisions of 8.5.1(5) shall also be followed in this case.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 12 Footings

(2) Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall be constructed to act as a unit.

12.5.2 Wall footings, combined footings and mats

(1) Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal, or wall shall be designed to resist the factored
loads and induced reactions, in accordance with relevant design requirements of this Code.

(2) The direct design method for slabs specified in 10.4 shall not be used for design of wall footing,
combined footings, and mats.

(3) Distribution of soil pressure under wall footings, combined footings, and mats shall be determined
in accordance with properties of the soil and structure and with principles of soil mechanics.

(4) Minimum reinforcing steel in each principal direction for nonprestressed mat foundations shall be in
accordance with the provisions of 5.7.2. Maximum spacing of bars shall not be greater than 450
mm.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 13 Retaining Walls

Chapter 13 Retaining Walls

13.1 General

13.1.1 Scope

(1) Retaining walls shall be designed in accordance with design provisions of this chapter.

(2) Shore protections and sea walls having similar behavior with retaining walls, abutments of bridges,
which shall support soil filling, and foundation walls shall be permitted to be designed in
accordance with design provisions of this chapter.

(3) Design provisions of this chapter shall be permitted to be applied for the load combinations of all
applicable loads (self-weight, earth pressure, water pressure, overburden pressure, etc.), except for
the effect of earthquake load.

13.1.2 Notations

 : Allowable bearing capacity of soil

m ax : Maximum subgrade reaction

 : Ultimate bearing capacity of soil

13.2 General Design

13.2.1 Design Principles

(1) Retaining walls shall be designed to resist overburden pressure, soil weight of backfill, self-weight,
earth pressure, and water pressure if necessary.

(2) Plain concrete retaining walls shall be designed as a gravity type, which exerts the resisting force
by self-weight.

(3) Earth pressure shall be calculated based on the principles of soil mechanics. The necessary soil
characteristic coefficients shall be determined by measurements.

(4) Base plates shall be designed in accordance with provisions of Chapter 12.

13.2.2 Stability requirements

(1) Resisting force against sliding shall not be less than 1.5 times the horizontal force acting on retaining walls.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 13 Retaining Walls

(2) For the case that whereas stability requirements for overturning and bearing capacity of soil are
satisfied, those requirements are not satisfied for sliding, resisting force against sliding can be
increased by installing shear keys or lateral anchors.

(3) Resisting moment against overturning shall not be less than 2.0 times the overturning moment
induced by lateral earth pressure.

(4) Maximum subgrade reaction occurring in soil shall not exceed the allowable bearing capacity of
soil.

(5) Stability check on the settlement of ground shall be permitted to be examined by either 13.2.2(5)
or 13.2.2(5) .
When the distributed gradient of subgrade reaction is relatively low, the maximum subgrade
reaction m ax shall not exceed the allowable bearing capacity of soil  .
Bearing capacity of soil shall be permitted to be calculated by selecting one of geotechnical
methods and the ultimate bearing capacity shall be permitted to be estimated from the angle of
internal friction of soil, cohesion, etc. In this case, the allowable bearing capacity  shall be
 .

13.3 Structural Analysis

13.3.1 Base plate

(1) Heel portion of base plates shall be designed to support all loads acting above it, unless a more
accurate analysis method is used.

(2) The base plate of the cantilever retaining wall can be designed as a cantilever which is regarded as
a fixed end at the junction with the front wall.

(3) Base plates of counterfort retaining walls shall be permitted to be designed as fixed beams or
continuous beams assuming the distance between counterfort as a span, unless an accurate analysis
is used.

13.3.2 Front Walls

(1) Front walls of cantilever retaining walls shall be permitted to be designed as cantilevers supported
by base plate.

(2) Front walls of counterfort retaining walls shall be permitted to be designed as two-way slabs supported on
three sides.

(3) Thickness of front walls shall be determined in accordance with the minimum thickness provisions
of bearing walls specified in 11.4.2(3).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 13 Retaining Walls

(4) Since the lower parts of the front walls act as walls or cantilevers, reinforcements in the vertical
direction shall be placed in accordance with provisions of 5.7.2, 7.9.3, and 11.3.

13.3.3 Counterfort and Buttresses

Counterfort and buttresses shall be designed as T beams and rectangular beams, respectively.

13.4 Structural Details

(1) For counterfort retaining walls, the required reinforcement shall be anchored to counterfort walls in
accordance with provisions of 8.2, to be capable of resisting the stresses transferred from the front
walls and base plates to the wall.

(2) If shear keys are provided at the bottom surface of base plates to effectively resist sliding, the
shear keys and base plates shall be built monolithically.

(3) When designing the retaining walls, expansion joints shall be permitted to be installed unless a
separate analyses for the volume change by hydration heat of concrete, temperature variations,
drying shrinkage, etc. are performed. However, for the case that such analyses are carried out
considering the volume changes, horizontal reinforcement shall be permitted to be continuously
placed without expansion joints.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 14 Arches

Chapter 14 Arches

14.1 General

14.1.1 Scope

Arches shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of this chapter. Design of members
subjected to flexure and axial load or pure axial compressive load shall also conform to the provisions
of corresponding chapters.

14.1.2 Notations

 : Slenderness ratio

14.2 General Design

(1) Axis of an arch shall coincide with the thrust line of compression force by dead load or the thrust
line for the loading condition subjected to dead load plus one half of uniformly distributed live
load. Otherwise, the stability shall be confirmed through structural analysis.

(2) Since the axis of an arch is curved for a long-span arch, the stability for flexural buckling or
flexural and torsional buckling shall be confirmed.

(3) Section shape of an arch rib shall be determined considering the height to-span ratio, axis of the
arch, strength of materials, construction method, etc.

(4) Foundation of an arch rib shall be placed on the solid ground to sufficiently resist a reaction force
generated in the arch rib end. If the foundation ground is weak, the ground shall be improved to
be hard or separate measures to resist the reaction force shall be established.

14.3 Structural Analysis

14.3.1 General

(1) Axis of an arch shall be permitted to be considered as a line connecting the centroid of the arch
rib section.

(2) When calculating the sectional forces, the effect of shrinkage of concrete and temperature change shall
be considered.

(3) When calculating the statically indeterminate forces, the cross-sectional variation of an arch rib shall
be considered.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 14 Arches

(4) When foundation settlement is expected, its effect shall be considered.

(5) Although sectional forces in an arch rib are influenced by the movement of the axis of the arch, in
general the effect is insignificant and ignorable. Therefore, it shall be permitted to calculate the
sectional forces based on the small deformation theory.

(6) When the slenderness ratio of an arch rib determined by Eq. (14.3.1) is greater than 35, sectional
forces shall be calculated considering the effect of the movement of the axis by finite deformation
theory, etc.


     cos 
 
(14.3.1)

where,
 : Slenderness ratio

 : Transformed member length,   (mm)

  : Cross-sectional area of an arch rib at  of span (mm )

  : Inclined angle of the axis of an arch at  of span

 : Average moment of inertia of an arch rib (mm )

 : Factor determined from Table 14.3.1

 : Span considering a degree of fixity of the foundation (mm)

· arch span for 2 hinge or 3 hinge arches

· arch span 2×lowermost arch rib depth× cos for fixed arches ( is the inclined angle of the axis
of an arch at the supporting part)

Table 14.3.1 Factor 

 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
fixed 0.360 0.375 0.396 0.422 0.453 0.495 0.544 0.596 0.648
1hinge 0.484 0.498 0.514 0.536 0.562 0.591 0.623 0.662 0.706
2hinges 0.524 0.553 0.594 0.647 0.711 0.781 0.855 0.915 1.059
3hinges 0.591 0.610 0.635 0.670 0.711 0.781 0.855 0.956 1.059
where,  : ratio of height(  ) to span(  ) of an arch
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 14 Arches

14.3.2 Check of buckling

(1) When designing an arch rib, stability for in-plane and out-of-plane buckling as well as stress shall
be confirmed in accordance with the followings.
If  20, the buckling check needs not be checked.
If 20  70, the stability shall be checked for the factored flexural moment of the
cross-section in addition to the flexural moment caused by substituting the effect of finite
deformation with the effect of eccentric loads.
If 70  200, the stability shall be checked considering the effect of material nonlinearity of
reinforced concrete members as well as the effect of finite deformation.
If   , it is not suitable for arch structures.

(2) For out-of-plane buckling of arches, it shall be permitted to assume that the arch rib is a straight
column and the column is subjected to axial force equal to the horizontal reaction force developed
the end of the arch rib. In this case, the column length shall be assumed to be equal to the arch
span in principle.

14.4 Structural Details

(1) For reinforced concrete arches, longitudinal reinforcement shall be placed as symmetrically as
possible along the top and bottom faces of the arch. The reinforcement shall not be less than 600
mm2 per meter of arch rib width, and the sum of top and bottom reinforcements shall not be less
than 0.15% of the concrete section.

(2) Transverse reinforcement perpendicular to longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided at the top
and bottom faces of an arch rib. The transverse reinforcement shall not be less than D13 and 1/3
of the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement, and its spacing shall not exceed the smallest of 15
times the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement, 300 mm, and the smallest sectional dimension of
the arch rib section.

(3) For closed web arches, expansion joints shall be installed at proper locations of springings and side
walls.

(4) For arch ribs with a box section, diaphragms shall be installed at locations where vertical members
are attached.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 15 Rahmens

Chapter 15 Rahmens

15.1 General

15.1.1 Scope

Provision of this chapter shall apply to joints at which structures such as columns, beams, slabs, walls,
and etc are rigidly connected.

15.1.2 Notations

 : Tensile stress of concrete induced by factored loads at joints, MPa

15.2 General Design

15.2.1 General

(1) Axis of rahmen shall be a centroid axis of member cross section. In case of a member that the
size of haunch is large or the cross section varies, however, the axis shall be taken to be changed
with variations of cross section.

(2) When the cross section size of beams or columns are relatively large in comparison with a span, the
members shall be analyzed as rahmen structures considering all flexural and shear deformation of the
members.

(3) When the influence of haunches is considered in the design of rahmen, a member having haunches
shall be analyzed either as a tapered member or considering the haunch stiffness of the member
joints. When the haunch stiffness is considered, the rahmen shall be designed with the consideration
of rigid zones obtained by the following methods.
① When ends of member with identical cross section are connected to other members, the rigid zone
shall be ranged from inside line of the 1/4 member thickness at the member ends to joint.
② When a member has an inclined haunch of not less than 25° relative to the axis, the rigid zone
shall be ranged from inside line of 1.5 times the member thickness at the starting point of haunch
to joint. However, when the haunch slope is not less than 60°, the zone shall be ranged from
inside line of the 1/4 member thickness at the starting point of haunch to joint.
③ When the points defined in accordance with the above guidelines ① and ② are two or more at the
same time due to reasons such as different sizes of haunches located at both sides of a member,
the range of rigid zone shall be defined as the greater .

(4) When the influence of creep and shrinkage is of significance, the influence shall be considered.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 15 Rahmens

(5) The effects of construction sequences shall be considered if a general construction method is not
applied.

15.2.2 Calculation of sectional forces at the surface of bearing seats

(1) For the case that the influence of haunches is considered, flexural moment to determine the cross
section of member ends can be a moment at the face of column for beams and at top and bottom
surfaces of beam for columns.

(2) When the structural analyses ignoring the influence of haunches are performed, the values obtained after moving
the joint flexural moment to column inside or ends of beam can be used.

(3) Shear force used for a cross section check of member ends shall be a force at top and bottom
surfaces of beam for columns and at the face with a distance of 1/2 of column face depth from
column face for beams.

15.2.3 Design of rahmen joints

(1) Since stress transfer is complex at joints of rahmen members due to sudden change in stress
direction caused by cross sectional force, the jointed members shall be designed to securely transfer
the cross sectional force to each other.

(2) When stress is checked, effective portion of haunch can be considered as 1/3 of haunch height at a
haunch installed in jointed members

(3) When the cross section of a column is a circular, the cross section at which stresses of beams or
slabs are checked can be assumed as the location with an inner distance of 0.1 times the column
diameter from the column face.

(4) Joints shall be designed by following methods. Regardless of the analysis method, they shall be
designed in accordance with provisions of 15.2.3(1), 15.3(2) and (3).
Analysis by strut-and-tie model
Nonlinear finite element analysis

(5) Design of joints by strut-and-tie model shall be in accordance with the following:
  ,    For the case that factored tensile stress   occurring at a cross section in
diagonal direction exceeds 
   when negative moment acts on the outermost joint,
reinforcement shall be placed.
When positive moment acts on the joint, tensile stress occurs at a cross section in diagonal
direction and perpendicular to diagonal direction at joints. Therefore, reinforcements shall be
placed in diagonal direction.

(6) For the case that stress of joints is checked by finite element analysis, analytical model considering
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 15 Rahmens

the influence of stress concentration reasonably shall be used.

15.3 Structural Details

(1) For rahmen joints that the cross section of columns and beams changes, haunch shall be provided
or chamfer shall be enlarged for smooth stress transfer. This shall also be included in the design
drawings.

(2) Longitudinal reinforcements at rahmen joints shall be distributed to securely transfer the sectional
forces in consideration of the arrangement of the reinforcements.

(3) For the outermost joint of structures, more than one half of longitudinal reinforcements of members
connecting at the joint shall be placed in contact with the outside.

(4) In the middle of joints, column longitudinal reinforcements at corners shall be extended not less
than development length passing through the smaller of one half the depth of beam and slab
members or one half the effective depth of column.

(5) In the corner side of joints, additional horizontal reinforcements shall be placed to prevent deformation
of shores during construction or cracks occurring in vertical direction due to the influence of reactions
in column vertical direction.

(6) Additional reinforcements shall be placed continuously at inclined surfaces in haunch. Reinforcements shall
also be placed in haunch even when reinforcements are not required by calculation.

(7) Reinforcements shall be placed at the joint corner of rahmen considering construction joints of
concrete.

(8) Splices of longitudinal reinforcements shall be avoided at or in the vicinity of member joints.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

16.1 General

16.1.1 Scope

(1) Provisions of this chapter shall apply to the design of precast concrete members.

(2) Precast concrete buildings shall be permitted to be designed in accordance with Design
Specification for Precast Concrete Assembly Building Construction .

(3) Design of precast concrete bridge may follow Korea Bridge Design Specifications.

16.1.2 Notations

 : Gross area of concrete column, mm

 : Span length of member, mm

 : Clear span length of member, mm

16.1.3 References

Design Specification for Precast Concrete Assembly Building Construction

Korea Bridge Design Specifications.

16.2 General Design

16.2.1 Design Principles

(1) Design of precast concrete members shall consider all kinds of loads, impacts, and restraints from
initial fabrication to complete construction of the structure, including form removal, storage,
conveyance, and assembly.

(2) Precast concrete members shall be designed considering the sectional forces and deformations
occurring in connections and in the vicinity of the connections, in order to act as one structural
system incorporated with adjacent members.

(3) Initial and long-term deflections shall be considered in design including their effects on
inter-connected structural members.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

(4) Tolerances for precast concrete members, inter-connected members, and connections shall be
specified, and the effect of the tolerances shall be considered in the design of precast concrete
members and connections.

(5) Design of connections and bearings shall consider all kinds of load effects that are transferred into
members including shrinkage, creep, temperature, elastic deformation, differential settlement, wind
load, earthquake load.

(6) Tolerances for fabrication and assembly that are used in design shall be described in the related
documents, and the stress effect due to temporary assembly shall be considered in design of
members.

(7) Design strength of precast concrete members and structures shall not be less than the required
strength for design load combinations.

(8) When precast concrete wall panels are designed to be horizontal connection members of columns or
isolated footings, influences for deep beam action, lateral buckling, and deflection shall be considered in
design.

(9) Specified compressive strength of precast concrete members shall not be less than 21 MPa.

16.2.2 Transfer and Distribution of Forces in Connections

(1) Distribution of forces that are perpendicular to the plane of members shall be calculated by analysis
or test.

(2) In order to transfer in-plane forces between connections of precast concrete members, the followings
shall be satisfied.
Transfer path of in-plane force shall be continuous through both connections and members.
Where tension forces occur, steel or reinforcement shall be continuously provided.

16.3 Structures Using Precast Concrete Wall Panels

16.3.1 Structural Integrity

(1) Minimum requirements for structural integrity specified in (2) through (7) shall apply to precast
concrete wall panel structures except as provided in 16.3.2.

(2) In order to effectively integrate members together, tension ties shall be provided in the transverse,
longitudinal, and vertical directions and around the perimeter of the structure. Particularly,
longitudinal and transverse ties shall be provided to connect members to the lateral-force-resisting
structure.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

(3) Where precast concrete members are floor or roof diaphragms, nominal tensile strength of the
connections between the diaphragm and lateral-force-resisting structure shall not be less than 4,400
N/m.

(4) Requirements of 5.8.2 for vertical tension ties shall apply to all vertical structural members, except
nonbearing walls. The vertical tension ties shall be connected at horizontal joints in accordance
with through .
Nominal tensile strength of precast concrete columns shall not be less than 1.5   (unit is in N).
For columns with a larger cross-section than the required by loading, the minimum reinforcement
and design strength shall be permitted to be determined by using the reduced effective cross
sectional area. The reduced effective cross-sectional area shall not be less than one half of the
total area.
Precast concrete wall panels shall be connected by at least two ties per panel, and tensile strength
of each tie shall not be less than 45,000 N.
When analysis results confirm that the base of the foundation is not subjected to tension, the ties
required by shall be permitted to be anchored into the concrete slab-on-ground.

(5) Connection details that resist forces only by the friction caused by vertical load shall not be
permitted.

(6) Location of unified connections shall be determined so as to minimize the potential for cracking.

(7) Connections for structural integrity shall be designed so that reinforcement yields prior to concrete
failure.

16.3.2 Bearing wall structures with three or more stories

(1) For precast concrete bearing wall structures with three or more stories, the following minimum
requirements of (2) through (6) shall be satisfied.

(2) Longitudinal and transverse ties shall be designed to have nominal strength of 22,000 N/m in floors
and roofs. Ties shall be provided at interior wall supports and between members and exterior walls.
Ties shall be located within 600 mm from the plane of the floor slab and roof structures.

(3) Longitudinal ties shall be parallel to floor slabs or roof slabs, and spacing shall not exceed 3.0 m
on center. Additional ties shall be placed around openings to properly transfer forces.

(4) Spacing of transverse ties which are perpendicular to the span direction of floor slabs or roof slabs shall not
exceed the spacing of bearing walls.

(5) Ties around the perimeter of each floor slab or roof slab shall be placed within 1.2 m from the
edge, and nominal tensile strength shall not be less than 71,000 N.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

(6) Vertical ties shall be provided in all walls and shall be continuous over the entire building height.
Nominal tensile strength shall not be less than 44,000 N/m in the horizontal direction of the wall.
Vertical ties shall be at least two per each precast concrete wall panel, and spacing shall not
exceed than 3.6 m on center.

16.3.3 Connection Design

(1) Precast concrete connections shall transfer forces by grouted joints, shear keys, mechanical
connectors, reinforcement, reinforced topping, or a combination of these means.

(2) The adequacy of connections to transfer forces shall be determined by analysis or test.

(3) Where shear is the primary cross-sectional force by external loads, the provisions of 7.7 shall be
permitted to be apply.

(4) When designing a connection using a variety of structural materials, their relative stiffnesses,
strengths, and ductilities shall be considered.

(5) Connections shall be designed to secure the structural integrity.

16.3.4 Bearing

(1) Simply supported floor or roof membersshall satisfy (2) and (3).

(2) Allowable bearing stress of the contact surface between any type of supported and supporting
members shall not exceed the bearing of either the supporting members or supporting surface.
Bearing strength of concrete shall be in accordance with the provisions of 6.8.

(3) Unless the performance is verified by analysis or test, the following minimum requirements shall be
satisfied:
Each member or its supporting members shall have design dimensions so that, after consideration
of tolerances, the distance from the edge of the support to the end of the precast concrete
member in the direction of the span is at least  , but not less than:
(a) For solid or hollow-core slabs 50 mm
(b) For beams or stemmed members 75 mm
Bearing pads at unarmored edges shall be set back a minimum of 15 mm from the face of the
support, or at least the chamfer dimension at chamfered edges.

(4) Provisions of 8.5.2 need not apply to the positive bending moment reinforcement for statically
determinate precast concrete members, but at least one-third of such reinforcement shall extend to
the center of the bearing length, taking into account permitted tolerances in 5.3.1(2) and
16.2.1(5).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

16.4 Precast Concrete Segmental Bridge

16.4.1 Design of precast concrete segmental connection

(1) Provisions of this Chapter shall apply to joint design of precast concrete segmental member.

(2) Joint of precast concrete segment shall consider the stresses induced at both service and factored
load. When tensile stress at service load is checked, allowable bending tensile stress shall be 2.5
MPa.

(3) Structural details of precast concrete segmental joint shall satisfy the followings.
In joint of precast concrete segment, shear key shall be set to increase shear resistance strength of
segmental interface. Shear key shall be designed as to shear force.
Reinforcement or vertical tendon shall be provided at precast concrete segment ends and periphery
of shear key.

16.4.2 Considerations

(1) When precast concrete segmental bridge is constructed by balanced cantilever method, full staging
method, incremental launching method, concrete age at erection shall not be less than 14 days to
control that construction deflection is the same as calculation on design.

(2) In segment manufacturing site, concrete compressive strength shall be not less than 18 MPa prior to
stripping internal and external form during remaining bottom form and not less than 21 MPa prior
to transportation to storage. Concrete strength of longitudinal and transverse joint shall not be less
than 18 MPa prior to prestressing, and strength of segment concrete shall not be less than design
compressive strength prior to final permanent prestressing.

(3) At least 0.3 MPa of compressive stress shall be imposed on epoxy joint before hardening epoxy.

(4) Shear key on web of precast concrete segmental bridge shall be placed at section of web thickness.
When shear keys are placed at top and bottom slab, one large shear key shall be permitted to
place.

(5) Epoxy joint and dry joint shall be permitted between segments in precast concrete segmental bridge.
Epoxy joint shall be permitted in bridge with internal tendon and bridges subject to freeze-thaw
action or effect of freezing preventing agent. Dry joint shall be permitted in bridge with external
post-tensioning tendon located in areas where freeze-thaw or freezing does not affect.

(6) External post-tensioning tendon shall be permanently protected against corrosion.

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 16 Precast Concrete

16.5 Quality Control of Precast Concrete Products

16.5.1 Embedded Items

(1) Embedded items that either protrude from concrete or are exposed shall be permitted to be embedded
in concrete while the concrete is in a plastic state in accordance with (2) to (4).

(2) Embedded items shall not be hooked or tied to reinforcement within the concrete.

(3) Embedded items shall be located in the correct position while the concrete remains plastic.

(4) The concrete around embedded items shall be properly consolidated.

16.5.2 Identification and Marking of the Products

(1) Details including the reinforcement layout, connection, support, embedded zone, anchorage, concrete
cover depth, opening, lifting equipment, fabrication and assembly tolerances shall be marked on
shop drawings.

(2) Each precast concrete member or structural element shall be marked to indicate its location and
date of fabrication.

16.5.3 Transportation, Storage, and Erection

(1) Precast concrete members shall not be overstressed, distorted, or damaged during curing, stripping,
storage, transportation, and erection. The camber which may damage structures shall be avoided.

(2) During erection, precast concrete members shall be adequately braced and supported to ensure
proper alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.

16.5.4 Strength Evaluation of Products

(1) When a precaset concrete member becomes a composite structure with cast-in-place concrete, the
precast concrete member shall be permitted to be tested alone in flexure in accordance with
provisions (2) and (3).

(2) Test loads shall be applied when the results of structural calculation for each precast concrete
member confirms the safty against compression or buckling.

(3) When a precast concrete member is tested alone, test load for the precast concrete member shall be
determined so that the total tensile force in the tension reinforcement of the precast concrete
member is equal to that of the composite member under the test load required by 20.3.5.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

17.1 General

17.1.1 Scope

(1) This chapter provides design methods of composite concrete members which are cast-in-place
concrete members integrated with steel, steel pipes or precast concrete members constructed
separately.

(2) All provisons of this chapter shall be applied to the design of composite concrete flexural and
compression members, except as particularly specified in this chapter.

(3) Design Code for Steel Reinforced Concrete Building Structures can be used for design of
composite concrete building members.

17.1.2 Notations

 : Area of section resisting horizontal shear transfer, mm

 : Gross area of section, mm

  : Area of structural steel shape or steel pipe in a composite section, mm

 : Area of shear connector placed within spacing  , mm

 : Width of steel shape, mm

 : Width of cross section at contact surface being investigated for horizontal shear, mm

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

 : Overall depth of composite member, mm

 : Diameter of steel pipe, mm

 : Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

 : Moment of inertia of structural steel shape or steel pipe about centroidal axis of composite member
cross section

 : Radius of gyration of cross section of a compression member

 : Spacing of shear connectors in longitudinal direction

  : Nominal horizontal shear strength, N

 : Factored shear force at the section considered in design

 : For braced frame,      , for unbraced frames      shall be used.

  : Ratio of maximum factored axial sustained load to maximum factored axial load associated with
each load combination for braced frames

  : Ratio of maximum factored sustained shear within a story to maximum factored shear in that story
associated with each load combination for unbraced frames

 : Modification factor for lightweight concrete (see 3.4.4)

 : Ratio of shear connector area to area of contact surface

17.2 General Design

(1) An entire or portions of a composite member shall be permitted to be used to resist for axial
compression, shear and flexural moment.

(2) Individual elements of a member shall be investigated for all possible critical loading conditions
from a construction process at each loading stage.

(3) Properties of the individual element or the most critical values among other elements shall be
applied to design if the specified strength, unit weight, or other properties of the elements are
different.

(4) In calculating strength of composite members, no distinction shall be made between shored and
unshored members.

(5) All elements of composite members shall be designed to support all external loads prior to
specified strength of the composite members is fully developed.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

(6) In addition to the purpose of resisting loads, additional reinforcement shall be placed to control
cracks and prevent separation of each element of composite members.

(7) Composite flexural members shall satisfy the requirements of deflection limits in 4.3.4.

(8) In case of constructing composite members with shoring, the shoring shall not be removed until the
members can support all loads and the requirements for deflection and cracking are sufficiently
satisfied.

17.3 Design of Composite Concrete Flexural Members

17.3.1 Vertical shear strength

(1) If the entire section of a composite member is assumed to resist vertical shear force, the composite
member shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 7 for a monolithically
cast member of the same cross-section.

(2) Shear reinforcement shall be anchored into interconnected members thoroughly.

(3) Extended or anchored shear reinforcement shall be permitted to be considered as shear

reinforcement for horizontal shear.

17.3.2 Horizontal shear strength

(1) For composite concrete flexural members, it shall be checked that horizontal shear forces are fully
transferred to contact surfaces of interconnected elements.

(2) Except as provided in 17.3.2(3) and (4), design of a cross-section for horizontal shear shall satisfy
Eq. ( 17.3.1).

  ≤   (17.3.1)

where   is nominal horizontal shear strength and defined as follows.

If contact surfaces are clean, free from dirt and laitance, and intentionally roughened, nominal
horizontal shear strength   shall not be greater than   .
If minimum shear connectors are provided according to 17.3.3, and contact surfaces are clean, free
from dirt and laitance, but not intentionally roughened, nominal horizontal shear strength  
shall not be greater than   .
If minimum shear connectors are provided according to 17.3.3, and contact surfaces are clean, free
from dirt and laitance, and intentionally roughened to a depth of 6 mm approximately, nominal
horizontal shear strength   shall be equal to        and not be greater than
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

 .  shall be determined in accordance with 3.4.4, and  is     .

If factored shear force   at the cross-section considered exceeds  , design for
horizontal shear force shall be in accordance with provisions of shear-friction in 7.7.2.
In 17.3.2,  is the distance between extreme compression fiber and centroid of tendons and
longitudinal tension reinforcement (non-prestressed). For prestressed concrete members,  shall not
be less than 0.8.

(3) Horizontal shear force is determined by calculating actual amount of changes in compression or
tension force in any element of composite members, and actions shall be made to transfer the force
to the supporting element as horizontal shear force. The factored horizontal shear force shall not be
greater than horizontal shear strength,   specified in 17.3.2(2), where area of contact surface,
  shall be used instead of  .

(4) Where shear connectors resisting horizontal shear force are designed to satisfy the requirements in
17.3.2(3), spacing and area of shear connectors along the axis of a member shall be determined
considering shear force distribution of the member.

(5) If there is tension force across any contact surface between interconnected elements, shear transfer
by contact shall be permitted only if minimum shear connectors are placed according to the
provisions of 17.3.3.

17.3.3 Connectors for horizontal shear

(1) If shear connectors are used to tenasfer horizontal shear force, cross-sectional area of shear
connectors shall not be less than that required in the provision of 7.3.3(3). Spacing of shear
connectors shall not exceed four times the minimum dimension of supporting element and 600 mm.

(2) Single reinforcing bar or wire, multiple leg stirrups, or vertical leg of welded wire mesh shall be
permitted to be used as shear connectors for horizontal shear force.

(3) All shear connectors shall be anchored thoroughly into interconnected elements.

17.3.4 Composite flexural member of structural steel strengthened by reinforced concrete

(1) A composite flexural member of structural steel such as I-shaped girder strengthened by reinforced
concrete shall conform to the following provisions of (2) to (5).

(2) Specified compressive strength of concrete   shall not be less than 27 MPa.

(3) Shrinkage and creep of concrete shall conform to the provisions of 2.2.2(5) and (6) and
experimental data shall be permitted to be used.

(4) Limitations for design of flexural members shall conform to the provisions of 6.3.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

(5) Design of shear connector for bridge structures shall conform to the provisions of 17.3.3 and
Korean Bridge Design Code .

17.4 Design of Composite Compression Member

17.4.1 General

(1) Composite compression members shall include all members reinforced longitudinally with structural
steel shapes, steel pipes or steel tubes. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be permitted to either be
used or not.

(2) Strength of a composite compression member shall be calculated under the same limitations for
common reinforced concrete members.

(3) Axial strength assigned to concrete of a composite compression member shall be transferred by
members or brackets that provide bearing to the concrete.

(4) Axial strength not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be developed by directly
connecting to the structural steel shape, pipe, or tube, etc.

(5) For calculation of slenderness effects, radius of gyration shall not be greater than the value given
by Eq. (17.4.1).


  
     
    
   
(17.4.1)

As alternatives to accurate calculation, EI in Eqs. (6.5.6) and (6.5.14) shall be calculated by either
Eq. (6.5.7) or Eq. (17.4.2.)

 
       (17.4.2)
 

where,      for braced frames specified in 6.5.6, or      for unbraced frames specified
in 6.5.7.

17.4.2 Structural steel encasing concrete core

(1) For composite members with a concrete core encased by structural steel, thickness of the structural
steel shall not be less than the following values .

For rectangular sections of width  
 

 
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members


For circular sections of diameter    



(2) Longitudinal reinforcement placed within the concrete core shall be permitted to be used in the
calculations of   and  .

17.4.3 Composite member with spiral reinforcement around structural steel core

(1) Composite members with a structural steel core reinforced by spiral reinforcement and concrete shall
conform to the following provisions of (2) to (6).

(2) Specified compressive strength of concrete   shall not be less than 21 MPa.

(3) Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum yield strength of the
structural steel but not greater than 450 MPa. However, it shall be permitted to use high strength
steel with a yield strength exceeding 450 MPa if the use of the high strength steel is justified by
detailed analysis and test based on force equilibrium and strain compatibility used in the assuptions
of 6.2.1.

(4) Spiral reinforcement shall conform to the provision of 6.4.2(3).

(5) Longitudinal reinforcement placed within spiral reinforcement shall not be less than 0.01 nor greater
than 0.08 times the total cross-sectional area.

(6) Longitudinal reinforcement placed within spiral reinforcement shall be permitted to be used in the
calculations of   and  .

17.4.4 Composite member with tie reinforcement around structural steel core

(1) Composite members with a structural steel core reinforced by tie reinforcement and concrete shall
conform to the following provisions of (2) to (9).

(2) Specified compressive strength of concrete,   shall not be less than 21 MPa.

(3) Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum yield strength of the
structural steel but not greater than 450 MPa. However, it shall be permitted to use high strength
steel with a yield strength exceeding 450 MPa, if the use of the high strength steel is justified by
detailed analysis and test based on force equilibrium and strain compatibility used in the assuptions
of 6.2.1.

(4) Transverse ties shall enclose the structural steel core completely.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 17 Composite Concrete Members

(5) Diameter of transverse ties shall not be less than 1/50 times the longest dimension of the
cross-section of the composite member, but shall not be less than the diameter of D10 and greater
than the diameter of D16. Welded wire reinforcement with an equivalent cross-sectional area shall
be permitted to be used.

(6) Vertical spacing of transverse ties shall not exceed the least of 16 times the diameter of
longitudinal reinforcement, 48 times the diameter of tie bar and 0.5 times the minimum dimension
of the composite member cross-section.

(7) Longitudinal reinforcement placed within transverse ties shall not be less than 0.01 and greater than
0.08 times the total cross-sectional area.

(8) Longitudinal reinforcement shall be placed at all corners of a rectangular cross-section, and spacing
of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be greater than 0.5 times the minimum dimension of the
composite member cross section.

(9) Longitudinal reinforcement placed within transverse ties shall be permitted to be included in  
for strength calculation, but shall not be used in the calculation of  to consider the slenderness
effect.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 18 Shells and Folded Plate Members

Chapter 18 Shells and Folded Plate Members

18.1 General

18.1.1 Scope

Provisions of this chapter shall apply to thin shell and folded plate concrete structures, including ribs
and edge beams.

18.1.2 Notations

 : Modulus of elasticity of concrete

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

 : Thickness of member

 : Development length, mm

 : Modification factor for lightweight concrete (refer to 3.4.4)

 : Strength reduction factor

18.2 General Design

18.2.1 Design Principles

(1) When determining internal forces and displacements of thin shells, elastic behavior shall be
permitted to be assumed. This elastic behavior is performed by computations based on the analysis
of the uncracked concrete structure in which the material is assumed to be linearly elastic,
homogeneous, and isotropic. The effect of Poisson’s ratio of concrete shall be permitted to be
ignored.

(2) Inelastic analyses shall be permitted to be used where it can be shown that such analysis methods
ensure the safety.

(3) Equilibrium of internal resistances and external loads shall be checked to ensure consistency of
results.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 18 Shells and Folded Plate Members

(4) Experimental or numerical analysis methods shall be permitted to be used where it can be shown
that such methods ensure the safety of design.

(5) Approximate analysis methods shall be permitted to be used where it can be shown that such
methods ensure the safety of design.

(6) In the analysis of prestressed shells, behaviors at load induced during prestressing, at cracking load,
and at factored load shall be considered. Design shall take into account force components on the
shell resulting from the tendon profile not lying in the same plane.

(7) Thickness and reinforcements of shells shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of this Code
for strength and serviceability.

(8) Stability of shells shall be investigated in design.

(9) Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions of this Code. It shall be
permitted to assume that a portion of the shell such as the flange width of a T-beam behaves
together with the auxiliary member. Amount of reinforcements perpendicular to the auxiliary
member of the shell shall not be less than that required for the flange of a T-beam.

(10) Strength design of shell slabs subjected to membrane stresses and

flexural moments shall be based on the stresses and strains resulting from either elastic or inelastic
analysis.

(11) In a region where membrane cracks are expected, nominal compressive strength of concrete in the
same direction of the cracks shall be taken as 0.4  .

18.2.2 Design Strength of Materials

(1) Specified compressive strength of concrete   at 28 days shall not be less than 21 MPa.

(2) Specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement   shall not exceed 400 MPa.

18.3 Reinforcement Details

(1) Shell reinforcement shall be provided at shell boundaries, load acting points, or openings to resist
tensile stresses due to internal membrane forces, to resist tensile stresses due to bending and
twisting moments, and to control shrinkage and temperature cracks.

(2) Tensile reinforcement shall be provided in two or more directions over the entire shell, and its
resistance in any direction shall exceed the component of internal forces in that direction.
Alternatively, reinforcement for the membrane stress in the slab shall resist axial tensile forces plus
the tensile force due to shear-friction required to transfer shear in any vertical direction of the
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 18 Shells and Folded Plate Members

membrane. The assumed coefficient of friction shall not exceed 1.0, and  shall conform to
3.4.4.

(3) Area of shell reinforcement at any section, as measured in two orthogonal directions, shall not be
less than the shrinkage or temperature reinforcements of the slab specified in 5.7.

(4) Reinforcement for shear and bending moments about plane axes of the shell slab shall be calculated
in accordance with Chapters 6, 7, and 10.

(5) Area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforcement yields before either
compressive failure of concrete or buckling of the shell occurs.

(6) In a region subjected to high tension, membrane reinforcement shall, if possible, be placed in the
directions of the principal tensile membrane forces. Otherwise, membrane reinforcement shall be
placed in two or more component directions.

(7) If the difference between the direction of reinforcement and the direction of the principal tensile
membrane force is greater than 10 degrees, the amount of reinforcement shall be reviewed in terms
of cracking at service loads.

(8) Where the magnitude of the principal tensile membrane stress of the shell varies significantly over
the shell surface, tensile reinforcement shall be concentrated in the region of large tensile stress to
ensure the safety of design. However, the ratio of shell reinforcement to the overall thickness of
the shell shall not be less than 0.0035 in any tensile region.

(9) Reinforcement required to resist bending moments of the shell shall be determined considering the
simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same location. Even in the case that the
analysis result requires shell reinforcement in only one surface of the shell where bending moment
does not change its sign, the same amount of reinforcement shall be placed near the both surfaces
of the shell.

(10) Spacing of shell reinforcement in any direction shall not be greater than 450 mm and five times
the shell thickness. Where the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross section of concrete
due to factored loads exceeds   , spacing of shell reinforcement shall not be exceed


three times the shell thickness.

(11) Shell reinforcement at the interface of the shell and its supporting members or edge members shall
be anchored or extended in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 8. The minimum
development length shall not be less than 1.2 nor 450 mm.

(12) Splice length of shell reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of
Chapter 8. However, the minimum splice length of tension reinforcement shall not be less than 1.2
times the value required by Chapter 8 and shall not be less than 450 mm. The number of splices
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 18 Shells and Folded Plate Members

in the principal tensile reinforcement shall be as small as possible. Where splices are necessary,
they shall be staggered at least  with not more than one-third of the reinforcement spliced at any
section.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

Chapter 19 Structural Plain Concrete

19.1 General

19.1.1 Scope

(1) Design and construction of structural plain concrete members such as cast-in-place or precast
concrete members shall be in accordance with provisions of this chapter.

(2) Provisions of this chapter shall not be applied to design and construction of the slabs directly
supported by ground such as pavements and slab-on-grade. However, provisions of this chapter
shall be applied when these members transfer vertical load or horizontal load through other
members to ground.

(3) Provisions of this chapter shall be applicable to special structures such as arches, underground
utility structures, gravity walls, and shielding walls.

19.1.2 Notations

 : Gross area of section, mm

 : Loaded area, mm

 : Area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
composed of complete shapes within the region where the upper loaded area with the side
slope of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal, mm

 : Width of member, mm

 : Perimeter length of critical section for shear in footings, mm

 : Nominal bearing strength of loaded area  

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Gross thickness of member, mm

 : Vertical distance between supporting points, mm

 : Nominal flexural strength of section

 : Factored moment at section

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

 : Nominal axial strength of section

  : Nominal axial strength of wall in accordance with 19.4

 : Factored axial force due to a given eccentricity

 : Section modulus, mm

 : Nominal shear strength at section

 : Factored shear force at section

 : Ratio of long side to short side for concentrated load or reaction area

 : Light weight concrete factor(see 3.4.4)

19.2 General Design

19.2.1 Limitations

(1) Provisions in this chapter shall be applied to design of plain concrete members.

(2) Structural plain concrete shall be permitted for the following , and , and shall not be
permitted for columns.
Members that are continuously supported in vertical direction by soil or other structural members.
Members that develop compressive force through arch action under all loading conditions.
Walls and pedestals (See 19.4 and 19.6)

(3) Provisions in this chapter shall not be applied to design of cast-in-place concrete piles and piers
embedded in ground.

(4) Specified compressive strength of structural plain concrete shall not be less than 18 MPa and the
strength required for durability limitations in Chapter 4.

19.2.2 Joints

(1) Contraction joints or isolation joints shall be used to divide structural plain concrete members into
flexurally discontinuous elements. The size of each element shall be determined to limit excessive
internal stress developed by creep, drying shrinkage, and temperature effects.

(2) Influence of climatic conditions, selection and proportioning of materials, mixing, placing, and
curing of concrete, degree of restraint to deformation, stresses due to loads to which an element is
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

subject, and construction techniques shall be considered in determining the number and location of
contraction joints or isolation joints.

19.2.3 Design method

(1) Structural plain concrete members shall be designed with the load factor and strength reduction
factor to develop appropriate strength in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

(2) Factored loads and member forces shall be determined in accordance with 3.3.2.

(3) Reinforcement shall be provided where the required strength exceeds design strength, and the
member with reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with all the provisions of this Code for
reinforced concrete structures.

(4) Strength design of structural plain concrete members that are subject to flexure and axial force shall
be based on a linear stress-strain relationship in both compression and tension.

(5) Tensile strength of concrete shall be permitted to be considered in the design of plain concrete
members when the provisions of 19.2.2 are satisfied.

(6) Strength of reinforcement shall not be considered even though reinforcement is placed.

(7) Tension shall not be transmitted through outside ends, construction joints, contraction joints, or isolation
joints of an individual plain concrete element. Flexural continuity due to tension between adjacent
structural plain concrete elements shall be assumed not to exist.

(8) The entire cross-section of a member shall be considered in calculating strength in flexure, combined
flexure and axial force, and shear. However, where concrete is placed on soil, the overall thickness
shall be taken as 50mm less than the actual thickness.

19.3 Strength

(1) Design of cross sections subject to flexure shall be in accordance with Eq. (19.3.1).

  ≥   (19.3.1)

where   shall be calculated by Eq. (19.3.2) if tension controls, or by Eq. (19.3.3) if

compression controls.

   
    (19.3.2)

        (19.3.3)
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

where   is section modulus.

(2) Design of cross-sections subjected to compression shall be in accordance with Eq. (19.3.4).

  ≥   (19.3.4)

where   is nominal axial strength computed by Eq. (19.3.5).

   
     
   
  
 (19.3.5)

where   is loaded area.

(3) Members subject to combined flexure and axial force shall be designed in accordance with Eq. (19.3.6)
on the compression face or Eq. (19.3.7) on tension face.

         ≦  (19.3.6)

         ≦ 
  (19.3.7)

(4) Design of rectangular cross-sections subjected to shear shall be in accordance with Eq. (19.3.8).

  ≧   (19.3.8)

where   shall be computed by Eq. (19.3.9) and Eq. (19.3.10).

For beam action :

   
   (19.3.9)

For two-way action :

 
        
   ≦ 

    (19.3.10)

where   is ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.

(5) Design of bearing areas subjected to compression shall be in accordance with Eq. (19.3.11).

  ≧   (19.3.11)

where   is factored bearing force, and   is nominal bearing strength of the loaded area   ,
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

computed by Eq. (19.3.12).

      (19.3.12)

Nominal bearing strength   shall be permitted to be multiplied by 

   but not more than
2, except where the supporting area is wider on all sides than the loaded area.

(6) Modification factor for light weight concrete  in this chapter shall be in accordance with 3.4.4
unless specifically mentioned.

19.4 Walls

19.4.1 General design

(1) Structural plain concrete walls shall be continuously supported by soil, footings, wall footings, grade beams, or
other structural members capable of providing continuous vertical supports.

(2) Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed for vertical load, lateral load, and all other applying
loads to which they are subjected.

(3) Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed for an eccentricity corresponding to the maximum factored
moment due to axial load. The eccentricity shall be not less than . It shall be permitted to design
the walls by 19.3(2) or 19.4.2 when the resultant of all factored axial forces is located within the middle
1/3 of the overall thickness. Otherwise, design of the walls shall be in accordance with 19.3(3).

(4) Design for shear shall be in accordance with 19.3(4).

19.4.2 Practical design method

(1) Structural plain concrete walls with a solid rectangular cross-section shall be permitted to be
designed by Eq. (19.4.1) when the resultant of all factored forces is located within the middle-third
of the overall thickness of the wall.

(2) Design of walls subjected to axial force shall be in accordance with Eq. (19.4.1).

  ≥   (19.4.1)

where   is factored axial force, and   is nominal axial strength calculated by Eq. (19.4.2).

 

  
          

 
(19.4.2)
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

19.4.3 Limitations

(1) Unless verified by a detailed structural analysis, the effective length of walls in the horizontal direction
shall not exceed the center-to-center distance between vertical concentrated loads, and shall not exceed
the width of the bearing area plus four times the wall thickness.

(2) Except as provided in 19.4.3(3), the thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1/24 of the
smaller of unsupported height and length, nor 150 mm.

(3) Thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation walls shall not be less than 200 mm.

(4) Wall shall be supported not to develop lateral displacement.

(5) At least two of D16 or larger bars shall be placed around all window and door openings. These
bars shall extend not less than 600 mm from the corners of openings.

19.5 Footings

19.5.1 General design

(1) Structural plain concrete footings shall be designed for factored loads and soil reactions in accordance with the
relevant design requirements of this Code and as provided in 19.5.1(2) through (5).

(2) Base area of footings shall be determined by forces and moments due to service loads transmitted
to soil through the footings and the allowable capacity determined by principles of soil mechanics.

(3) Plain concrete shall not be used for footings over piles.

(4) Thickness of structural plain concrete footings shall not be less than 200 mm.

(5) Maximum factored moment shall be calculated at the following critical sections.
At the front face of a column, pedestal, or wall, for footings supporting the concrete column,
pedestal, or wall
At the middle of the center line and front face of a masonry wall, for footings supporting the
wall,
At the middle of the edge of a steel base plate and front face of a column, for footings
supporting the column with the steel base plate.

19.5.2 Shear in plain concrete footings

(1) Maximum factored shear   shall be calculated in accordance with 19.5.2(2), and the critical section
for shear shall be located at the front face of a column, pedestal, or wall for footings supporting the
column, pedestal, or wall. The critical section for footings supporting a column with steel base plates
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

shall be the location specified in 19.5.1(5) .

(2) Shear strength of structural plain concrete footings around concentrated loads or reactions shall be determined
by unfavorable one of the following two conditions.
For beam action with a critical section over the entire width of the section located at a distance
 from the face of concentrated load or reaction area, the footing shall be designed in accordance
with Eq. (19.3.9).
For two-way action with a critical section perpendicular to the plane of a footing around the area
subjected to concentrated load or reaction area, the footing shall be designed in accordance with
Eq. (19.3.10). For this case, perimeter  is a minimum, but need not be located closer than 
to the perimeter of concentrated loads and reactions.

(3) Concrete columns or pedestals with a circular or regular polygon-shaped section shall be permitted
to be treated as square members with the same area when determining the location of critical
sections for moment and shear.

(4) Factored bearing load   on concrete at the contact surface between supporting and supported
members shall not exceed design bearing strength   at the bearing surface of both members as
given in 19.3(5).

19.6 Pedestals

(1) Plain concrete pedestals shall be designed, considering vertical load, lateral load, and all other applying loads.

(2) Ratio of unsupported height to average minimum thickness in the lateral direction of plain concrete
pedestals shall not exceed 3.

(3) Maximum factored axial force   applied to plain concrete pedestals shall not exceed design
bearing strength   given in 19.3(5).

19.7 Precast Concrete Members

(1) Precast plain concrete members shall be designed for all loading conditions from initial fabrication to
completion of the structure, including form removal, storage, transportation, and temporary work.

(2) Limitations of 19.2.1 shall apply to fabrication, transportation, and temporary work as well as to the
completed condition of precast plain concrete members.

(3) Precast concrete members shall be connected thoroughly to the lateral-force-resisting structural
system to transfer all lateral loads.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 19 Structural Plane Concrete

(4) Precast concrete members shall be adequately supported during temporary works to ensure proper
alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.

19.8 Seismic Design and Plain Concrete

(1) Structures located in strong earthquake regions or high seismic risk areas shall not have foundation
elements using structural plain concrete, except as follows.
For detached one- or two-family dwellings with 3-story or less, which are constructed with walls
connected with shear connections, plain concrete footings without longitudinal reinforcement shall
be permitted to be used for footings supporting wall or isolated footings supporting columns or
pedestals.
For all other structures except as provided in , plain concrete footings shall be permitted to be
used for footing supporting cast-in-place reinforced concrete walls or reinforced masonry walls.
However, at least two bars shall be placed continuously in the longitudinal direction. The bars
shall not be less than D13 and the cross-sectional area of the bars shall not be less than 0.2 %
of the cross sectional area of the footing.
For detached one- or two-family dwellings with 3-story or less, which are constructed with walls
connected with shear connections, plain concrete shall be permitted to be used for footings and
basement walls if the wall thickness is not less than 200 mm and one-sided soil pressure of no
more than 1.2 m is applied.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 20 Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

Chapter 20 Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

20.1 General

20.1.1 Scope

(1) This chapter shall apply to the safety evaluation of existing concrete structures when the
load-carrying capacity is not reliable.

(2) Provisions of this chapter shall be permitted to be applied as a standard for the maintenance or the
evaluation of safety and load -carrying capacity of structures, such as determination of whether
construction materials have quality problems, construction process was in accordance with
requirements of specifications, or part or all of the structures is deteriorated.

(3) The provisions of this chapter and the corresponding appendix can be applied to the safety
evaluation of existing concrete structures.

(4) If the safety of structures or members are in question, sufficient inspection and testing shall be
performed on the structures and members. The inspection and testing shall be in accordance with
20.2.

(5) If the causes for the lack of load-carrying capacity are unknown, or the member dimensions and
material properties required by analysis are measurable, the load-carrying capacity shall be permitted
to be evaluated in accordance with 20.4 based on these measured data. In this case, the input
values for evaluation shall be determined in accordance with 20.3.

(6) If the causes for the lack of load-carrying capacity are unknown, or the member dimensions and
material properties required by analysis are measurable, the load-carrying capacity shall be evaluated
in accordance with 20.5 to determine whether the structure is maintainable under the service load
state.

20.2 Inspection and Testing

(1) Dimensions of structural members shall be checked at critical sections.

(2) Locations and sizes of reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or tendons shall be determined
by measurement at critical sections. When the contents of drawings are confirmed through sample
inspection, the locations of reinforcing bars shall be permitted to be determined based on the
drawings.

(3) When the evalutation of concrete strength is required, the input values for evaluation shall be
properly determined using compressive strength tests results for cores or cylinders. Coreing and
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 20 Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

testing shall be in accordance with KS F 2422.

(4) When the strength of reinforcing bars and tendons is required, it shall be determined by tensile
strength tests for sample specimens obtained from the structure.

20.3 Input Data for Evaluation

20.3.1 Input values for evaluation

Input values for structural dimensions, materials, and loads shall be used in the safety evaluation of
existing structures. In principle, the input values for evaluation shall be determined based on data
measured in accordance with 20.2.

20.3.2 Structural dimensions

Measured data shall, if possible, be used for the input values for evaluation, such as structural
dimensions used in structural analysis and the calculation of the strength and load.

20.3.3 Input values for evaluation of material strength

(1) When the structural resistance is determined using material strength data measured by inspection and
testing on the structure, the measured material strength data shall be converted into the input value
for evaluation through a validated statistical method.

(2) Input values for evaluation of concrete shall be determined considering the difference between the
design strength and actual strength, the difference between the standard cylinder strength and in-situ
concrete strength, strength variation by concrete ages, strength variation by concrete deterioration,
and the uncertainties associated with test methods, etc.

(3) In principle, the input values for evaluation of reinforcement and tendon shall be determined using
the measured data from field investigation.

20.3.4 Strength reduction factor for evaluation

(1) If sectional dimensions and material properties are determined in accordance with this section and
calculated on the basis of 20.4, it shall be permitted to increase the strength reduction factor
defined in 3.3.3. However, the strength reduction factor shall not exceed the following values.
For tension-controlled sections as defined in 6.2.2(4) 1.0
➁ For compression-controlled sections as defined in 6.2.2(3)
(a) For member with spiral reinforcement conforming to 6.4.2 0.85
(b) For other members 0.80
➂ For torsional moment and shear force 0.80
➃ For bearing force on concrete 0.80
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 20 Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

(2) When strengthning methods using fiber composites or organic materials are applied, or reliability,
durability, strength, and ductility capacity of strengthened members are expected to be degraded
according to environmental exposure conditions, used materials, and construction materials, the
partial strength reduction factor shall be additionally applied to the corresponding materials.

20.3.5 Load and load factor for evaluation

(1) For general evaluation of structures, separate investigation of actual loads acting on the structures is
not necessary. However, when the actual loads were investigated for more precise evaluation, it
shall be permitted to reflect them in the evaluation.

(2) When the magnitude of loads is rigorously investigated by field investigation for the evaluation of
structures, the load factors for dead loads and live loads shall be permitted to be reduced by 5%
in the load combinations of 3.3.2 for determining the required strength of the structures.

20.4 Evaluation by Analysis

(1) When the load-carrying capacity is evaluated by an analytical method, field investigation shall be
performed for member dimensions and details, material properties, sectional loss and strength
degradation due to damages and deterioration, and other important structural conditions.

(2) It shall be confirmed whether the load factors used for the analysis by investigation specified in (1)
are in accordance with the purpose of this Code or other structural standards.

(3) Stability of existing structures shall be investigated considering the degree of deterioration and
damages, and shall satisfy all design and safety requirements, which are suitable for structural
standards.

20.5 Evaluation by Load Test

(1) The purpose of load test is to evaluate the stability of structures of members by quantifying the
actual load-carrying capacity of them. The load test results shall either be applied directly to judge
the safety or be applied to complement the load-carrying capacity of the structure evaluated by an
analytical method.

(2) Before carrying out a load test, the qualified structural engineer shall establish a plan for the load
test including applied loads, measurements, test conditions, and numerical analysis, and the plan
shall be approved by the owner or manager of the structure.

(3) Before carrying out a load test, analytical evaluation shall be performed.

(4) Load tests shall be performed after enough days so that the materials of structures or members
reach their design strength.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 20 Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

(5) When the stability of members in a building is directly evaluated directly based on load test results,
the load test results shall be permitted to be used only for the safety evaluation of flexural
members such as beams and slabs.

(6) When only a part of structures is only loaded, the load test shall be carried out in an appropriate
way that the expected causes of the part where the load-carrying capacity is in question are able to
be determined.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.1 General

21.1.1 Scope

(1) The provisions of this chapter specify the special seismic design and detailing requirements for
reinforced concrete members and shall only apply to monolithic reinforced concrete structures
resisting forces induced by earthquake motions.

(2) For other prefabricated structures unlike monolithic structures, this provisions shall be modified
based on appropriate physical evidence and analysis, and special seismic design for these structures
shall satisfy the corresponding provisions.

(3) Precast and pre-stressed concrete structures shall be permitted to be considered as the
earthquake-resistant structures only if they satisfy the safety and serviceability requirements for
monolithic structures.

(4) A reinforced concrete structural system not satisfying the requirements of this chapter shall not be
used unless it is demonstrated by experimental evidence or analysis that the proposed system will
satisfy the requirements specified in this chapter or exceed the structural performance set by this
chapter.

(5) The lateral load resisting system of a structure shall be appropriately designed to resist forces
induced by wind and earthquake motions.

21.1.2 Notations

  : Cross-sectional area of a structural member measured from the outside edges of transverse reinforcement,
mm2

  : Cross-sectional area of an isolated column or horizontal wall segment, mm2

  : Entire area of the concrete section bounded by length of section and web thickness in the direction
of shear force, mm2

 : Gross-sectional area of concrete section, mm2

 : Effective cross-sectional area of a joint in a plane parallel to the plane of reinforcement

generating shear in the joint, mm2 (see 21.5.3). Depth of the joint shall be equal to the
whole depth of the column. When the beam is connecting to the bearing segment exceeding
the width of the beam, the effective width of the joint shall be less than the followings:
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

Summation of beam width and joint depth

The lesser value of two times measured vertically for beam axis to column surface

  : Total cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement (including crossties) within spacing 

and perpendicular to dimension  , mm2

  : Total area of reinforcement in each group of diagonal bars in a diagonally reinforced coupling
beam, mm2

 : Width of effective compression flange of the member, mm

 : Web width or diameter of circular section, mm

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis(refer to 6.2.1), the maximum
neutral axis depth determined from specified flexural strength corresponding to  and factored
axial loads(refer to 21.6.6(2))

 : Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured in

the direction parallel to span length 

 : Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket measured in

the direction parallel to span length 

 : Distance from the interior face of the column to the slab edge measured parallel to  , but
not exceeding 

 : Effective depth of the section, mm,

 : Nominal diameter of bar, mm

 : Load effects of earthquake, or related internal section forces

  : Design standard compressive strength of concrete, MPa

 : Design standard yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement, MPa

  : Standard design yield strength of transverse reinforcement, MPa

 : Overall thickness of member, mm

 : Section dimension of inside of the column measured from center-to-center confined reinforced
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

bars, mm
 : Height of entire wall or height of the segment of wall considered, mm

 : Maximum horizontal spacing of hoops or transverse reinforcements of the column, mm

 : Development length of reinforcement, mm

 : Development length of reinforcement with a standard hook as specified in Eq. (21.5.3). mm

 : Length of clear span between the supports, mm

 : Length, measured from joint face along axis of structural member, over which transverse
reinforcement must be provided in minimum, mm

 : Length of entire wall or length of segment of wall considered in direction of shear force, mm

 : Flexural moment of the joint face corresponding to nominal flexural strength of the column framing into the
joint, calculated for factored axial force, consistent with the direction of lateral forces considered, resulting
in lowest flexural strength

 : Flexural moment of the joint face corresponding to nominal flexural strength of beam framing into the joint, beam
shall include tension reinforcements in slab

  : Probable flexural strength of members, with axial load considered, determined using the
properties of the member at the joint assuming a tensile stress in the longitudinal
bars(minimum) of at least 1.25  and a strength reduction factor, , of 1.0

 : Slab flexural moment balanced by support flexural moment

  : (Should be added)

 : Factored flexural moment at section

 : Spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the longitudinal axis of the structural member

 : Maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement, mm

 : Spacing of transverse reinforcement within the length  , mm

 : Nominal shear strength at section provided by concrete

KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

 : Nominal shear strength at section

 : Factored shear force at section

 : Angle defining between the orientation of diagonal reinforcement and longitudinal axis of the
coupling beams retrofitted diagonally

 : Coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to nominal wall shear strength, refer
to Eq. (21.5.1)

 : Design displacement, mm

 : Ratio of tensile reinforcement not prestressed,   / ,

 : Ratio of entire area of reinforcement to sectional area of the column

 : Ratio of area of distributed reinforcement parallel to   section to gross sectional area

perpendicular to that reinforcement

 : Ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core confined by the spiral
(measured out-to-out of spirals)

 : Ratio of area of distributed reinforcement normal to   section to gross concrete area  

 : Strength reduction factor

21.2 Special Specifications

21.2.1 Scope

(1) Based on the energy dissipation capacity in the nonlinear range of response related to earthquake
motions, this chapter specifies the special specifications related to the design and construction of
reinforced concrete structures and specified concrete strengths shall be conformed to 2.2.2 and
21.2.4(1).

(2) In regions of low seismic risk or for structures assigned to low seismic hazard levels, the
provisions of Chapters 1 through 17 and 19 shall apply in addition to the requirements of 21.2.
Where the intermediate or special concrete systems are used, the requirements for intermediate or
special systems specified in this chapter shall be satisfied.

(3) In regions of moderate seismic risk or for structures assigned to intermediate seismic hazard levels,
intermediate or special moment frames, or ordinary, intermediate, or special shear walls shall be
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

used to resist forces induced by earthquake motions. Where special concrete structural systems are
used, the requirements of this chapter for special systems shall be satisfied.

(4) In regions of high seismic hazard levels or for structures assigned to high seismic design categories,
special moment frames, special structural walls, diaphragms, and trusses satisfying with 21.2.
through 21.8 shall be used to resist forces induced by earthquake motions. Members not
proportioned to resist earthquake forces shall conform to the requirements of 21.9.

(5) A reinforced concrete structural system not satisfying the requirements of this chapter shall be
permitted to be used for the earthquake-resistant system if it is demonstrated by experimental
evidence and analysis that the proposed system has strength and toughness equal to or exceeding
those required by this chapter.

(6) Vibration damped systems designed by professional structural engineers and demonstrated by experimental
evidence shall be permitted to be used to decrease the vibration of structures.

21.2.2 Analysis and design of structural members

(1) For the analysis of structural members subjected to earthquake motions, the interaction of all linear
and nonlinear responses of structural and nonstructural members that affect in terms of material
perspective shall be considered.

(2) Rigid members assumed not to be a part of the lateral-force-resisting system shall be permitted to
be used if their effects on the response of the structural system is considered. Consequences of
failure of structural and nonstructural members that are not a part of the lateral-force-resisting
system shall also be considered.

(3) Structural members extending below the base of structure that are required to transmit forces
resulting from earthquake effects to the foundation shall comply with the requirements of this
chapter.

(4) All structural members, which are not supposed to be a part of the lateral-force resisting system, shall
also satisfy the requirements of 21.9.

21.2.3 Strength reduction factors

Strength reduction factors shall be complied with provisions of 3.3.3.

21.2.4 Concrete in special moment frames and special structural walls

(1) Specified compressive strength of concrete   shall not be less than 21 MPa.

(2) Specified compressive strength of lightweight concrete shall not exceed 35 MPa. If it is
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

demonstrated by experimental evidence that structural members made using lightweight concrete
have strength and toughness equal to or exceeding those of comparable members made with normal
weight concrete of the same strength, the greater compressive strength shall be permitted to be
used.

21.2.5 Reinforcement in special moment frames and special structural walls

(1) The limitation of the specified yield strength   of reinforcement resisting earthquake induced
flexural and axial forces in frame members or structural walls shall not exceed 600 MPa and 500
MPa for longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (KS D 3504, 3552, 3688, 7017), respectively,
and shall satisfy the following requirements of (2) and (3).

(2) The actual yield strength based on mill tests shall not exceed the specified yield strength by more
than 120 MPa. Retest shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 20 MPa.

(3) The ratio of the actual tensile strength to the actual yield strength shall not be less than 1.25.

21.2.6 Mechanical splices in special moment frames and special structural walls

(1) Classification of mechanical splices shall be permitted to be classified as Type 1 or Type 2

mechanical splices.
Type 1 mechanical splices shall conform to 8.6.1.
Type 2 mechanical splices shall conform to 8.6.1 and shall be capable of developing the specified
tensile strength of the spliced bar.

(2) Type 1 mechanical splices shall not be used within a distance equal to twice the member depth
from the column or beam surface of special moment frames or from sections where yielding of the
reinforcement is likely to occur as a consequence of inelastic lateral displacements. Type 2
mechanical splices shall be permitted to be used at any location.

21.2.7 Welded splices in special moment frames and special structural walls

(1) Welded splices of reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced forces shall conform to 8.6.1. Also,
this shall not be used within a distance equal to twice the member depth from the column or
beam face or from sections as a result of inelastic lateral displacements.

(2) Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts, or other similar elements to longitudinal reinforcement that is
required by design shall not be permitted.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.3 Flexural Members of Special Moment Frames

21.3.1 Scope

(1) Requirements of 21.5 shall be applied to special moment frame members subjected to seismic forces
and are proportioned primarily to resist flexure.

(2) These frame members shall also satisfy the following requirements.
Factored axial compressive force on the member shall not exceed     .
Clear span for member shall not be less than four times its effective depth.
The ratio of width to depth shall not be less than 0.3.
Width of member shall not be less than 250 mm.
Width of member shall not exceed the sum of the width of supporting member measured
perpendicular to the axis of the flexural member and 0.75 times the flexural member depth on
each side of the supporting member.

21.3.2 Longitudinal reinforcement

(1) At any section of a flexural member, except as provided in 6.3.2(3), for both top and bottom
reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement shall not be less than that given by Eq. (6.3.1) but not
less than    . The reinforcement ratio  shall not exceed 0.025. For both top and bottom
reinforcement, at least two continuous bars shall be provided.

(2) The positive moment strength at the face of a joint shall not be less than one-half of the negative
moment strength provided at the joint face. At any location of the member, both the positive and
negative moment strength shall not be less than one-fourth of the maximum moment strength
provided at the face of either joint.

(3) Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be permitted only if hoop or spiral reinforcement is
provided over the length. Spacing of the transverse reinforcement enclosing the lap-spliced bars
shall not exceed the lesser of  and 100 mm. Lap splices shall not be used within the joints,
within a distance of twice the member depth from the joint face, and where flexural yielding is
expected by analysis as a result of inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.

(4) Mechanical splices and welded splices shall conform to 21.2.6 and 21.2.7, respectively.

21.3.3 Transverse reinforcement

(1) Hoops shall be provided in the following regions of frame members.

Over a length equal to twice the member depth measured from the face of the supporting
member toward mid-span at both ends of the flexural member.
Over a length equal to twice the member depth on both sides of a section where flexural yielding
is likely to occur as a result of lateral displacements of the frame.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(2) The first hoop shall be located not more than 50 mm from the face of the supporting member.
Spacing of the hoops shall not exceed the smallest of , eight times the diameter of the smallest
longitudinal bars, 24 times the diameter of the hoop bars, and 300 mm.

(3) Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars enclosed by hoops shall have lateral support in
accordance with 5.5.2(3) .

(4) Where hoops are not required, stirrups with seismic hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a
distance not exceeding  throughout the length of the member.

(5) Stirrups or ties required to resist shear shall be hoops over the lengths of members as given in
21.3.3, 21.4.4, and 21.5.2.

(6) Two pieces of reinforcement, including a stirrup having seismic hooks at both ends and closed by
a cross-tie, shall be permitted to be used in flexural structural members. At the opposite sides of
the flexural member, the continuous cross-ties engaging the same longitudinal bar shall have their
90-degree hooks. If the longitudinal reinforcing bars secured by the cross-ties are confined by a
slab on only one side of the flexural frame member, the 90-degree hooks of the cross-ties shall be
placed on that side.

21.3.4 Shear strength demand requirements

(1) The design shear force   shall be determined based on the force equilibrium on the portions of
the member between joints faces assuming that moments of opposite sign corresponding to probable
flexural moment strength   act at the joint faces and that the member is loaded with the
factored gravity load along its span.

(2) Transverse reinforcement over the lengths defined in 21.3.3(1) shall be designed to resist shear
assuming     when both the following conditions occur.
The earthquake-induced shear force calculated based on (1) represents more than a half of the
maximum required shear strength within those lengths.
The factored axial force, including earthquake effects is less than    .

21.4 Special Moment Frame Members Subjected to Flexural and Axial Force

21.4.1 Scope

(1) Requirements of this section shall apply to special moment frame members that resist the seismic
load effects and exceeding a factored axial force (    ).

(2) These frame members shall satisfy the followings.

The shortest cross-sectional dimension, measured on a straight line passing through the geometric
centroid, shall not be less than 300 mm.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular dimension shall not be less
than 0.4.

21.4.2 Minimum flexural strength of columns

(1) The flexural strength of columns exceeding a factored axial force of (    ) shall satisfy
21.4.2(2) or (3). If (2) is not satisfied, the lateral strength and stiffness of the columns not
satisfying (2) framing into that joint shall be ignored when calculating strength and stiffness of the
structure. However these columns shall conform to 21.9.

(2) The flexural strengths of columns shall satisfy Eq. (21.4.1)

   ≥    (21.4.1)

where    is the sum of nominal flexural strengths of columns framing into the joint, calculated
at the faces of the joint. Column flexural strength shall be calculated for the factored axial force,
consistent with the direction of the lateral forces considered, resulting in the minimum flexural
strength.    is the sum of nominal flexural strengths of the beams framing into the joint,
evaluated at the faces of the joint. In T-beam construction, where the slab acts monolithically
with the beam and resists for flexure together, slab reinforcement within the effective slab width
defined in 3.4.8 shall be considered in the evaluation of the flexural strengths.

(3) Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column moments oppose the beam moments. Eq.
(21.4.1) shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both directions in the vertical plane of the
frame considered.

(4) If (2) is not satisfied at a joint, the columns subjected to reactions from that joint shall be
reinforced with transverse reinforcement based on the conditions of 21.4.4 (1), (2), (3) over their
whole length.

21.4.3 Longitudinal reinforcement

(1) Longitudinal reinforcement ratio  shall not be less than 0.01 and shall not exceed 0.06.

(2) Mechanical splices shall conform to 21.2.6 and welded splices shall conform to 21.2.7. Lap splices
shall be permitted only within the center half of the member length, shall be designed as tension
lap splices, and shall be enclosed with transverse reinforcement conforming to 21.4.4(2) and
21.4.4(3).

21.4.4 Transverse reinforcement

(1) Transverse reinforcement shall conform to the following requirements from (1) to (5), unless a
larger amount is required by 21.4.2(2) or 21.4.5.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop reinforcement  shall not be less than the value
calculated from Eq. (21.4.2) and shall not be less than the value calculated from Eq. (6.4.1).

     (21.4.2)

The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement shall not be less than the value
calculated by Eqs. (21.4.3) and (21.4.4)

              (21.4.3)

      (21.4.4)

Transverse reinforcement shall be provided by either single or overlapping hoops reinforcement.

Cross-ties of the same bar size and spacing as the hoops shall be permitted. Each end of the
cross-ties shall be fixed to longitudinal reinforcements, and consecutive cross-ties shall be
alternated with each end along the longitudinal reinforcement.
If the design strength of the member core exceeds the strength calculated from the requirement of
the design loading combinations including earthquake effects, it shall be permitted not to conform
to Eqs. (21.4.3) and (6.4.1).
Additional transverse reinforcement shall be provided if the concrete cover outside the confining
transverse reinforcement is greater than 100 mm. Concrete cover for the additional transverse
reinforcement shall not exceed 100 mm, and spacing of the additional transverse reinforcement
shall not exceed 300 mm.

(2) Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed the smallest of one-quarter of the minimum
member dimension, six times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar, and the value as defined
by Eq. (21.4.5)

         (21.4.5)

where   shall not exceed 150 mm and need not be taken less than 100 mm.

(3) Spacing of cross-ties or overlapping hoop reinforcements shall not exceed 350 mm on center within
the cross-section of a member.

(4) Transverse reinforcement conforming to the requirement of (1) through (3) shall be provided over a
length  from each joint face. Also, it shall be provided on both sides of any section where
flexural yielding is expected to occur as a result of inelastic lateral displacements of the frame. 
shall not be less than the largest of the depth of the member at the joint face or at the section
where flexural yielding is likely to occur, one-sixth of the clear span of the member, and 450 mm.

(5) Columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff members, such as walls, shall satisfy the followings.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

Transverse reinforcement as required in (1), (2), and (3) shall be provided over the full height at
all levels up to the level of discontinuity, if the factored axial force of the members by
earthquake effects exceeds (    ).
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided into the discontinued member at least  of the largest
longitudinal column bar, where  is determined in accordance with 6.4. Where the lower end of
the column terminates on a wall, the required transverse reinforcement determined in accordance
with (1), (2), and (3) shall extend into the wall at least  of the largest longitudinal column bar
at the point of termination. Where the column terminates on a footing or mat, the required
transverse reinforcement determined in accordance with (1), (2), and (3) shall extend at least 300
mm into the footing or mat.

(6) Where the transverse reinforcement, as required in (1), (2), and (3), is not provided throughout the full
length of the column, the remainder of the column length shall contain spiral or hoop reinforcement
with a center-to-center spacing not exceeding the lesser of six times the diameter of the longitudinal
column bars and 150 mm.

21.4.5 Requirements of shear strength demands

(1) The design shear force   shall be determined from considering the maximum forces that can be
generated at the faces of the joints at each end of the member. These joint forces shall be
determined using the maximum probable moment strengths   at each end of the member
associated with the range of factored axial loads acting on the member. The design shear force  
needs not exceed that determined from joint strengths based on   of the transverse members
framing into the joint, but, in any case,   shall not be less than the factored shear determined by
analysis of the structure.

(2) Transverse reinforcement over the length  specified in 21.4.4(4) shall be designed to resist shear
assuming    when both the following and are satisfied.
The shear force due to earthquake load effects, calculated in accordance with (1), is more than
1/2 of the maximum required shear strength within the length.
The factored axial force due to earthquake load effect is less than    .

21.5 Joints of Special Moment Frames

21.5.1 General requirements

(1) Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at the joint face shall be determined by assuming that
the stress in the flexural tensile reinforcement is   .

(2) Strength of a joint shall be determined according to the strength reduction factors specified in 3.3.3

(3) Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a column inside shall be extended to the opposite
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

face of the confined column core, and anchored in tension according to 21.5.4 in tension and
Chapter 8 in compression.

(4) Where longitudinal beam reinforcement extends through a beam-column joint, the column dimension
 parallel to the beam reinforcement shall satisfy Eq. (21.5.1) for normal-weight concrete.


For   ≤ MP a,  ≥  (21.5.1a)


For    MP a,  ≥  (21.5.1b)


For lightweight concrete, Eq. (21.5.2) shall be satisfied.

 
 ≥   ≥  (21.5.2)
 

21.5.2 Transverse reinforcement

(1) Transverse hoop reinforcement conforming to 21.5.4 shall be provided within the joint, if the joint
is not confined by structural members as specified in (2).

(2) Where beams frame into all four sides of the joint and where each beam width exceeds 3/4 the
column width, the amount of reinforcement specified in 21.4.4(1) shall be permitted to be reduced
by 1/2 within the overall depth of the shallowest framing member. In these regions, the spacing
required by 21.4.4(2) shall be permitted to be increased to 150 mm.

(3) Transverse reinforcement as required by 21.4.4 shall be provided in the joint, if longitudinal beam
reinforcement outside the column core is not confined by a beam framing into the joint.

21.5.3 Shear strength

(1) The nominal shear strength of the joint shall not exceed the following values for normal-weight
concrete.
For joints confined on all four faces    

For joints confined on three faces or on two opposite faces 

   
For other cases 
   

A member that frames into a joint face is considered to provide confinement to the face if at least
3/4 of the face is covered by the framing member. A joint is considered to be confined if such
members frame into all faces of the joint.

(2) For lightweight concrete, the nominal shear strength of the joint shall not exceed 3/4 of the values
specified in (1).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.5.4 Development length of bars in tension

(1) For normal-weight concrete, the development length  for bar sizes D6 through D35 with a
standard 90-degree hook shall not be less than the largest of 8 , 150 mm, and the length required
by Eq. (21.5.3).

    
   (21.5.3)

For lightweight concrete,  for a bar with a standard 90-degree hook shall not be less than the
largest of  , 190 mm, and 1.25 times the length required by Eq. (21.5.3). The 90-degree hook
shall be extended to a column or confined concrete of a boundary element.

(2) For bar sizes D6 through D35, the development length  for a straight bar shall not be less than 2.5
times the length specified in (1) if the depth of the concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar does not
exceed 300 mm, and shall not be less than 3.5 times the length specified in (1) if the depth of the
concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar exceeds 300 mm.

(3) Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass through the confined core of a column or boundary
element. Any portion of the development length not within the confined core shall be increased by
a factor of 1.6.

(4) The development lengths specified in (1) to (3) shall be multiplied by applicable factors in 8.2.2 if
epoxy-coated reinforcement is used.

21.6 Special Structural Walls and Coupling Beams

21.6.1 Scope

Requirements of this section shall be applied to special structural walls and coupling beams forming
part of the seismic-force-resisting system.

21.6.2 Reinforcement

(1) The distributed web reinforcement ratios  and  for structural walls shall not be less than
0.0025, except that if the design shear force does not exceed 
    , the minimum
reinforcement of structural walls shall be permitted to be reduced to the values required in 11.3.
Reinforcement spacing each way in structural walls shall not exceed 450 mm. Reinforcement
contributing to shear strength shall be continuous and shall be distributed across the shear plane.

(2) If the in-plane factored shear force in a wall is greater than 
    , at least two curtains of
reinforcement shall be used.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(3) All continuous reinforcement in structural walls shall be spliced and developed in accordance with
8.5.1 for reinforcement in tension, except as provided in the followings.
The effective depth  in 8.5.1(2) shall be allowed to be taken as  .
The requirements of 8.5.2, 8.5.3 and 8.5.4 need not be considered.
At locations where yielding of longitudinal reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of
displacements due to lateral load effects, development lengths of longitudinal reinforcement shall
be 1.25 times the values calculated for the specified yield strength in tension.
Mechanical splices and welded splices of reinforcement shall conform to 21.2.6 and 21.2.7.

21.6.3 Design forces

The factored shear force   shall be determined from the lateral load analysis in accordance with the
factored loads and load combinations.

21.6.4 Shear strength

(1) The nominal shear strength of structural walls shall not exceed the value calculated by Eq. (21.6.1).

      
       (21.6.1)

where the coefficient   is 1/4 for   ≤ , 1/6 for   ≥ , and varies linearly
between 1/4 and 1/6 for  ≤   ≤ 

(2) In (1), the value of   used to calculate   for segments of a wall shall be the greater of the
ratios for the entire wall and the segment of the wall considered.

(3) Walls shall have distributed shear reinforcement in two orthogonal directions in the plane of the wall.
The reinforcement ratio  shall not be less than the reinforcement ratio  , if   does not exceed
2.0.

(4) In case of all vertical wall segments resisting a common lateral force, the nominal shear strength
shall not be taken greater than      , where   is the gross sectional area in the
direction of shear force. For an individual vertical wall segment, the nominal shear strength shall
not be taken greater than (      , where   is the gross sectional area of the individual
vertical wall segment considered.

(5) For horizontal wall segments and coupling beams, the nominal shear strength shall not be taken
greater than 
  , where  is the gross sectional area of a horizontal wall segment or
  

coupling beam.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.6.5 Design for flexure and axial force

(1) Structural walls and portions of such walls subjected to combined flexure and axial force shall be
designed in accordance with 6.2.1 and 6.2.2. However, 6.2.1(2) for the nonlinear strain requirements
and 6.2.2(5) shall not be applied. Concrete and longitudinal reinforcement within effective flange
widths, boundary elements, and the wall web shall be considered effective, and the effects of
openings shall also be considered.

(2) Unless a more detailed analysis is conducted, effective flange widths of flanged sections shall be
the lesser of 1/2 of the distance to an adjacent wall web and 1/4 of the total wall height.

21.6.6 Boundary elements of special structural walls

(1) The need for special boundary elements at the edges of structural walls shall be evaluated in
accordance with (2) or (3). The requirements of (4) and (5) shall also be satisfied.

(2) This section shall apply to walls or wall piers that are effectively continuous from the base of the
structure to the top of the walls and are designed to have a single critical section for flexure and
axial force. Walls not satisfying the following requirements shall be designed in accordance with
(3).
Compression zones shall be reinforced with special boundary elements where the following is
satisfied.


≥  (21.6.2)
  

where   shall not be taken less than 0.007.

Where special boundary elements are required by (1), reinforcement of the special boundary
element shall extend vertically from the critical section at least the greater of  or     .

(3) Structural walls not designed in accordance with (2) shall have special boundary elements at
boundaries and edges around openings of structural walls where the maximum extreme fiber
compressive stress, corresponding to load combinations including earthquake effects, exceeds   .
The special boundary element shall be permitted to be discontinued where the calculated
compressive stress is less than   . Stresses shall be calculated for the factored loads using a
linearly elastic model and gross sectional properties. For walls with flanges, an effective flange
width shall be the lesser of 1/2 of the distance to an adjacent wall web and 1/4 of the total wall
height.

(4) Where special boundary elements are required by (2) or (3), through shall be satisfied.
The range of the boundary element shall be taken the larger of    and  from the
extreme compression fiber.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

extreme compression fiber.

For walls of flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange width in
compression and extend at least 300 mm into the web.
Transverse reinforcement of the boundary element shall satisfy the requirements from 21.4.4(1)
through 21.4.4(3). However, Eq. (21.4.3) needs not be satisfied and spacing of transverse
reinforcement in accordance with 21.4.4(2) shall be 1/3 of the least dimension of the boundary
element.
Transverse reinforcement shall be extended into the support a distance not less than the
development length in tension of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the special boundary
element. If the special boundary element connects with a footing or mat, transverse reinforcement
shall extend at least 300 mm into the footing or mat.
Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall be anchored to develop the specified yield strength
  within the confined core of the boundary element.
For longitudinal reinforcement of the boundary element, mechanical splices shall conform to 21.2.6,
and welded splices shall conform to 21.2.7.

(5) Where special boundary elements are not required by (2) and (3), the followings of and shall be
satisfied.
When the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the wall boundary is larger than   , boundary
transverse reinforcement shall satisfy 21.4.4(1) , 21.4.4(3), and 21.6.6(4) . The longitudinal
spacing of boundary transverse reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm.
Except where the factored shear force  in the plane of the wall is less than 
   ,  

horizontal reinforcement at the edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall have a
standard hook engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in
U-stirrups with the same diameter and spacing as the horizontal reinforcement.

(6) For longitudinal reinforcement of the boundary element, welded and mechanical splices shall satisfy
21.2.6 and 21.2.7.

21.6.7 Coupling beams

(1) For coupling beams with a slenderness ratio of   ≥ , the requirements of 21.3 shall be
satisfied. If it is demonstrated by analysis that the beam has adequate lateral stability, the
requirements of 21.3.1(2) and 21.3.1(2) need not be satisfied.

(2) Coupling beams with a slenderness ratio of     shall be permitted to be reinforced with two
intersecting groups of diagonally-placed reinforcements symmetrical about the mid-span.

(3) Unless it can be shown that loss of stiffness and strength of the coupling beams will not impair
the vertical load-carrying capacity of the structure, the egress from the structure, or the integrity of
nonstructural components and their connections to the structure, coupling beams with an aspect ratio
of     and with a factored shear force of   
    shall be reinforced with two
 
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(4) For coupling beams reinforced with two intersecting groups of diagonally-placed bars symmetrical
about the mid-span shall satisfy the followings.
Each group of diagonal bars shall consist of at least 4 bars, and the distance measured out-to-out
dimension of transverse reinforcement shall not be less than   in the direction parallel to  ,
and, for the plane section of the beam, shall not be less than   in perpendicular of the
diagonal bars.
The nominal shear strength   shall be calculated by Eq. (21.6.3).

      sin ≤ 

    (21.6.3)

Each group of diagonal bars shall be enclosed by transverse reinforcement satisfying 21.4.4(1), (3),
and Eq. (21.4.5). Also, the spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed 6 times the
diameter of the bar. To calculate   for Eqs. (6.4.1) and (6.4.3), the minimum concrete cover as
required by 5.4 shall be assumed on all four sides of each group of diagonal bars.
The diagonal bars shall be developed for tension in the wall. In this case, the development length
shall be calculated by 1.25 times yield strength of reinforcements.
The diagonal bars shall be permitted to contribute to the nominal flexural strength of the coupling
beam.
For the transverse or parallel reinforcement to longitudinal axis, the total area shall not be smaller
than   in each direction and the spacing shall not exceed 300 mm.

21.6.8 Construction joints

All construction joints in structural walls shall conform to Concrete Standard Specification, and contact
surfaces shall be roughened in accordance with 7.7.3(1).

21.6.9 Discontinuous walls

Columns supporting discontinuous structural walls shall be reinforced in accordance with 21.4.4(5).

21.7 Structural Diaphragms and Trusses

21.7.1 Scope

Floor and roof slabs acting as structural diaphragms to transmit earthquake forces shall be designed in
accordance with this section. This section shall also apply to trusses forming part of the
seismic-force-resisting system and struts, connectors, chords, and collectors transmitting loads induced by
earthquake motions.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.7.2 Cast-in-place composite-topping slab diaphragms

A cast-in-place composite topping slab on a precast floor or roof shall be permitted to be used as a
structural diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place topping slab is reinforced and the surface of the
previously hardened concrete on which the topping slab is placed is clean, free of laitance, and
intentionally roughened.

21.7.3 Cast-in-place topping slab diaphragms

If a cast-in-place topping slab is designed and detailed to independently resist the design earthquake
forces, composite action between the topping slab and the precast floor element shall not be required.

21.7.4 Minimum thickness of diaphragms

(1) The thickness of concrete slabs and composite topping slabs acting as structural diaphragms used to
transmit earthquake forces shall not be less than 50 mm.

(2) The thickness of topping slabs placed over precast floor or roof elements, which act as structural
diaphragms but do not rely on composite action with the precast elements to resist the design
earthquake forces, shall not be less than 65 mm.

21.7.5 Reinforcement

(1) The minimum reinforcement ratio for structural diaphragms shall be in accordance with 5.7. Spacing
of reinforcement each way in floor or roof systems shall not exceed 450 mm, except for
post-tensioned slabs. Where welded wire reinforcement is used as the distributed reinforcement to
resist shear in topping slabs placed over precast floor and roof elements, the wires parallel to the
span of the precast elements shall be spaced not less than 250 mm on center. Reinforcement
provided for shear strength shall be continuous and shall be distributed uniformly across the shear
plane.

(2) Bonded tendons used as reinforcement in chords or collectors of diaphragms shall be designed so
that the stress due to design earthquake forces shall not exceed 420 MPa. If a seismic load path is
provided, precompression from unbonded tendons shall be permitted to resist diaphragm design
forces.

(3) Structural truss elements, struts, connectors, chords, and collectors with compressive stresses
exceeding   at any section shall have transverse reinforcement satisfying 21.4.4(1), (2), and (3)
over the length of the elements. The specified transverse reinforcement shall be permitted to be
discontinued at a section where the calculated compressive stress is less than   . The
compressive stress shall be calculated for the factored forces using a linearly elastic model based
on the gross section of elements considered.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(4) All continuous reinforcement in diaphragms, trusses, struts, connectors, chords, and collectors shall
be spliced or developed in accordance with 21.6.4 for the specified yield strength in tension.

(5) Type 2 splices specified in 21.2.6(1) shall be used where mechanical splices are used to transfer
forces between the diaphragm and the vertical members of the seismic-force-resisting system.

21.7.6 Design forces

The earthquake design forces for diaphragms shall be permitted to be obtained by the lateral-force analysis
for design load combinations.

21.7.7 Shear strength

(1) Nominal shear strength   of structural diaphragms shall not exceed the value calculated by Eq.
(21.7.1).


 
            (21.7.1)


(2) For precast concrete floor or roof cast-in-place composite topping slab diaphragms and cast-in-place
composite topping slab diaphragms, the values of nominal shear strength   shall not exceed Eq.
(21.7.2).

        (21.7.2)

Where   is based on the topping slab thickness. The required web reinforcement shall be
uniformly distributed over the entire section in both directions.

(3) Nominal shear strength shall not exceed 

    , where   is the gross sectional area of
the diaphragm.

21.7.8 Boundary elements of structural diaphragms

(1) Boundary elements of a structural diaphragm shall be proportioned to resist the sum of the factored
axial forces acting in the plane of the diaphragm and the load obtained by dividing the factored
moment at the section by the distance between the boundary elements of the diaphragm at that
section.

(2) Splices of tensile reinforcement in all diaphragm boundary elements and collectors shall develop the
specified yield strength. Mechanical and welded splices shall conform to 21.2.6 and 21.2.7, respectively.

(3) Longitudinal reinforcement detailing for chord and collector elements at splices and anchorage zones
shall satisfy the followings.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

Center-to-center spacing of at least three longitudinal bar diameters, but not less than 40 mm,
and concrete clear cover of at least two and 1/2 longitudinal bar diameters, but not less than
50 mm.
Transverse reinforcement required by 7.4.3(3), except as required in 21.7.5(3).

21.7.9 Construction joints

All construction joints in diaphragms shall conform to Concrete Standard Specification, and contact
surfaces shall be roughened in accordance with 7.7.3(1).

21.8 Foundations

21.8.1 Scope

Foundations resisting earthquake-induced forces or transferring earthquake-induced forces between the

structure and ground shall be in accordance with 21.8 and other applicable code provisions.

21.8.2 Footings, foundation mats, and pile caps

(1) Longitudinal reinforcement of columns and structural walls resisting forces induced by earthquake
effects shall extend into the footing, mat, or pile cap, and shall be fully developed for tension at
the interface.

(2) Columns designed assuming fixed-end conditions at the foundation shall comply with (1). If hooks
are required, longitudinal reinforcement resisting flexure shall have 90-degree hooks near the bottom
of the foundation with the free end of the bars oriented toward the center of the column.

(3) For columns or boundary members of special RC structural walls that have an edge within 1/2 of
the footing depth from an edge of the footing, transverse reinforcement in accordance with 21.4.4
shall be provided below the top of the footing. The transverse reinforcement shall extend into the
footing, mat, or pile cap, and shall be developed for   in tension.

(4) Where earthquake effects create uplift forces in boundary elements of special RC structural walls or
columns, flexural reinforcement shall be provided in the top of the footing, mat, or pile cap to
resist the design loads, and the flexural reinforcement shall satisfy the requirements specified in
6.3.2.

(5) Usage of structural plain concrete in footings and basement walls shall be in accordance with
Chapter 19.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.8.3 Grade beams and slabs-on-ground

(1) Grade beams, which are designed to act horizontal ties between pile caps or footings, shall have
continuous longitudinal reinforcement. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be developed within or
beyond the supported column, and shall be anchored within the pile cap or footing at all
discontinuous sections.

(2) Grade beams, which are designed to act as horizontal ties between pile caps or footings, shall be
sized so that the smallest cross-sectional dimension is not less than the clear spacing between
connected columns divided by 20 but not greater than 450 mm. Spacing of closed ties shall not
exceed the lesser of one-half the smallest orthogonal cross-sectional dimension and 300 mm.

(3) Grade beams and beams, which are part of a mat foundation subjected to flexure from columns
which are part of the seismic-force-resisting system, shall be in accordance with 21.2.

(4) Slabs-on-ground, which resist earthquake forces from walls or columns which are part of the
seismic-force-resisting system, shall be designed as structural diaphragms in accordance with 21.7.
The structural drawing shall clearly indicate that the slab-on-ground is a structural diaphragm and
part of the seismic-force-resisting system.

21.8.4 Piles, piers, and caissons

(1) This section shall apply to concrete piles, piers, and caissons supporting earthquake-resistant
structures.

(2) For piles, piers, and caissons resisting tension loads, continuous longitudinal reinforcement shall be
provided over the length resisting design tension forces. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be
detailed to transfer tension forces within the pile cap to support structural members.

(3) Where tension forces induced by earthquake effects are transferred between the pile cap or mat
foundation and precast pile by reinforcement grouted or post-installed in the top of the pile, the
grouting system shall be demonstrated by test to develop at least 125 % of the design specified
yield strength of the bar.

(4) For piles, piers, and caissons, transverse reinforcementin accordance with 21.4.4 shall be provided at
the locations of and .
At the top of the member, at least 5 times of the member cross-sectional dimension, but not less
than 2 m below the bottom of the pile cap
For the portion of piles in soil that is not capable of providing lateral support or exposed to air
and water, along the entire unsupported length plus the length required in

(5) For precast concrete driven piles, the length where transverse reinforcement is provided shall be
sufficient to consider the potential variations in the elevation of pile tips.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(6) For concrete piles, piers, and caissons in foundations supporting short and wide bearing walls with
one or two stories, transverse reinforcement need not satisfy requirements of (4) and (5).

(7) Pile caps incorporating batter piles shall be designed to resist the full compressive strength of the
batter piles acting as short columns. For the portion of the piles in soil that is not capable of
providing lateral support or exposed to air or water, slenderness effects of the batter piles shall be
considered.

21.9 Frame Members Not Designated as Part of The Seismic-force-resisting System

21.9.1 Scope

(1) Frame members assumed not to contribute to lateral resistance shall be designed in accordance with
21.9.2 or 21.9.3 depending on the magnitude of moments induced in those members when
subjected to the design displacement. If effects of the design displacement are not explicitly
checked, the requirements of 21.9.3 shall be satisfied.

21.9.2 When induced sectional forces under design displacements do not exceed the design member
strength.

(1) Where the induced moments and shears by the combined effects of factored gravity loads and
design displacements of 21.9.1 do not exceed the design moment and shear strength of the frame
member, the requirements of (2), (3), and (4) shall be satisfied. In this case, the gravity load
combinations of      or 0.9D, whichever is critical, shall be used. The live load
factor shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.5 for areas where L is greater than 5.0 kN/m2, except
for garages.

(2) Requirements of 21.3.2(1) shall be satisfied for members with factored axial forces not greater than
   . Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not be greater than  along the full length
of the member.

(3) In cases of members with factored axial forces exceeding    , requirements of 21.4.3,
21.4.4(1) , 21.4.4(3), and 21.4.5 shall be satisfied. Along the full member length, maximum tie
spacing shall be   . Spacing   shall not be greater than the lesser of six diameters of the
smallest longitudinal bar enclosed and 150 mm.

(4) In cases of members with factored axial forces exceeding   , requirements in (3) shall be
satisfied and amount of transverse reinforcement shall be one-half of that required by 21.4.4(1), and
shall not be greater than   for the full column length.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

21.9.3 When the induced sectional forces under design displacements exceed design member strength.

(1) Requirements of (2), (3), and (4) shall be satisfied in case the induced moments and shears under
design displacements of 21.9.1 exceed the design flexural strength, and shear strength of the frame
member, or where the induced moments are not computed.

(2) Materials shall satisfy 21.2.4 and 21.2.5. Requirements of 21.2.6 for mechanical splices and
requirements of 21.2.7(1) for welded splices shall be satisfied.

(3) Requirements of 21.3.2(1) and 21.3.4 shall be satisfied for members with factored axial forces not
exceeding    . Transverse reinforcement spacing shall not exceed  along the full member
length.

(4) Requirements of 21.4.3(1), 21.4.4, 21.4.5, and 21.5.2(1) shall be satisfied for members with factored
axial forces exceeding    .

21.9.4 Precast concrete frames

(1) Precast concrete frame members and their connections assumed not to contribute to lateral resistance shall
satisfy (2), (3), and (4) in addition to 21.9.1, 21.9.2, and 21.9.3.

(2) Transverse reinforcement specified in 21.9.2(2) shall be provided along the entire column height,
including the depth of beams.

(3) Structural integrity reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with 16.3.

(4) Bearing length at the support of a beam shall be at least 50 mm longer than the calculated value
from 6.8 using bearing strength.

21.10 Requirements for Intermediate Moment Frames

21.10.1 Scope

This section shall apply to intermediate moment frames.

21.10.2 Classification of members for design code application

(1) In case of factored axial forces   is not greater than     , reinforcement of frame members
shall conform to 21.10.4.

(2) In case of factored axial forces exceed     , reinforcement shall conform to 21.10.5, unless
spiral reinforcement is provided as specified in Eq. (6.4.1).
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(3) In case of two-way slabs without beams are considered as part of a frame resisting earthquake
effects (  ), reinforcement to resist the induced moments by earthquake effects shall conform to
21.10.6 in any span.

21.10.3 Design shear strength

(1) Design shear strength of beams, columns, and two-way slabs resisting earthquake effects shall
satisfy the following (2) or (3).

(2) Design shear strength shall be at least the sum of the shear associated with development of
nominal moment strengths of the member at each restrained end of the clear span and the shear
calculated for factored gravity loads.

(3) Design shear strength shall not be less than the maximum shear force calculated from design load
combinations including the earthquake effect, which is taken as twice that prescribed by the seismic
design code.

21.10.4 Beams

(1) At the face of the joint, the positive moment strength shall be at least one-third the negative
moment strength. At any section along the length of the beam, both the negative and positive
strength shall not be less than 1/5 the maximum moment strength provided at the face of either
joint.

(2) Hoops shall be provided over the length of at least two times the beam depth measured from the
face of the supporting member toward the mid-span. The first hoop shall be located not more than
50 mm from the face of the supporting member. Hoop spacing shall not exceed the smallest of
, eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, 24 times the diameter of
the hoop bar, and 300 mm.

(3) Stirrup spacing shall not exceed  along the length of the beam,

21.10.5 Columns

(1) Columns shall be spirally reinforced in accordance with 5.5.2 or shall conform to the following (2),
(3), and (4). (5) shall apply to all columns.

(2) At both ends of a column, hoops shall be provided at a spacing of   over a length 
measured from the joint face. The spacing  shall not exceed the smallest of eight times the
diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed, 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar, one-half
of the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the column, and 300 mm. And the length  shall
not be less than the greatest of one-sixth of the clear span of the column, maximum cross-sectional
dimension of the column, and 450 mm.
KCI Code 2012 Chapter 21 Special Provisions for Seismic Design

(3) The first hoop shall be located not more than    from the joint face.

(4) Spacing of transverse reinforcement outside the length  shall be in accordance with 5.5.2 and
7.4.2(1).

(5) Reinforcement at joints shall conform to 7.11(2).

21.10.6 Two-way slabs without beams

(1) Factored slab moment at the support including earthquake effects shall be calculated for load
combinations specified in Eq. (3.3.5) and (3.3.8). Reinforcement to resist   shall be placed
within the column strip specified in 10.3.1(2).

(2) Effective slab width for exterior and corner connections shall not extend a distance greater than  ,
which is measured perpendicular to the slab span, beyond the column face.

(3) At least one-half of the reinforcement in the column strip at the support shall be provided within
the effective slab width (  ).

(4) At least one-quarter of the top reinforcement at the support in the column strip shall be continuous
throughout the span.

(5) Continuous bottom reinforcement in the column strip shall be at least one-third of the top
reinforcement at the support in the column strip.

(6) At least one-half of all bottom middle strip reinforcement and all bottom column strip reinforcement
at the mid-span shall be continuous, and shall develop the design specified yield strength at the
face of the support as defined in 10.4.2(5).

(7) At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top and bottom reinforcement at the support shall be
developed at the face of the support as defined in 10.4.2(5).

(8) At the critical sections of the column specified in 7.12.1(3), two-way shear induced by factored
gravity loads shall not exceed   , where   shall be calculated in accordance with 7.12.2(2)
for non-prestressed members or 7.12.2(3) for prestressed members. This requirement shall be
permitted not to be satisfied if the unbalanced flexural strength caused by earthquake effects is not
greater than 1/2 of the unbalanced flexural strength    , which is calculated by 7.12.7.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

APPENDIX Strut-and-Tie Models

I.1 General

I.1.1 Scope

This chapter is used for a rational design of disturbed regions in concrete members. The
force-equilibrium and displacement compatibility shall be satisfied in the calculations of the design.

I.1.2 Notations

 :Shear span, distance between loading point and support, mm

 : Thickness of member, mm

 : Effective cross sectional area of strut, mm2

 : Area of a face at a nodal zone or a cross-sectional area of a element consisting of a nodal

zone , mm2

  : Area of prestressing steel tie, mm2

  : Area of -th vertical or horizontal reinforcement crossing a strut, mm2

  : Area of reinforcement tie, mm2

 ′ : Area of reinforcement strut, mm2

 : Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, mm

  : Effective compressive strength of the concrete in a strut or a nodal zone, MPa

  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

′ : Stress in compression reinforcement, MPa

  : Effective stress in prestressing steel, MPa

 : Stress in reinforcement under service loads, MPa

 : Specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

 : Nominal axial strength of a strut, tie, or nodal zone, N

 : Nominal axial strength at a face of a nodal zone, N

 : Nominal axial strength of a strut, N

 : Nominal axial strength of a tie, N

 : Factored axial force acting in a strut, tie, bearing area, or nodal zone, N

 : Clear span length, mm

 : Spacing of vertical or horizontal reinforcements in the -th layer adjacent to the surface of
the member, mm

 : Effective width of a strut, mm

 : Effective width of a tie, mm

  m ax : Maximum effective width of a tie used in determination of the shape of a nodal zone, mm

 : Factor to account for the effects of cracking and confining reinforcement on the compressive
strength of the concrete in a strut

 : Factor to account for the effect of the anchorage of ties on the compressive strength of a
nodal zone

 : Angle between vertical or horizontal reinforcement and the axis of the strut in -th
reinforcement layer crossing a strut

  : Incremental stress in a prestressing steel due to factored loads, MPa

 : Modification factor addressing the reduced mechanical properties of lightweight concrete 3.4.4

 : Strength reduction factor

 : Strength reduction factor of a strut 0.75

 : Strength reduction factor of a tie 0.85

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

I.1.3 Definitions

· B-region
The portion of a member in which the plane sections assumption of beam theory can be applied.

· D-region
In a member, a force discontinuity portion within a certain distance from a concentrated load, a
geometric discontinuity where the cross-section significantly varies, and the portion of the member in
which the plane sections assumption of beam theory cannot be applied.

· Strut-and-tie model
A truss model for design of a structural member or a D-region in a member, which consists of
struts, ties, and nodes, to transfer a section force to supports or adjacent B-regions.

· Strut
A compression element in a strut-and-tie model, idealizing a prismatic shaped or a fan-shaped
compression field.

· Tie
A tension element in a strut-and-tie model.

· Node
A point where the center lines of not less than three elements of strut, tie, and concentrated load
intersect

· Nodal zone
The volume of a node where the forces of struts and ties are transferred : triangle or polygons
shape in 2-dimensional model or finite solid zone in 3-dimensional model

I.2 Design Procedure of Strut-and-Tie Model

I.2.1 General

(1) Structural concrete members or D-regions shall be permitted to be designed by using an idealized
truss model.

(2) The truss model shall consist of struts, ties, and nodes.

(3) The truss model shall transfer all factored loads to the supports, compressive stress block, tension
ties, or adjacent B-regions.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

I.2.2 Design procedure

(1) Strut-and-tie model design of a concrete structural member or a D-region shall follow the design
procedure in (2) through (6).

(2) The target design area shall be defined, and the initial conditions for the design of the target area
shall be determined.

(3) A strut-and-tie model shall be prepared for the design of the target area.

(4) The sectional forces of the struts and ties shall be calculated by structural analysis of strut-and-tie
model. In structural analysis, the area of struts and ties shall be determined such that the element
forces are less than the effective strengths of the struts and ties which are calculated by I.3. The
required area of struts and ties shall not be greater than the maximum allowable area determined
from the target area and the geometrical shape of the strut-and-tie model. Otherwise, redesign shall
be performed from (3) with modified initial design conditions.

(5) The strength of nodal zones shall be investigated in accordance with I.5. Unless the strength of
nodal zones is satisfied, the strength of nodal zones shall be reevaluated changing the anchorage
method of reinforcement tie and the dimensions of bearing plate, or redesign shall be performed
from (3) with modified the initial design conditions.

(6) The required area of steel shall be determined considering the effective strength of ties specified in
I.4.1. The layout and anchorage of reinforcement shall satisfy the provisions of I.4.2 and I.4.3.

I.2.3 Design principle

Design of struts, ties, and nodal zones shall follow Eq. (I.2.1)

  ≥   (I.2.1)

where  is the factored force acting in a strut, a tie, or a face of a nodal zone;  is the
nominal strength of the strut, tie, or nodal zone; and  is the strength reduction factor. The
strength reduction factor of strut,  , is 0.75 and the strength reduction factor of tie,  , is 0.85.

I.3 Axial Strength of Struts

I.3.1 Determination of axial strength

The nominal compressive strength of a concrete strut shall be taken as the smaller value of the
strengths of the two ends determined from the following equation.

 ≥     (I.3.1)
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

where   is the minimum cross-sectional area at each end of the strut, and   is the effective
compressive strength of the concrete strut given in I.3.2.

I.3.2 Effective compressive strength

(1) The effective compressive strength of concrete strut shall be determined by Eq. (I.3.2), or shall be
permitted to be determined by tests and adequate numerical analysis considering various parameters
affecting the effective compressive strength.

       (I.3.2)

(2)   in Eq. (I.3.2) shall be determined as one of the following values considering each condition.
For a strut with uniform cross-sectional area over the entire length 1.0
In case of bottle shaped struts where the area of the mid-length is greater than the area of the
ends, when reinforcement layout specified in I.3.3,   =0.75; otherwise,   =0.6. The value of 
is defined in 3.4.4.
For concrete struts in a tension element or the tension flange of a concrete member 0.40
For all other cases 0.60

I.3.3 Design details

(1) If the value of   specified in I.3.2(2) is used, the axis of the strut shall be crossed by
reinforcement proportioned to resist the transverse tensile force resulting from the compression stress
spreading in the strut. It shall be permitted to assume the compressive force in the strut spreads at
a slope of 2 longitudinal to 1 transverse to the axis of the strut.

(2) For   not greater than 40 MPa, the requirement of I.3.3 shall be permitted to be satisfied when
the axis of the strut is crossed by layers of reinforcement that satisfy Eq. (I.3.3)

 

 

  ≥ 

where   is the total area of reinforcement at spacing   in the -th layer of reinforcement
crossing a strut at an angle  to the axis of the strut.

(3) The confining reinforcement required in I.3.3 shall be placed in either two orthogonal directions, or
in one direction. When the reinforcement is in only one direction, the angle shall not be less than
40 degrees.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

I.3.4 Reinforcement effect

(1) The use of compression reinforcement shall be permitted to increase the strength of a strut.
Compression reinforcement shall be properly anchored, parallel to the axis of the strut, located
within the strut, and enclosed in ties or spirals satisfying the provisions of lateral reinforcements
for compression member.

(2) The strength of a strut with longitudinal reinforcement can be defined as follows.

         ′  ′ (I.3.4)

I.4 Tensile Strength of Ties

I.4.1 Determination of strength

The nominal strength of a tie,  , shall be taken as

               (I.4.1)

where       shall not exceed   , and   is zero for nonprestressed members. In Eq.
(I.4.1), it shall be permitted to take   equal to 420 MPa for bonded prestressed reinforcement
and equal to 70 MPa for unbonded prestressed reinforcement. Other values of   shall be
permitted when justified by numerical analysis.

I.4.2 Center line

The axis of reinforcements in a tie shall coincide with the axis of the tie in the strut-and-tie model.

I.4.3 Anchorage

(1) Tie reinforcement shall be anchored by mechanical devices, post-tensioning anchorage devices,
standard hooks, or straight bar development as required by (2) through (3).

(2) In a node, the difference between the tie force on one side of the node and the tie force on the
other side, shall be transferred to the node.

(3) At a nodal zone anchoring a tie, the tie force shall be transferred within the inside of the nodal
zone which is defined by the intersection between the boundary of the extended nodal zone and
the centroid of the reinforcements.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

(4) At a nodal zones anchoring two or more ties, the tie force in each direction shall be transferred
within the inside of the nodal zone which is defined by the intersection between the boundary of
the extended nodal zone and the centroid of the reinforcements.

(5) The web reinforcement required by I.3.3 shall be anchored in accordance with the provisions for
anchorage of web reinforcement.

I.5 Strength of Nodal Zones

I.5.1 Determination of axial strength

The strength of a nodal zone is determined by a method assuring the requirement of Eq. (I.2.1), using
the nominal compressive strength defined in I.5.2. Otherwise, the strength of a nodal zone shall be
permitted to be determined by nonlinear numerical analysis that is able to evaluate the safety of nodal
zones.

I.5.2 Nominal Strength

The nominal strength of a nodal zone,  , shall be determined as follows.

      (I.5.1)

where   is the effective compressive strength of the concrete in the nodal zone as given in
I.5.3, and   is the area of the boundary surface of the nodal zone taken perpendicular to the
line of an action  or the area of the boundary surface of the nodal zone, taken perpendicular
to the line of the resultant force when combined forces are applied.

I.5.3. Effective Compressive Strength

(1) Unless confining reinforcement is provided within the nodal zone and its effect is verified by tests
and numerical analysis, the effective compressive strength in a boundary surface of a nodal zone
shall not exceed the value given by

       (I.5.2)

where the value of   is given in (2)

(2) The value of   in Eq. (I.5.2) shall be determined in accordance with through .
In nodal zones bounded by struts or bearing areas, or both 1.0
In nodal zones anchoring a tie 0.80
In nodal zones anchoring two or more ties 0.60
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅰ Strut-and-Tie Models

I.5.4 Three-dimensional Node

In a three-dimensional strut-and-tie model, the area of each boundary face of a nodal zone shall not be
less than that given in I.5.2, and the shape of each boundary face of the nodal zones shall be similar
to the shape of the projection of the end of the struts connected to the nodal zone.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

APPENDIX Anchoring to Concrete

.1 General

.1.1 Scope

(1) Appendix provides design requirements for anchors in concrete used to transmit structural loads
by means of tension, shear, or a combination of tension and shear between connected structural
elements or between safety-related attachments and structural elements. In this appendix, safety
factors specified are intended for in-service conditions, rather than for short-term handling and
construction conditions.

(2) This appendix applies both to cast-in and to post-installed anchors. Specialty inserts, through-bolts,
multiple anchors connected to a single steel plate at the embedded end of the anchors, adhesive or
grouted anchors, and powder or pneumatic actuated nails or bolts are not included in this appendix.
Reinforcement used as part of the embedment shall be designed in accordance with other parts of
this Code.

(3) Headed studs and headed bolts which have a pullout strength equal to or greater than   in
uncracked concrete are included, where   is given in Eq. ( .4.13).

(4) Hooked bolts are included if they have a pullout strength equal to or greater than   without
the friction in uncracked concrete, where   is given in Eq. (II.4.14).

(5) Applicability of post-installed anchors to concrete shall be assessed before usage.

(6) The provisions of this appendix are not applied to the design of anchors under high cycle fatigue
or impact loads.

.1.2 Notations

  : Net bearing area of the head of stud or anchor bolt, mm2

 : Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors for determining tensile
strengths, mm2

   : In case the anchor is not interfered by edge distance or spacing, projected concrete failure
area of a single anchor for determining tensile strengths, mm2

   : Effective cross-sectional area of anchor under tension, mm2

   : Effective cross-sectional area of anchor under shear, mm2

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

 : Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors for determining shear
strengths, mm2

   : In case the anchor is not interfered by corner influence, spacing, or member thickness,
projected concrete failure area of a single anchor determining shear strengths, mm2

 : In case of no supplementary reinforcement to control splitting, critical edge distance required for
anchors installed in uncracked concrete to develop the basic concrete breakout strength, mm

 m ax : Maximum distance from center of an anchor shaft to the concrete edge, mm

 m in : Minimum distance from center of an anchor shaft to the concrete edge, mm

 : Distance from the center of an anchor shaft to the concrete, mm; If shear is applied to
anchor,  is taken in the direction of the applied shear. If tension is applied to the
anchor,  is the minimum edge distance.

 : Distance from center of an anchor shaft to the concrete edge in the perpendicular direction to
 , mm

 : Outer diameter of anchor or shaft diameter of headed stud, headed bolt, or hooked bolt, mm

′  : Substituted value for  of large-diameter anchors, mm

 : Distance from the inner surface of the shaft of a J- or L-bolt to the outer tip of J- or
L-bolt, mm

′  : Eccentricity of tension load applied to a group of anchors. distance between resultant tension
load on a group of anchors under tension and the centroid of the group of anchors, mm;
′  is always positive (+).

′  : Eccentricity of shear load applied to a group of anchors. distance between resultant shear
load on a group of anchors under shear and the centroid of the group of anchors, mm; ′ 
is always positive (+).
  : Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa

  : Specified tensile strength of anchor steel, MPa

  : Specified yield strength of anchor steel, MPa

 : Thickness of member where an anchor is installed (parallel to anchor axis), mm

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

 : Effective embedment depth of anchor, mm

 : Coefficient for basic concrete breakout strength in tension

 : Coefficient for pryout strength

 : Bearing length of anchor under shear, mm

 : Number of anchors in a group

 : Basic concrete breakout strength of a single anchor under tension in cracked concrete, N

  : Nominal concrete breakout strength of a single anchor under tension, N

  : Nominal concrete breakout strength of a group of anchors under tension, N

 : Nominal strength in tension, N

 : Pullout strength of a single anchor under tension in cracked concrete, N

  : Nominal pullout strength of a single anchor under tension, N

  : Nominal strength of a single anchor or a group of anchors under tension when the strength
is governed by the steel strength, N

  : Side-face blowout strength of a single anchor, N

  : Side-face blowout strength of a group of anchors, N

  : Factored tensile force applied to a anchor or to a group of anchors, N

 : Center-to-center spacing of anchors, mm,

 : : Basic concrete breakout strength of a single anchor under shear in cracked concrete, N

  : Nominal concrete breakout strength of a single anchor under shear, N

  : Nominal concrete breakout strength of a group of anchors under shear, N

  : Nominal concrete pryout strength of a single anchor, N

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

  : Nominal concrete pryout strength of a group of anchors, N

 : Nominal shear strength, N

  : Nominal shear strength of a single anchor or of a group of anchors when the strength is governed
by the steel strength, N

  : Factored shear force applied to a anchor or to a group of anchors, N

 : Modification factor for lightweight concrete

 : Strength reduction factor

   : Modification factor for tensile strength depending on the presence or absence of cracks

   : Modification factor for pullout strength depending on the presence or absence of cracks

   : Modification factor for shear strength depending on the presence or absence of cracks and
supplementary reinforcement

   : Modification factor for tensile strength to use post-installed anchors in uncracked concrete
without supplementary reinforcement

   : Modification factor for tensile strength of group anchors under eccentric loads

   : Modification factor for shear strength of group anchors under eccentric loads

   : Modification factor for tensile strength based on effects of edges

   : Modification factor for shear strength based on effects of edges

   : Modification factor for shear strength of anchors installed in concrete members having
   

.1.3 Definitions

· Distance sleeve
A sleeve that encloses the central part of an undercut anchor, a torque-controlled expansion anchor,
or a displacement-controlled expansion anchor and it does not expand.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

· Hooked bolt
A cast-in anchor anchored mainly by bearing of the 90°hook (L-bolt) or 180°hook (J-bolt) having a
minimum   of 3  .

· Supplementary reinforcement
Designed or placed reinforcement that connects the potential concrete breakout prism to the structural
member, but not designed to transfer the full design load from the anchors into the structural
member

· Attachment
A structural member that transmits loads to or receives loads from the anchor at the external to the
surface of the concrete,.

· Cast-in-place anchor
A headed bolt, headed stud, or hooked bolt installed before placing concrete.

· Anchor
A steel element either cast into concrete or post-installed into a hardened concrete member and used
to transmit applied loads to the concrete, including headed bolts, J- or L-shaped hooked bolts, headed
studs, expansion anchors, and undercut anchors.

· Anchor group
A number of anchors which have approximately equal effective embedment lengths with spacing
equal to or less than  between adjacent anchors when subjected to tension, or  between
adjacent anchors when subjected to shear.

· Anchor reinforcement
Reinforcement used to transfer the full design load from the anchors into the structural member.
Refer to .4.2(9) and .5.2(9)

· Anchor pullout strength

The strength corresponding to the anchor or a major component of the anchor sliding out from the
concrete without significantly breaking out the surrounding concrete.

· Undercut anchor
A post-installed anchor that develops its tensile strength from the mechanical interlock provided by
undercutting of the concrete at the embedded end of the anchor. The undercutting is achieved with a
special drill before installing the anchor or alternatively by the anchor itself during its installation.

· Edge distance
The distance from the edge of the concrete surface to the center of the nearest anchor.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

· Ductile steel element

An element with a tensile test elongation of equal or greater than 14 % and reduction in area of
equal or greater than 30 %.

· Effective embedment depth

The whole depth through which the anchor transfers force to or from the surrounding concrete: The
effective embedment depth in tension is generally the depth of the concrete failure surface and, for
cast-in headed anchor bolts and headed studs, the effective embedment depth is measured from the
bearing contact surface of the head.

· Brittle steel element

An element with a tensile test elongation of less than 14 %, or reduction in area of less than 30 %,
or both cases.

· Side-face blowout strength

The strength of anchors with deeper embedment but shallow side cover corresponding to concrete
spalling on the side face around the embedded head while no major breakout occurs at the top
concrete surface.

· Concrete breakout strength

The strength corresponding to some portion of concrete surrounding the anchor or group of anchors
separating from the member.

· Concrete pryout strength

The strength corresponding to a concrete spall behind short and stiff anchors which are displaced in
the direction opposite to the applied shear force.

· Projected area
The area on the surface of the concrete member that is used to represent the base area of the
assumed quadrangular pyramid failure surface.

· Special insert
Pre-designed and pre-fabricated cast-in anchors for bolting or slotted connecting attachment; Specialty
inserts are often used for handling, transportation, and construction, and are also used for anchoring
structural elements. Specialty inserts are not included in the scope of this appendix.

· Headed stud
A steel anchor conforming to the requirements of KS D 4106 and affixed to a plate or similar steel
attachment by the stud arc welding process before casting concrete.

· Expansion sleeve
The outer part of an expansion anchor that is moved outward either by applied torque or impact of
the central part: bearing is applied against the sides of the pre-drilled hole.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

· Expansion anchor
A post-installed anchor, inserted into hardened concrete that transfers loads to or from the concrete
by direct bearing or friction or both: If the expansion is induced by a torque of the screw or bolt,
they are torque-controlled expansion anchors. If the expansion is induced by impact forces acting on
a sleeve or plug and the expansion is controlled by the length of travel of the sleeve or plug, they
are displacement-controlled expansion anchors.

· Post-installed anchor
An anchor installed in hardened concrete. Expansion and undercut anchors are post-installed anchors.

· Five percent fractile

A statistical term which means that there is 95 percent probability of the actual strength exceeding
the nominal strength with 90 percent confidence.

.2 General Design

(1) Anchors and anchor groups shall be designed for factored loads by elastic analysis. Plastic analysis
shall be permitted where deformational compatibility is considered and nominal strength is
determined from ductile steel elements.

(2) The strength of anchors shall be designed to be equal to or exceed the largest required strength
determined from the applicable load combinations in 3.3.2.

(3) Where earthquake forces are included when designing anchors, the following additional requirements
of through shall apply.
This appendix shall not apply to the design in plastic hinge zones of concrete structures under
earthquake forces.
Post-installed anchors shall need qualification for use in cracked concrete and shall pass the
simulated seismic tests. Pullout strength   and steel strength of the anchor under shear   shall
be evaluated on the basis of the simulated seismic tests.
The anchor design strength related to concrete failure shall be used as   and   .  is
determined in accordance with .3(4),   and   are determined in accordance with .4.2, .4.3,
.4.4, .5.2, .5.3, and it is assumed that the concrete is cracked unless it can be demonstrated
that the concrete is uncracked.
Anchors shall be designed by the steel strength of a ductile steel element in accordance with
.4.1 and .5.1, unless either or is applied.
If the requirement of is not satisfied, the attachment connected to the structure by the anchor
shall be designed so that the attachment will undergo ductile yielding at the load no greater than
the design strength of anchors specified in .
If the requirements of and are not satisfied, it can be permitted to use the design strength
as 0.4 times the strength determined in accordance with . When several anchors are used, it
can be permitted to use the design strength as 0.5 times the strength determined in accordance
with .
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

(4) Modification factor  for lightweight concrete shall be in accordance with 3.4.4 unless specifically
noted otherwise.

(5) The specified compressive strength of concrete   used for calculation purposes in this appendix
shall not exceed 70 MPa for cast-in anchors, and 55 MPa for post-installed anchors. Where the
specified compressive strength of concrete is greater than 55 MPa when post-installed anchors are
used, post-installed anchors shall be qualified by testing.

.3 General Requirements for Strength of Anchors

(1) Strength design of anchors shall be based either on computation using design models that satisfy
the requirements of (4), or on test evaluation using the 5 percent fractile of test results for the
following. In addition, edge distances, spacings, and thicknesses specified in .7 shall be satisfied
to preclude splitting failure.
Steel strength of anchor under tension Eq. ( .4.1)
Steel strength of anchor under shear Eq. ( .5.1)
Concrete breakout strength of anchor under tension Eq. ( .4.2)
Concrete breakout strength of anchor under shear Eq. ( .5.2)
Pullout strength of anchor under tension Eq. ( .4.3)
Concrete side-face blowout strength of anchor under tension Eq. ( .4.4)
Concrete pryout strength of anchor under shear Eq. ( .5.3)

(2) The design of anchors shall be based on Eqs. ( .3.1) and ( .3.2), except as required in .2(3).

  ≥   ( .3.1)

  ≥   ( .3.2)
In Eqs. ( .3.1) and ( .3.2),   and   shall be the lowest design strengths determined from
all failure modes.   is the lowest design strength of an anchor or group of anchors as
determined from consideration of   ,   , either   or   , and either   or   .
  is the lowest design strength of an anchor or a group of anchors as determined from
consideration of   , either   or   , and either   or   .

(3) When both   and   are applied at the same time, interaction effects shall be considered in
accordance with .3(5).

(4) The nominal strength for an anchor or group of anchors shall be based on design models to predict
strength substantially corresponding to results of comprehensive tests and the materials used in the
tests shall be compatible with the materials used in the structure. The nominal strength shall be
based on the 5 percent fractile of the basic individual anchor strength. In this case, for nominal
strengths related to the concrete, modifications for size effects, the number of anchors, the effects
of close spacing of anchors, proximity to edges, depth of the concrete member, eccentric loadings
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

of anchor groups, and presence or absence of cracking shall be considered, and limits on edge
distances and anchor spacing in the design models shall be consistent with the tests that verified
the model.
The effect of reinforcement to restrain the concrete breakout shall be permitted to be included in
the design models of (4). Where anchor reinforcement is provided in accordance with .4.2(9)
and .5.2(9), calculation of the concrete breakout strength in accordance with .4.2 and .5.2
is not required.
For anchors with diameters not exceeding 50 mm, and tensile embedments not exceeding 635 mm
in depth, the concrete breakout strength requirements shall be considered satisfied by the design
procedure of .4.2 and .5.2.

(5) Resistance to combined tensile and shear loads shall be considered in case of design using an
interaction to calculate strength substantially corresponding to test results. This requirement shall be
considered satisfied by .6.

(6) Strength reduction factor for anchors φ shall be as follows when the load combinations of 3.3.2 are
applied.
Anchor governed by strength of a ductile steel element
(a) Tension loads 0.75
(b) Shear loads 0.65
Anchor governed by strength of a brittle steel element
(a) Tension loads 0.65
(b) Shear loads 0.60
Anchor governed by concrete breakout, side-face blowout, pullout, or pryout strength
Condition A Condition B
(a) Shear loads 0.75 0.70
(b) Tension loads

·Cast-in headed studs, headed bolts, or hooked bolts

0.75 0.70
·Post-installed anchors with Category 1
(Low installation sensitivity and high reliability)
0.75 0.65
·Post-installed anchors with Category 2
(Medium installation sensitivity and medium reliability)
0.65 0.55
·Post-installed anchors with Category 3
(High installation sensitivity and lower
reliability)
0.55 0.45
Condition A applies where supplementary reinforcement which is present to restrain potential concrete failure prism is
designed to tie the potential concrete failure surface into the structural member.
Condition B applies where such supplementary reinforcement is not present or governed by pullout or pryout strength.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

.4 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading

.4.1 Steel strength of anchor under tension

(1) The nominal strength of an anchor governed by the steel failure,   , shall be calculated on the
basis of the material properties and dimensions of the anchor.

(2) The nominal strength of a single anchor or group of anchors under tension,   , shall not exceed
Eq. ( .4.1).

        ( .4.1)

where  is the number of anchors in the group,  is the effective cross-sectional area of a
single anchor, and   shall be the smaller of   and 860 MPa.

.4.2 Concrete breakout strength of anchor under tension

(1) The nominal concrete breakout strength of a single anchor or group of anchors under tension,  
or   , shall not exceed the following values.
A single anchor


            ( .4.2)
  

A group of anchors


              ( .4.3)
  

where factors   ,    ,   , and   are defined in (4), (5), (6) and (7), respectively.   
is the projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors that is calculated on
the basis of the rectilinear geometrical figure formed from projecting the failure surface outward
 from the center lines of the anchor (in case of a group of anchors, from the center lines
through a row of adjacent anchors), and    shall not exceed    . And  is the number of
anchors under tension in the group, and    is the projected concrete failure area of a single
anchor with an edge distance equal to or greater than  and is equal to Eq. ( .4.4).

     ( .4.4)

(2) The basic concrete breakout strength of a single anchor under tension in cracked concrete,   , shall
not exceed Eq. ( .4.5).
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

      
  
 ( .4.5)

where    for cast-in anchors, and    for post-installed anchors. The value of  for
post-installed anchors can be increased above 7 based on separate product tests, but shall not
exceed 10. In addition, for cast-in headed studs and headed bolts with embedment depth of 280
mm  635 mm,   shall not exceed Eq. ( .4.6).

   
  
 ( .4.6)

(3) Where anchors are located less than  from three or four edges, the value of  used in Eq.
( .4.2) through ( .4.9) shall be the greater of  m ax  and 1/3 of the maximum anchor
spacing in a group of anchors.

(4) The modification factor for anchor groups loaded eccentrically under tension shall be calculated as
Eq. ( .4.7).


     ( .4.7)
 ′ 
 
 

where   shall not exceed 1. If the tensile force is applied to only some anchors among an
anchor group, only anchors under tension shall be considered for the determination of ′  used in
Eq. ( .4.7) and for the calculation of   in Eq. ( .4.3). Where eccentric loading exists about
two axes, the modification factor,    , shall be calculated for each axis individually and the
product of these factors shall be used as    in Eq. ( .4.3).

(5) The modification factor for edge effects for single anchors or anchor groups under tension shall be
calculated by Eq. ( .4.8) and Eq. ( .4.9).
If  m in ≥ 

then      ( .4.8)

If  m in  

then         

 m in
  ( .4.9)
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

(6) For anchors installed in an area of the concrete where analysis indicates no cracking when a
member is under the service load, the following modification factor can be used.
Cast-in anchors

    

Post-installed anchors, where the value of  used in Eq. ( .4.5) is 7.

    

Where the value of  for post-installed anchors used in Eq. ( .4.5) can be taken from the
separate product evaluation report for both cracked and uncracked concrete,    shall be applied
as 1.0. When analysis indicates cracking under the service load,    shall be applied as 1.0 for
both cast-in anchors and post-installed anchors, and post-installed anchors shall be qualified for use
in cracked concrete in advance. The cracking in the concrete shall be controlled by flexural
reinforcement or confining reinforcement in accordance with 6.3.3.

(7) The modification factor for post-installed anchors used for uncracked concrete in accordance with
(6) without supplementary reinforcement to control splitting is as follows.
If  m in ≥ 

then      ( .4.10)

If  m in  

 m in
then      ( .4.11)


where    determined from Eq. ( .4.11) shall not be taken less than  , and the
critical distance  is defined in .7(7). For all other cases, including cast-in anchors,  
shall be applied as 1.0.

(8) Where a plate or washer is added at the head of the anchor, it shall be permitted to calculate the
projected area of the failure surface for the failure surface projected outward  from the
effective perimeter of the plate or washer. In this case, the effective perimeter shall not exceed the
value of adding the thickness of the washer or plate to the outer edge of the anchor head.

(9) Where anchor reinforcement is developed on both sides of the breakout surface in accordance with
Chapter 8, the design strength of the anchor reinforcement could be permitted to be used in the
calculation of   instead of the concrete breakout strength. A strength reduction factor shall be
used as 0.75 in the design of the anchor reinforcement.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

.4.3 Pullout strength of anchor under tension

(1) The nominal pullout strength of a single anchor under tension,   , shall not exceed the value in
Eq. ( .4.12).

       ( .4.12)

where    is defined in following (6).

(2) For post-installed expansion and undercut anchors, the values of   shall be based on the 5 percent
fractile through the separate tests and evaluation. It is not permissible to calculate the pullout
strength in tension for such anchors.

(3) For single cast-in headed studs and headed bolts, it shall be permitted to calculate the pullout
strength in tension using (4). For single J- or L-bolts, it shall be permitted to calculate the pullout
strength in tension using (5). In addition, it shall be permitted to use values of   based on the 5
percent fractile through the separate tests and evaluation, but in this case, the effect of friction
shall be excluded.

(4) The pullout strength in tension of a single headed stud or headed bolt,   , in Eq. ( .4.12) shall
not exceed the value in Eq. ( .4.13).

       ( .4.13)

(5) The pullout strength in tension of a single hooked bolt,   , in Eq. ( .4.12) shall not exceed the
value from Eq. ( .4.14).

       ( .4.14)

where  ≤   ≤  .

(6) When a member is under the service load, the modification factor from Eq. ( .4.15) can be used
for an anchor which is located at the place where analysis indicates no cracking.

     ( .4.15)

Where analysis indicates cracking under the service load,    shall be taken as 1.0.

.4.4 Concrete side-face blowout strength of an anchor under tension

(1) For a single headed anchor with deep embedment close to an edge ( ≥  ), the nominal
side-face blowout strength,   , shall not exceed the value in Eq. ( .4.16).
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

   
  
  ( .4.16)

If  for the single anchor is less than  , the value of   shall be multiplied by the factor
     where  ≤   ≤ .

(2) For an anchor group with deep embedment close to an edge ( ≥  ) and anchor spacing
less than  , the nominal side-face blowout strength,   , shall not exceed the value in Eq.
( .4.17).

 
       
  ( .4.17)

where  is the distance between both outer anchors along the edge in an anchor group,   is
obtained from Eq. ( .4.16), and the modification factor for a perpendicular edge distance shall
not be applied.

.5 Design Requirements for Shear Loading

.5.1 Steel strength of anchor under shear

(1) The nominal strength of an anchor governed by the steel failure,   shall be calculated on the
basis of the material properties and dimensions of the anchor.

(2) The nominal strength of a single anchor or group of anchors in shear   shall be equal or less
than through :
For cast-in headed stud anchor

         (II.5.1)

where  is the number of anchors in the group,  is the effective cross-sectional area of a
single anchor in shear, and   shall be taken the smaller of 1.9  and 860 MPa.

For cast-in headed bolt and hooked bolt anchors and for post-installed anchors where sleeves do
not extend through the failure plane in shear

          ( .5.2)

where  is the number of anchors in the group, and   shall be taken the smaller of 1.9 
and 860 MPa.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

For post-installed anchors where sleeves extend through the shear plane,   shall be based on
the results of tests performed. Alternatively, Eq. ( .5.2) shall be permitted to be used.

(3) Where anchors are used with built-up grout pads, the nominal strengths of (2) shall be multiplied
by a 0.80 factor.

.5.2 Concrete breakout strength of anchor under shear

(1) The nominal concrete breakout strength,   or   in shear of a single anchor or group of
anchors shall be equal or less than the following values:
For shear force perpendicular to the edge of a single anchor


            ( .5.3)
  

For shear force perpendicular to the edge of a group of anchors


              ( .5.4)
  

For shear force parallel to an edge,   or   shall be permitted to be twice the value of the
shear force determined from Eq. ( .5.3) or ( .5.4), respectively. In addition, the shear force is
assumed to act perpendicular to the edge and with    taken equal to 1.0.
For anchors located at a corner, the limiting nominal concrete breakout strength shall be
determined for each edge, and the minimum value shall be used.

Factors    ,   ,   , and   are defined in (5), (6), (7), and (8), respectively, and   is
the basic concrete breakout strength value for a single anchor.    is the projected area of the
failure surface on the side of the concrete member at its edge for a single anchor or a group of
anchors and it shall be permitted to evaluate    as the base of a truncated half pyramid
projected on the side face of the member where the top of the half pyramid is given by the axis
of the anchor row selected as critical. The value of  shall be taken as the distance from the
edge to this axis and    shall not exceed     , where  is the number of anchors in the
group of anchor.    is the projected area for a single anchor in a deep member with a
distance from edges equal or greater than  in the direction perpendicular to the shear force.
It shall be permitted to evaluate    as the base of a half pyramid with a side length parallel to
the edge of  and a depth of  as following Eq. ( .5.5).

       ( .5.5)

If anchors are located at varying distances from the edge and the anchors are welded to the
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

attachment so as to distribute the force to all anchors, it could be permitted to evaluate the
strength based on the distance to the farthest row of anchors from the edge. In this case, it could
be permitted to base the value of  on the distance from the edge to the axis of the farthest
anchor row that is selected as critical, and all of the shear could be assumed to be carried by this
critical anchor row alone.

(2) When a single anchor in cracked concrete is subjected to shear, the basic concrete breakout
strength,   , shall not exceed Eq. ( .5.6).

   


    


   
    ( .5.6)


where  is the load-bearing length of the anchor for shear,    for anchors with a constant
stiffness over the full length of embedded section, such as headed studs and post-installed anchors
with one tubular shell over full length of the embedment depth,    for torque-controlled
expansion anchors with a distance sleeve separated from expansion sleeve, and  shall not exceed
 in all cases.
(3) For cast-in headed studs, headed bolts, or hooked bolts that are continuously welded to steel
attachments having a minimum thickness equal to the greater of 10 mm and half of the anchor
diameter, the basic concrete breakout strength in shear of a single anchor in cracked concrete  
shall not exceed Eq. ( .5.7).

   


    


   
    ( .5.7)


where  is defined in (2).

In addition, the equation shall satisfy following conditions;
for groups of anchors, the strength is determined based on the strength of the row of anchors
farthest from the edge;
anchor spacing  is not less than 65 mm; and
supplementary reinforcement is provided at the corners if  ≤   .

(4) If anchors are affected by three or more edges, the value of  used in Eq. ( .5.5) through
( .5.11) shall not exceed the greatest of:  , , and one-third of the maximum spacing
between anchors in the anchor group for all applicable directions.

(5) The modification factor for anchor groups loaded eccentrically in shear shall be computed as
follows,


     ( .5.8)
 ′ 
   
 
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

However,    shall not be taken greater than 1.0 and if the loading on an anchor group is such
that only some anchors are subjected to shear in the same direction, only those anchors that are
subjected to shear in the same direction shall be considered when determining the eccentricity of
′  for use in Eq. ( .5.8) and for the calculation of   in Eq. ( .5.4).

(6) The modification factor for an edge effect of a single anchor or group of anchors subjected to
shear shall be computed as follows,
If  ≥   ,

     ( .5.9)

If     ,


        ( .5.10)
 
(7) For anchors located in a region of a concrete member where analysis indicates no cracking at
service loads, the following modification factor,    , shall be permitted. However, for
anchors located in a region of a concrete member where cracking is occurred at service load levels
in analysis, the following modification factors shall be used:
     : for anchors in cracked concrete with no supplementary reinforcement or edge
reinforcement smaller than a D13 bar.
     : for anchors in cracked concrete with reinforcement of a D13 bar or greater between
the anchor and the edge.
     : for anchors in cracked concrete with reinforcement of a D13 bar or greater between
the anchor and the edge, and with the reinforcement enclosed within stirrups spaced at not more
than 100 mm.

(8) The modification factor for anchors located in a concrete member where     shall be
computed as follows,


    
  
( .5.11)

However,    shall not be taken less than 1.0.

(9) If anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with Chapter 8 on both sides of the breakout
surface, or encloses the anchor and is developed beyond the breakout surface, the design strength
of the anchor reinforcement can be used replacing the concrete breakout strength as   . A
strength reduction factor of 0.75 shall be used in the design of the anchor reinforcement.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

.5.3 Concrete pryout strength of anchor under shear

(1) The nominal pryout strength   and   shall not exceed the value from Eq. ( .5.11) and Eq.
( .5.12).
For a single anchor

      ( .5.11)

For a group of anchors

      ( .5.12)

where    for    mm; and    for  ≥  mm.   and   shall be
determined by using Eq. ( .4.2) and ( .4.3), respectively.

.6 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces

(1) Unless determined in accordance with .3(3), anchors or groups of anchors that are subjected to
both shear and axial loads shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of (2) through (4). The
values of   and   shall be as computed as .3(2).

(2) If   ≤    , then full strength in tension shall be permitted and   ≥   shall be
satisfied.

(3) If   ≤    , then full strength in shear shall be permitted and   ≥   shall be
satisfied.

(4) If       and       , then the following Eq. ( .6.1) shall be satisfied.

   
   ≤  ( .6.1)
   

.7 Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thicknesses to Prevent Splitting Failure

(1) Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors and minimum thicknesses of members shall
conform to (2) through (7), unless supplementary reinforcement is provided to control splitting.
Lesser values from product-specific tests performed shall be permitted.

(2) Unless determined according to (5), minimum center-to-center spacing of anchors shall be 4 for
untorqued cast-in anchors, and 6 for torqued cast-in anchors and post-installed anchors.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅱ Anchoring to Concrete

(3) Unless determined according to (5), minimum edge distances for untorqued cast-in headed anchors
shall be based on specified cover requirements for reinforcement in 5.4. For torqued cast-in headed
anchors, the minimum edge distances shall be 6 .

(4) Unless determined according to (5), minimum edge distances for post-installed anchors shall be
based on the greater of specified cover requirements for reinforcement in 5.4, or minimum edge
distance requirements for the products as determined by tests, and shall not be less than 2.0 times
the maximum aggregate size. In the absence of product-specific test information, the minimum
edge distance shall be taken as not less than:
Undercut anchors 6
Torque-controlled anchors 8
Displacement-controlled anchors 10

(5) For anchors where installation does not produce a splitting or that will not be torqued, if the edge
distance or spacing is less than those specified in (2) to (4), calculations shall be performed by
substituting for  a smaller value ′  that meets the requirements of (2) to (4). Forces applied to
the anchor shall be limited to the values corresponding to an anchor having a diameter of ′  .

(6) The value of  for an expansion or undercut post-installed anchor shall not exceed the greater of
2/3 of the member thickness and (member thickness - 100 mm).

(7) Unless determined from tension tests, the critical edge distance  shall not be taken less than:
Undercut anchors 
Torque-controlled anchors 
Displacement-controlled anchors 

(8) Construction drawings and construction specifications shall specify use of anchors with a minimum
edge distance as assumed in design.

.8 Installation of Anchors

Anchors shall be installed in accordance with the construction drawings and construction specifications
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅲ Crack Control

APPENDIX Crack Control

.1 General Considerations

.1.1 Scope

(1) This Appendix shall apply to durability, serviceability, or appearance of reinforced concrete
structures.

(2) Structures requiring water-tightness shall be in accordance with the provisions of this appendix.

(3) Structures without any specific requests from owner or client can be checked with the allowable
crack width for durability.

.1.2 Notations

  : Effective tension area of concrete, generally concrete area computed by effective tension depth ( )
of concrete at the vicinity of rebar or tendon and section width, mm

 : Tension reinforcement area in flexural member, mm

 : Effective depth, mm

 : Diameter of rebar or equivalent diameter of bundled bars, mm

 : Average rebar diameter when various : rebar diameters are used together, mm

 : Effect tension depth of concrete, mm

 : Clear concrete cover thickness of main reinforcement closest to concrete surface, mm

 : Modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa

  : Tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete at the age of 28 days (      ), MPa

 : Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa

  : Reinforcement stress at crack, MPa

  : Reinforcement stress at crack under cracking, MPa

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅲ Crack Control

 : Overall thickness or height of section, mm

 : Coefficient which takes account of bond properties

 : C oefficient w hich takes account of distribution of strain

 : Average crack spacing, mm

 : The number of rebars with diameter 

 : The number of rebars with diameter 

 : Tensile force at reinforcement

 : Tangent elastic modulus ratio between reinforcement and concrete,    

 : Time

 : Allowable crack width regarding durability and serviceability (leakage), mm

 : Design crack width, mm

 : Mean crack width, mm

 : Distance from top compressive concrete fiber to neural axis at cracked section, mm

 : Factor dependent on bond characteristic

 : Factor dependent on loading condition

 : Concrete strain

 : Mean strain of concrete between cracks

 : Reinforcement strain

 : Mean strain of concrete between cracks

 : Maximum tensile strain at boundaries of section under tension

 : Minimum tensile strain at boundaries of section under tension

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅲ Crack Control

 : Crack width evaluation factor considering crack width variation

 : Angle between rebar in the  direction and the direction of the principal tensile stress, °

 : Effective reinforcement ratio

.1.3 Terminologies

Flexural cracking
Crack due to bending moment, which does not propagate the entire of section

Hoop/direct tension cracking

Crack due to axial tension, which usually propagates the entire of section

Imposed deformation
Deformation due to creep, shrinkage, or temperature change when structure is subject to external
restraint

.2 Exposure Environment

(1) Environmental condition to which structure is exposed shall be considered when crack width for
durability is checked.

(2) Environmental conditions for steel corrosion are divided into four conditions such as dry condition,
wet condition, corrosive condition, and highly corrosive condition as defined in Table .2.1.

Table .2.1 Environmental conditions for steel corrosion

Indoor members
Dry
Inside normal residential or office buildings with no concern about corrosion
Outside buildings
Wet In soil
Inside buildings with humid air
1. Repeated wet-dry condition, especially members in soil with deleterious substances
causing steel corrosion below ground water level, or members exposed to freezing and
Corrosive thawing, and members with anti-freeze agent
2. Offshore concrete structures under seawater or non-extreme offshore
condition (gas, liquid, solid)
1. Significant harmful effect on steel corrosion
Highly corrosive 2. Offshore concrete structures exposed to ebb and flow, splash zone, or extreme salty
wind
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅲ Crack Control

.3 Crack Control

.3.1 Crack width control

(1) Crack width shall be checked with Eq. ( .3.1) when crack is checked through analysis.

 ≤  ( .3.1)

where   is design crack width calculated under sustained load, and   is allowable crack width
for durability, serviceability (leakage), or appearance.

(2) Sustained load for crack control is the sum of dead load acting continually during design life and
load sustained during not less than half the design life. Owner or client can decide the sustained
load considering characteristics of structure.

.3.2 Allowable crack width

(1) Allowable crack width to attain durability of concrete structure shall be in accordance with Table
.3.1.

Table .3.1 Allowable crack width in reinforced concrete structures,   (mm)

Environmental condition for steel corrosion

steel
Dry Wet Corrosive Highly corrosive
Maximum among 0.4 Maximum among 0.3 Maximum among 0.3 Maximum among 0.3
rebar
mm and 0.006  mm and 0.005  mm and 0.004  mm and 0.0035 
Maximum among 0.2 Maximum among 0.2
tendon
mm and 0.005  mm and 0.004 
where,  is clear concrete cover thickness of main reinforcement closest to concrete surface (mm)

(2) Allowable crack width to attain durability and to prevent water leakage in water treatment structure
shall be in accordance with .3.2.

Table .3.2 Allowable crack width for water sealing structures   (mm)

Flexural crack Crack through entire section

Non-contaminated water1) 0.25 0.20
Contaminated liquid2) 0.20 0.15
1) Facilities for portable water (water supply facilities)
2) Shall be permitted to be decided through deliberation with owner when contamination is very
severe
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅲ Crack Control

.3.3 Calculation of crack width

(1) Design crack width shall be calculated by

             ( .3.2)

where   is design crack width,   is average crack width,  is average crack spacing
calculated by Eq. ( .3.3) or ( .3.4).  is crack width evaluation factor in accordance with
.3.3(4).  is the mean strain in the reinforcement between cracks, and  is the mean strain
in the concrete between cracks.

(2) Average crack spacing,  shall be calculated by Eq. ( .3.3) where the spacing of the bonded
reinforcement does not exceed     . Otherwise, it shall be calculated by Eq. ( .3.4)

   
       ( .3.3)


       ( .3.4)

where  is the minimum cover thickness to tensile reinforcement or tendon,  is 0.8 for
deformed bar and 1.6 for plain bars or tendons as a coefficient which takes account of the bond
properties.  is 0.5 for bending and 1.0 for pure tension as a coefficient which takes account of
the distribution of strain.          shall be used when member is subjected to direct
tension with eccentricity or when crack occurs in local area of member, where  is the greater
and  is the lesser tensile strain at the boundaries of the section considered.  is the rebar
diameter or the equivalent diameter of bundled bars. For a section with  rebars of diameter 
and  rebars of diameter  , the equivalent diameter shall be calculated with
  
       .  is reinforcement ratio calculated for effective tension
area of concrete calculated by Eq. ( .3.5). The effective area of concrete in tension,   is
calculated by Eq. ( .3.6), where  is depth of effective concrete in tension, the lesser of
    or    for a section subjected to bending moment, or the lesser of    
or  for a section subjected to direct tension.


   ( .3.5)
 

     ( .3.6)

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Crack Control

(3) The mean strain is calculated from

     
    
                ≥  
     
( .3.7)

where   is the rebar stress at a cracked section.   is the rebar stress at a cracked section
right after cracking.   is calculated with flexural crack moment,   calculated by Eq. (4.3.2)
and moment of inertia for a cracked section.   is a factor depending on bond characteristic, 1.0
for deformed bars and 0.5 for plain bars or strands.   is a factor depending on loading
condition, 0.5 for repeated loading and 1.0 for others.  is the ratio of initial tangent modulus of
elasticity of concrete to elastic modulus of rebar.

(4) Crack width evaluation factor,  can be decided by owner and client considering characteristic of
structure.  is 1.0 for average crack width calculation, and 1.7 for the maximum crack width
calculation.

(5) Where crack occurs due to imposed deformation,         in Eq. ( .3.7) for the stress
in rebar at a cracked section shall be increased by the strain due to the imposed deformation.

(6) Where the angle between the axis of principal stress and the direction of the rebar, for members
reinforced in two orthogonal directions, is larger than 15˚, the maximum crack spacing  can be
calculated by




cos
    

sin
  ( .3.8)

where  is the angle between the rebar in the  direction and the direction of the principal
tensile stress, and  and  are the crack spacings calculated in the  and  directions
respectively.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅳ Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

APPENDIX Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

Ⅳ.1 General

Ⅳ.1.1 Scope

(1) The provisions in Appendix Ⅳ shall apply only to the design of two-way slabs supported at four
sides.

(2) The change in internal force of a slab caused by relative deflection of the members supporting the
slab shall be considered additionally.

Ⅳ.1.2 Notations

 : moment coefficients for two-way slabs in Tables .1, .2 and .3, which include   neg,
 neg,  DL,  DL,  LL, and  LL.

 : clear span in the direction of shorter side

 : clear span in the direction of longer side

 : moment in the direction of 

 : moment in the direction of 

 :   = shorter-to-longer span ratio in two-way slabs

 : uniformly distributed load per unit area. To calculate the negative moment and shear force,
  in Table Ⅳ.1 shall be a combination of dead load and live load multiplied by the load
factors. To calculate the positive moment,   in Tables .2 and .3 shall be separated
into those corresponding to the factored dead load and factored live load, respectively.

   : load distribution ratios in the directions of  and  shown in Table .4. These values
shall be used to calculate the shear force and support reaction force.

Ⅳ.2 Design Methods

Ⅳ.2.1 Limitations

(1) Two-way slabs shall be assumed to consist of strips in each direction as follows:
Middle strip is defined as a strip of slab that has one-half of the panel width, is symmetric about
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅳ Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

the panel centerline, and spans parallel to the direction of the considered moment.
Column strip is defined as a strip of slab that has one-half of the panel width, and one-half of
the panel area outside the middle strip.

(2) When the shorter-to-longer span ratio is less than 0.5, the slabs shall be assumed to be one-way
slabs.

(3) Discontinuous edges shall be designed for negative moment equal to 1/3 of the positive moment.

(4) For the calculation of moment, the locations of critical sections shall be assumed as follows.
For negative moment, support surface along the edge of slab
For positive moment, centerline of the slab

Ⅳ.2.2 Flexural moment

(1) For middle strips, the moments in shorter and longer spans shall be determined by Eq. (Ⅳ.2.1) and
Eq. (Ⅳ.2.2) respectively, using Table .1, .2, and .3.

  ＝     ( .2.1)

  ＝     ( .2.2)

(2) For column strips, the moments at the boundary lines with middle strips shall be taken as   and
  , and the moments shall be linearly decreased to 1/3 of   and   at the edge of slab.

(3) When negative moment at one side of support is smaller than 80 % of the other side, the
difference in moment shall be redistributed in proportion to the relative stiffness of the slabs.

Ⅳ.2.3 Shear force

Shear force in slabs shall be permitted to be determined assuming that loads are uniformly distributed
at supports according to Table .4.

Ⅳ.2.4 Supporting beams

(1) Loads applied to beams supporting two-way slabs shall be determined using Table .4, which
specifies load distribution percentages in the directions of  and  .

(2) In any cases, loads applied to edge beams shall be greater than the loads within the areas
surrounded by intersections of 45-degree lines drawn from the corners.

(3) Equivalent uniform load per unit length applied to the shorter beams shall be determined as
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅳ Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

   .
Table .1 Coefficients for negative moment of slab*
  : sum of uniformly distributed dead and live load multiplied by load factors
(  1.2  1.6  )

Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8 Case9

    

 neg 0.045 0.050 0.075 0.071 0.033 0.061

1.00
 neg 0.045 0.076 0.050 0.071 0.061 0.033
 neg 0.050 0.055 0.079 0.075 0.038 0.065
0.95
 neg 0.041 0.072 0.045 0.067 0.056 0.029
 neg 0.055 0.060 0.080 0.079 0.043 0.068
0.90
 neg 0.037 0.070 0.040 0.062 0.052 0.025
 neg 0.060 0066 0.082 0.083 0.049 0.072
0.85
 neg 0.031 0.065 0.034 0.057 0.046 0.021
 neg 0.065 0.071 0.083 0.086 0.055 0.075
0.80
 neg 0.027 0.061 0.029 0.051 0.041 0.017
 neg 0.069 0.076 0.085 0.088 0.061 0.078
0.75
 neg 0.022 0.056 0.024 0.044 0.036 0.014
 neg 0.074 0.081 0.086 0.091 0.068 0.081
0.70
 neg 0.017 0.050 0.019 0.038 0.029 0.011
 neg 0.077 0.085 0.087 0.093 0.074 0.083
0.65
 neg 0.014 0.043 0.015 0.031 0.024 0.008
 neg 0.081 0.089 0.088 0.096 0.080 0.085
0.60
 neg 0.010 0.035 0.011 0.024 0.018 0.006
 neg 0.084 0.092 0.089 0.096 0.085 0.086
0.55
 neg 0.007 0.028 0.008 0.019 0.014 0.005
 neg 0.086 0.094 0.090 0.097 0.089 0.088
0.50
 neg 0.006 0.022 0.006 0.014 0.010 0.003
* Edge marked by a bold line indicates that the slab is continuous over or fixed at the support. Edge
without bold line indicates the one with negligible torsional resistance.
*  is negative moment coefficient at the shorter span restrained edge , and  is negative moment
coefficient at the longer span restrained edge (negative moment coefficient at the restrained edge
when slab is only restrained in one side).
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅳ Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

Table .2 Positive moment coefficients for slab subjected to dead load*

  : uniformly distributed dead load multiplied by load factor (   1.2  )

Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8 Case9

    

 DL 0.036 0.018 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.033 0.027 0.020 0.023

1.00
 DL 0.036 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.018 0.027 0.033 0.023 0.020
 DL 0.040 0.020 0.021 0.030 0.028 0.036 0.031 0.022 0.024
0.95
 DL 0.033 0.016 0.025 0.024 0.015 0.024 0.031 0.021 0.017
 DL 0.045 0.022 0.025 0.033 0.029 0.039 0.025 0.025 0.026
0.90
 DL 0.029 0.014 0.024 0.022 0.013 0.021 0.028 0.019 0.015
 DL 0.050 0.024 0.029 0.036 0.031 0.042 0.040 0.029 0.028
0.85
 DL 0.026 0.012 0.022 0.019 0.011 0.017 0.025 0.017 0.013
 DL 0.056 0.026 0.034 0.039 0.032 0.045 0.045 0.032 0.029
0.80
 DL 0.023 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.009 0.015 0.022 0.015 0.010
 DL 0.061 0.028 0.040 0.043 0.033 0.048 0.051 0.036 0.031
0.75
 DL 0.019 0.009 0.018 0.013 0.007 0.012 0.020 0.013 0.007
 DL 0.068 0.030 0.046 0.046 0.035 0.051 0.058 0.040 0.033
0.70
 DL 0.016 0.007 0.016 0.011 0.005 0.009 0.017 0.011 0.006
 DL 0.074 0.032 0.054 0.050 0.036 0.054 0.065 0.044 0.034
0.65
 DL 0.013 0.006 0.014 0.009 0.004 0.007 0.014 0.009 0.005
 DL 0.081 0.034 0.062 0.053 0.037 0.056 0.073 0.048 0.036
0.60
 DL 0.010 0.004 0.011 0.007 0.003 0.006 0.012 0.007 0.004
 DL 0.088 0.035 0.071 0.056 0.038 0.058 0.081 0.052 0.037
0.55
 DL 0.008 0.003 0.009 0.005 0.002 0.004 0.009 0.005 0.003
 DL 0.095 0.037 0.080 0.059 0.039 0.061 0.089 0.056 0.038
0.50
 DL 0.006 0.002 0.007 0.004 0.001 0.003 0.007 0.004 0.002
* Edge marked by a bold line indicates that the slab is continuous over or fixed at the support. Edge
without bold line indicates the one with negligible torsional resistance.
*  is positive moment coefficient at midspan of the shorter span, and  is positive moment
coefficient at midspan of the longer span.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅳ Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

Table .3 Positive moment coefficients for slab subjected to live load*

  : uniformly distributed live load multiplied by load factor (   = 1.6  )

Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8 Case9

    

 LL 0.036 0.027 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.035 0.032 0.028 0.030

1.00
 DL 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.027 0.032 0.035 0.030 0.028
 LL 0.040 0.030 0.031 0.035 0.034 0.038 0.036 0.031 0.032
0.95
 DL 0.033 0.025 0.029 0.029 0.024 0.029 0.032 0.027 0.025
 LL 0.045 0.034 0.035 0.039 0.037 0.042 0.040 0.035 0.036
0.90
 DL 0.029 0.022 0.027 0.026 0.021 0.025 0.029 0.024 0.022
 LL 0.050 0.037 0.040 0.043 0.041 0.046 0.045 0.040 0.039
0.85
 DL 0.026 0.019 0.024 0.023 0.019 0.022 0.026 0.022 0.020
 LL 0.056 0.041 0.045 0.048 0.044 0.051 0.051 0.044 0.042
0.80
 DL 0.023 0.017 0.022 0.020 0.016 0.019 0.023 0.019 0.017
 LL 0.061 0.045 0.051 0.052 0.047 0.055 0.056 0.049 0.046
0.75
 DL 0.019 0.014 0.019 0.016 0.013 0.016 0.020 0.016 0.013
 LL 0.068 0.049 0.057 0.057 0.051 0.060 0.063 0.054 0.050
0.70 .
 DL 0.016 0.012 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.014 0.011
 LL 0.074 0.053 0.064 0.062 0.055 0.064 0.070 0.059 0.054
0.65
 DL 0.013 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009
 LL 0.081 0.058 0.071 0.067 0.059 0.068 0.077 0.065 0.059
0.60
 DL 0.010 0.007 0.011 0.009 0.007 0.008 0.011 0.009 0.007
 LL 0.088 0.062 0.080 0.072 0.063 0.073 0.085 0.070 0.063
0.55
 DL 0.008 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.005 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.006
 LL 0.095 0.066 0.088 0.077 0.067 0.078 0.092 0.076 0.067
0.50
 DL 0.005 0.004 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.005 0.004
* Edge marked by a bold line indicates that the slab is continuous over or fixed at the support. Edge
without bold line indicates the one with negligible torsional resistance.
*  is positive moment coefficient at midspan of the shorter span, and  is positive moment
coefficient at midspan of the longer span.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅳ Design Coefficients for Two-way Rectangular Slabs

Table .4 Distribution ratios of factored uniformly distributed load  in the directions of   and   to
calculate slab shear force and support reaction force*

Case1 Case2 Case3 Case4 Case5 Case6 Case7 Case8 Case9

    

 0.50 0.50 0.17 0.50 0.83 0.71 0.29 0.33 0.67

1.00
 0.50 0.50 0.83 0.50 0.17 0.29 0.71 0.67 0.33
 0.55 0.55 0.20 0.55 0.86 0.75 0.33 0.38 0.71
0.95
 0.45 0.45 0.80 0.45 0.14 0.25 0.67 0.62 0.29
 0.60 0.60 0.23 0.60 0.88 0.79 0.38 0.43 0.75
0.90
 0.40 0.40 0.77 0.40 0.12 0.21 0.62 0.57 0.25
 0.66 0.66 0.28 0.66 0.90 0.83 0.43 0.49 0.79
0.85
 0.34 0.34 0.72 0.34 0.10 0.17 0.57 0.51 0.21
 0.71 0.71 0.33 0.71 0.92 0.86 0.49 0.55 0.83
0.80
 0.29 0.29 0.67 0.29 0.08 0.14 0.51 0.45 0.17
 0.76 0.76 0.39 0.76 0.94 0.88 0.56 0.61 0.86
0.75
 0.24 0.24 0.61 0.24 0.06 0.12 0.44 0.39 0.14
 0.81 0.81 0.45 0.81 0.95 0.91 0.62 0.68 0.89
0.70
 0.19 0.19 0.55 0.19 0.05 0.09 0.38 0.32 0.11
 0.85 0.85 0.53 0.85 0.96 0.93 0.69 0.74 0.92
0.65
 0.15 0.15 0.47 0.15 0.04 0.07 0.31 0.26 0.08
 0.89 0.89 0.61 0.89 0.97 0.95 0.76 0.80 0.94
0.60
 0.11 0.11 0.39 0.11 0.03 0.05 0.24 0.20 0.06
 0.92 0.92 0.69 0.92 0.98 0.96 0.81 0.85 0.95
0.55
 0.08 0.08 0.31 0.08 0.02 0.04 0.19 0.15 0.05
 0.94 0.94 0.76 0.94 0.99 0.97 0.86 0.89 0.97
0.50
 0.06 0.06 0.24 0.06 0.01 0.03 0.14 0.11 0.03
* Edge marked by a bold line indicates that the slab is continuous over or fixed at the support. Edge
without bold line indicates the one with negligible torsional resistance.
*  is shear force coefficient at the shorter span edge, and  is shear force coefficient at the
longer span edge.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

APPENDIX V Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

V.1 General

V.1.1 Scope

(1) This appendix V shall be applied to the safety evaluation of an existing concrete structure when its
load carrying capacity is not reliable.

(2) In addition to the provisions of Chapter 20, those of this appendix V can be also applied.

(3) Investigation and test for the safety evaluation of a structure shall be performed sufficiently through
a precise visual inspection, non-destructive field test, and material test on major structural members.

(4) Based on the investigation and test data, the structural analysis shall be performed, the load
carrying capacity shall be evaluated, and then the safety of the members and the structure shall be
evaluated. If the evaluation by analysis is not reliable, a load test can be performed.

(5) The report for the safety evaluation shall include the descriptions on the analysis method used in
the evaluation, the analysis results, the calculation records, and the load test method.

V.1.2 Notations


 : Average value of the investigations and test results

 : i-th value of the investigations and test results

 : Standard deviation of the investigations and test results

  : Upper limit of the investigations and test results

  : Lower limit of the investigations and test results

 : Coefficient given statistically according to the number of the investigations and tests

 : Coefficient given statistically according to the confidence level

 : Specified compressive strength for the evaluation


 : Average compressive strength for the evaluation

 : Standard deviation of the concrete compressive strength obtained from the core strengths
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

 : Load carrying capacity for the evaluation

 : Required strength for the evaluation

 : Load factor for the evaluation

 : Design load factor based on this standard

 : Section force by the nominal load

 : Strength reduction factor

 : Nominal load carrying capacity

 : Structural condition coefficient

 : Load carrying rate

 : Dead load or related section force

 : Live load or related section force

 : Impact factor

 : Depth of a member, mm

 :
(a) Short-side span length of a two-way slab in a load test, mm
(b) Smaller value between center-to-center distance of supports and the combined length of the clear
span between the neighboring supports and the member thickness , mm
(c) In the case of a cantilever, the span is twice the distance from the support to the cantilever
edge, mm

 m ax : Maximum measured deflection, mm, see Eq. (V.5.1)

  m ax : Measured residual deflection, mm, see Eq. (V.5.2) and Eq. (V.5.3)

  m ax : Maximum measured deflection from the second test when the position of the structure is set as the initial
before starting the second test, mm. see Eq. (V.5.3)
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

V.2 Investigation and Test

V.2.1 General

(1) In order to evaluate the safety of a concrete structure, it shall perform to carry out investigations
and tests on the appearance of the structure, the material properties, condition of the structure or
members, and the acting loads.

(2) The contents and scope of the investigation and test shall satisfy the requirements necessary for the
evaluation, and the investigation contents and the test records shall be described in detail to make
the next evaluation of the structure be performed correctly.

(3) The results of the investigation and test, used as the data for determining the input evaluation
values for the structural evaluation, shall be recorded in detail according to the established schedule.

(4) Investigation and test shall record the results of visual observation and the results of inspection and
diagnosis about the maintenance and the limit of usage.

(5) Assessment engineer shall verify whether the related books and literature materials describe the
target structure accurately. If there is no available related books and literature materials,
investigation and test with a precision for the purpose of evaluation shall be carried out.

(6) In order to perform a field survey, a thorough inspection plan shall be established through a
preliminary investigation and the following items shall be considered.
Inspection scope and contents, and the using equipment.
Whether the investigation of the foundation of a facility and the surrounding ground, investigation
items and scope
Design documents and management history of the target facility for the inspection
Whether special structural features and problems of each facility exist or not
Scale of a facility and the difficulty of inspection
Applications of latest inspection technology and equipment
Details for qualification of the inspector and the safety management
Weather condition, site condition, and the surrounding environment
Other related matters

V.2.2 Methods for investigation and test

(1) The compressive strength and elastic modulus shall be estimated for the evaluation of a target
concrete structure, and the concrete compressive strength shall be obtained based on KS F 2422 or
by using the schmidt hammer test.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

(2) If it is required to evaluate the strength of rebar and tendon, a tensile strength test (KS B 0802)
on the rebar collected from the target structure shall be performed and the yield strength and
ductility of the rebar shall be determined.

(3) For the crack inspection, the shape of cracks present on the structure surface, width, length, depth,
and the area ratio shall be measured. As a result of a visual inspection on the whole structure, the
cracks shall be investigated in detail at the damaged parts with cracks and other defects.

(4) Items for the concrete surface deterioration survey include peeling, spalling, delamination, leakage,
efflorescence, and exposed reinforcement. For the inspection, visual inspection and simple
measurement tools shall be used. As a result of a visual inspection on the whole structure, the
deteriorated or damaged parts with cracks and other defects shall be investigated.

(5) Since dimension of a structural member may vary during the construction and operation of a
structure, the dimension variation shall be figured out by comparing it with design drawings. The
dimension of a structural member shall be checked at a critical section.

(6) Arrangement of bars shall be investigated and then compared and examined with those described in
the design drawings. If an accurate investigation result is required, a hole shall be drilled at the
investigation point and inspected.

(7) Dead loads and live loads imposed on a structure shall be investigated by considering the current
condition and usage of the structure.

V.3 Input Data for The Evaluation

V.3.1 General

In general, if an average value is taken as the input data for the evaluation, there is a risk to
overestimate the current structural performance due to the dispersion of the test results. Thus, depending
on the investigated characteristics, the upper limit, lower limit, and the average value shall be used as
the input data for the evaluation.

V.3.2 Calculation method of input data of material and structural properties for the evaluation

(1) Average value of the investigation and test results shall be calculated by Eq. (V.3.1).

 

   
  
(V.3.1)

Where,  = The average value of the investigation and test results

= Number of the investigations and tests
  = The i-th investigation and test result
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

(2) Dispersion of the investigation and test results shall be taken into account by the standard deviation
  calculated by Eq. (V.3.2).



     

   (V.3.2)
     

(3) The upper limit and lower limit of the investigation and test results shall be calculated as follows.

   
  
         (V.3.3a)

   
  
         (V.3.3b)

Where,   = The upper limit of the investigation and test results.
  = The lower limit of the investigation and test results.
 and  = Statistical coefficients provided according to the number of the investigations and tests
and the confidence level.
  = Standard deviation of test results
  = Standard deviation considering the difference between the structural inherent value and the test
data from a specimen

V.3.3 Material and structural properties

(1) Evaluation input value of the concrete compressive strength shall be accompanied as the following.
The evaluation input value of the concrete compressive strength (evaluation reference compression
strength) shall use the lower limit. If the lower limit is greater than the design reference
compressive strength, it is possible to take the design reference compressive strength as the
evaluation reference compressive strength based on the judgment of a qualified structural engineer.
In case concrete in a certain part of the structure is severely deteriorated, to evaluate the safety
of the structural part, concrete in that part shall be directly investigated using the calculated
evaluation reference compressive strength.

(2) The evaluation input value of the concrete elastic modulus shall use the average value of the
measured elastic modulus from collected cores.

(3) Strength and elastic modulus of rebar and tendon shall be conformed as the following.
It is a rule to use the lower limit of the measured test results as the evaluation input value for
the strength of rebar and tendon, but the design reference strength can be also used if the design
reference strength is smaller than it.
Evaluation input value for the elastic modulus of rebar and tendon shall use the smaller value of
the average value and the value in the test evaluation sheet.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

(4) Member dimension and rebar location shall be accompanied by the followings.
The evaluation input value for the member dimension and rebar location shall use the average
value or the value in the structural drawings. In case the gap between the investigation and test
results and the values given in the structural drawings is greater than the allowable value, a
unfavorable value of the lower and upper limits shall be applied. The gap between the member
dimension and rebar spacing also shall be adjusted to the unfavorable direction, too.
Member dimension and rebar spacing will differ depending on the internal position of the
structure so that the lower and upper limits shall be determined based on the degree of the gap
from the drawings rather than the standard deviation .

(5) The evaluation input value for the cover thickness shall use the lower limit.

(6) In case a measurement has been performed in practice, the average elastic modulus of the ground
shall be used as the evaluation input value. In the evaluation of a structure, the underground water
level shall use the actually measured average value and apply its corresponding load factor.

(7) Except for special cases, temperature and relative humidity can use the average value of the
measured data or the value obtained from the references as the evaluation input value.

V.3.4 Load characteristics

(1) Load factors and load combinations for the safety and serviceability of a structure can use the
values provided in the standards at the time of evaluation.

(2) In case load input value is evaluated by a proper probabilistic and statistical method ensuring the
same level of safety factor as the design, the load input value can use a size of load different
from that specified in the design documents through a detail site investigation. However, the
reduction of the live load can be allowed within 20 % of the input value and the reference value
in the design standards shall be applied to the loads other than the dead load and live load.

V.4 Evaluation by Analysis

(1) Analysis for safety evaluation of an existing structure shall be performed by the same manner for
the analysis method for the design.

(2) By the Eq. (V.4.1), the structure can be considered as safe if the assessment load carrying capacity
 is larger than the assessment required strength   .

 ≥   (V.4.1)

(3) The required strength for the assessment   shall be calculated based on Eq. (V.4.2).

       (V.4.2)

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

Where,  = The assessment load factor for the assessment of the structure
 = The design load factor according to this structural design standard
  = Section force due to working load

(4) Assessment load carrying capacity  shall be calculated based on Eq. (V.4.3).

     (V.4.3)

Where,  and  are the strength reduction factor and the nominal strength according to this
structural standard, and  is the structural condition factor.

(5) The nominal load carrying capacity of a bridge superstructure member shall be calculated based on
Eq. (V.4.4) and Eq. (V.4.5).

Nominal load carrying capacity = Load carrying rate(F) × Evaluation Live load (V.4.4)
Load carrying rate(F)

        
 (V.4.5)
     

Where,   = specified assessment resistance strength     and   = assessment
load effect by dead load and live load, respectively  = impact factor
However, when the road carrying rate is calculated by performing a field load test, the provisions
in V.5.4 shall be accompanied.

V.5 Evaluation by Load Test

V.5.1 General

(1) When planning the load test, the evaluation engineer shall carefully examine whether it is necessary
to perform the load test in evaluating the stability of the structure or member.

(2) The evaluation engineer shall develop a safety plan prior to performing the load test. The
appropriate measurement and safety management shall be carried out through the entire procedure
of the load test for the detection of the damage or failure of each part of the structure and for the
verification of the analysis of the behavior of a particular member and the safety.

(3) The safety measures shall not disturb the load test nor affect the outcome of the test.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

V.5.2 Static load test

V.5.2.1 Overview

(1) Static load test shall be applied to be able to reproduce the maximum load effects due to the
evaluation load. If there is no permanent deformation or damage in the structure or member, the
static loading shall be gradually increased up to the predetermined magnitude of the load within
safe range.

(2) The test loading for the load test of the flexural member of the building corresponding to 20.5 (5)
shall be greater than 95 % of the design load including the dead load acting on the corresponding
part of the structure, that is, greater than the largest of the followings.
0.95(1.2  +1.6  +0.5(   or  or  ))
0.95(1.2  +1.0  +1.6(   or  or  ))
0.95(1.4  )

where, the live load can be reduced within an allowable range by applying the live load reduction
factor as defined in the relevant codes for the corresponding structures.

(3) In case the load test results of the corresponding structure are applied to verify or correct the load
effects obtained by the analytical model, the load shall be large enough to properly simulate the
behavior up to the level that can determine the load carrying capacity.

V.5.2.2 Measurement and analysis of results

(1) For the structure or member in the load test, there shall be no potential crack which could lead to
the abrupt brittle failure such as the diagonal tensile crack or bond crack. There shall be no crack
or peeling which show a sign of failure, or excessive deflection which could affect the structural
stability.

(2) Measurements can be made at the location where the maximum response of the member is
expected in the static load test of a building. Additional measurements can be made when
necessary.

(3) Maximum deflection measured during load test of the flexural member of a building according to
20.5(5) and appendix V.5.2.1(2) shall satisfy one of the following criteria.

 
 m ax ≤  (V.5.1)


 m ax
  m ax ≤  (V.5.2)

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

If the measured maximum and residual deflections do not satisfy Eq. (V.5.1) or (V.5.2), the load
test can be repeated. The repeat test shall be conducted after more than 72 hours from the removal
of the first test load. The deflection recovery of the portion of the structure tested in the repeat
test shall be evaluated if it satisfies the condition of Eq. (V.5.3).

  
  m ax ≤  (V.5.3)


where    is the maximum deflection measured during the second test when the position of
the structure at the beginning of the second test is considered as the initial value.

(4) In the static load test of bridges, the analysis of the test results shall be carried out as much as
possible for the following items based on static deflections or static strains which are mainly
measured.
Location of neutral axis
Lateral distribution effect of live load
Symmetry of bridge
Comparison of analysis results and load test results

V.5.3 Dynamic load test

V.5.3.1 Overview

Dynamic load test can be carried out to obtain the dynamic characteristics and dynamic behavior of
structures and members.

V.5.3.2 Test method

Forced vibration test by applying vibration generator, ambient vibration test and truck driving test which
is mainly used for bridges can be applied. Other test methods can be used after getting the approval
from the owner or management authority.

V.5.3.3 Measurement and analysis of results

The analysis of the test results shall be carried out as much as possible for the following items based
on deflections, strains and accelerations which are mainly measured in dynamic load test.
Impact factor
Damping ratio
Natural frequency and vibration mode

V.5.4 Application of load test results

(1) If the evaluation engineer determines that the load test result matches well with the analysis result
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅴ Details of Safety Evaluation of Existing Structures

of the corresponding structure and member, the evaluation of the load carrying capacity shall be
done by considering the load test result. However, in case of a bridge for which the dynamic load
test is performed, the measured impact factor can be applied to the evaluation of the load carrying
capacity only when it is larger than the design impact factor.

(2) When the building or flexural member subject to load test does not satisfy the conditions and
decision criteria in V.4 or V.5.2.2(3), the qualified structural engineer can limit the use of the
structure within the lower load carrying capacity according to the load test or analysis results.

(3) When the load carrying capacity is determined based on the bridge load test, D in Eq. (V.4.5) is
the section force due to the dead load based on the member dimension decided by field
investigation, L is the section force due to the static live load considering the load distribution
determined by the field load test and I is the measured value of the impact factor only when it is
greater than the design impact factor. In this case, the numerical analysis model for determining the
section force shall be completed to be able to reproduce the actual behavior of the bridge closely
by reflecting the load test result.

(4) When the evaluation engineer decides that the stability of the entire bridge and member has no
problem in the load test procedure and distribution by the live load occurs enough, the section
force of the bridge can be determined by updating the numerical model using load test results.
During this procedure, the analysis method, the estimated maximum section force and the decision
of the load carrying capacity shall be approved by the management authority.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

APPENDIX Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.1 General

.1.1 Scope

(1) In Appendix , the concept and principles of performance-based design method, which is used for
the design of concrete structure, are defined.

(2) The client shall provide the capacity indices required for the performance-based design considering
safety, serviceability, durability and environmental demands of concrete structure, and specify the
quantitative targets.

(3) The performance or capacity of concrete structure shall be permitted to be verified by the design
methods specified in the main text of this Code or by using any evaluation methods based on the
design principles specified in Appendix .

.1.2 Definition of Terminologies

· Layered element
A plane member which is idealized with multiple layers to describe the out-of-plane flexural action
and the relevant shear of the plane.

· Nominal value
Representative or specified value of structure, member, or material, which are used for verification.
The design value is defined from the nominal value, considering the probability of failure.

· Ultimate limit states

Limit states indicating collapse or failure of overall structure or each member that cannot satisfy the
requirement of safety.

· Plane element
Two-dimensional elements including membrane elements subjected to in-plane stresses and
plate-bending elements subjected to out-of-plane bending.

· Non-linear analysis
Analysis methods addressing nonlinear behavior of concrete and steel reinforcement such as nonlinear
stress-strain relationship, cracks, creep, and shrinkage.

· Safety performance
Structural performance related to safety of users and adjacent people under any loading.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

· Required performance
Requirements of safety, serviceability, durability, and environments that are required by the owners or
the national codes.

· Serviceability performance
Structural performance related to the adequate use and convenience of the structure under considered
loads, such as deflection, vibration, aesthetics, etc.

· Serviceability limit states

Limit states that cannot satisfy the serviceability requirements such as deflection, vibration, aesthetics,
etc.

· Linear element
Line element idealizing members that have a large length compared to the cross-sectional dimensions,
such as truss elements, beams, and columns subjected to axial force, flexural moment, and/or shear.

· Linear inelastic analysis

Approximate inelastic analysis using secant stiffness corresponding to inelastic deformation of each
member, to describe the effect of inelastic deformations.

· Design life
Target life span of structure to be considered for design.

· Performance verification
Procedure or method to verify performance of overall structure or members

· Performance-based design for structures

Without prescribing the final design product, only performance criteria are required. Thus, any design
and construction methods are applicable if the performance requirements are satisfied. In general,
multiple performance targets are required.

· Plastic analysis
An inelastic analysis method for ultimate limit states assuming plastic behavior of members. In
general, elastic perfectly plastic behavior is assumed for the member behavior.

· Strut-tie model analysis

An analysis method using struts and ties to describe the behavior of reinforced concrete members or
a sub-assemblage. concrete is idealized as struts and reinforcing bars are idealized as ties.

· Reliability
Ability of members and overall structure to satisfy the prescribed requirements including the targe life
span.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

· Reliability analysis
Analysis to determine whether the target performance is satisfied, considering the uncertainties related
to structural resistance and loading effect

· Periodic or cyclic load

Repeated and reversed loading with a certain period, such as earthquake.

· Characteristic value
Representative value determined by statistic methods

· Limit states
Limit states of structure or members that no longer satisfy the serviceability, safety, durability, and
environmental requirements.

· Allowable plastic rotation

Plastic rotation of member plastic hinge zones that are permitted for member design. The design
values are determined by experimental evidence or adequate mechanical theory considering actual
failure mechanism.

· Environmental performance
Quantitative or qualitative effect of harmful materials developed by the activity involved in from
concrete manufacturing to disposal.

· Set or target environmental performance requirement

Requirements of selected environmental targets and index

· Environmental index
Index showing the ingredients affecting the considered environment or degree of environment
pollution.

· Environmental action
Physical, chemical, biological effects causing degradation of structural materials

· Uniaxial stress element

Struts or ties transferring only axial force of compression or tension.

· Biaxial stress element

Elements transferring in-plane membrane stresses and shear stresses
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.2 Design Principles

.2.1 General

(1) Design of concrete structures shall be based on the load combinations that are pertinent to the
intended usage of the structure. Specified design values of materials and member dimensions are
reasonably selected, and the structural performance shall be verified to satisfy the limit state
requirements, using adequate mechanical theory.

(2) Considering economy and reliability, concrete structures shall satisfy the serviceability, safety,
durability, and environmental requirements that are required by possible loading and environment for
the target life span.

(3) Concrete structures, when necessary, shall be safe against possible explosion and impact loading.

(4) The target reliability of structures, which are required for the verification of structural performance,
can be determined by the owner. The targets shall be satisfied by using adequate safety factor and
construction and quality control.

.2.2 Limit states

(1) The owner can provide the requirements of serviceability, safety, durability, and environment, which
can be limit states for the verification of the structural performance.

(2) Safety limit states can be expressed as items related to loads, stresses, and/or deformations.

(3) Serviceability limit states can be expressed as items related to stresses, cracking, deformations, or
vibrations.

(4) Durability limit states can be expressed as the time that is required for the ingredients degrading
environmental performance to reach the re-bars located at the extreme fiber, or the time that is
required for the concrete properties to be deteriorated to a certain level.

(5) Environmental limit states can expressed as environment-grading items that are caused by activities
of structural material manufacturing, construction, maintenance, disposal, and recycling.

.2.3 Load

(1) Design load shall include all possible loading effects and environmental effects that can occur
during the life span.

(2) The magnitude and properties of loads shall be determined following the legal design codes.
Otherwise, the magnitude of load can be statistically determined.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(3) The owner can determine the magnitude of loads, considering the required performance of the
structure. However, the magnitude of loads shall be greater than or equal to the requirements specified
in the legal design codes.

(4) When the magnitude of loads are determined by the owner, various factors, which affect the
structural performance, shall be considered. The factors include strength, duration time, geological
conditions, return period, dynamic properties, structural design life, and structural importance.

(5) In design, load combinations of all possible loads, which can occur at the same time, shall be
considered. The load factors can be determined considering the variation of the loads, and
characteristics of load combinations.

(6) Loading effects developing in structure and members can be estimated by .5.

.2.4 Materials

(1) Design characteristic values shall be defined as an adequate value among the average, upper bound,
lower bound, or nominal value which is determined from statistical analysis.

(2) If not specifically defined, the lower bound value of material properties is defined as 5 percentile
value, and the upper bound value is defined as 95 percentile value.

(3) When material nominal value is used for the characteristic material strength value, the nominal
value shall be defined from the Korean Industrial Standard, or data provided from testing laboratory
which is equivalent to the legitimacy of KS.

.2.5 Verification of performance

(1) Performance demand can be verified by statistical reliability analysis or using adequate safety
factors.

(2) Structural safety performances shall be verified for the following items.
When structural stability is considered, loading effect causing stability shall be greater than the
loading effect causing instability.
Design resisting strength of members and connections shall be greater than the loading effect,
when the ultimate limit states for failure or deformation are verified.
When the 2nd order effect is considered, it shall be verified that structural instability is not caused
by the loading effect.
When structural safety is verified against fatigue, it shall be verified that the members do not fail
due to the repetitive loading effect.

(3) Serviceability performances shall be verified for the following items.

Serviceability for concrete cracking shall be verified considering the effect of shear as well as
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

flexural moment.
Serviceability for deformation shall be verified considering the overall structure deformation as
well as the member deformation.
Serviceability for vibration shall be verified considering natural frequency and acceleration.

(4) Durability performances shall be verified for the following items.

Durability performance shall be verified against the most governing effect among the
environmental factors which deteriorate the structural performance.
The time that is required for the onset of re-bar corrosion shall be longer than the durability life
of the structure and members.
When necessary, the combined deterioration effect of various factors shall be considered.

(5) Environmental performances shall be verified for the following items.

Quantitative or qualitative effect of harmful materials developed by the activity involved in from
concrete manufacturing to disposal shall not exceed the limit state criteria specified by legal
design code and the owner.
Environmental performances shall be verified against air, water, soil pollutions, items affecting
work environment.

.3 Materials

.3.1 General

(1) Material properties to be considered in the analysis and design shall include the followings.
Compressive, tensile, and shear properties
Elastic modulus
Time dependent properties such as creep, relaxation, drying and autogenous shrinkage
The properties relevant to environmental loading such as water tightness and diffusion coefficient,
etc.
Thermal properties such as thermal expansion coefficient, etc.
Stress-strain relationship

(2) Characteristic values of material shall be determined by adequate test methods or reliable model
equations.

(3) When the effect of concrete age is considered to verify the performance of concrete members and
structures, reliable models or analysis methods shall be used.

.3.2 Compressive strength of concrete

(1) Specified design compressive strength of concrete shall be based on the uni-axial compressive
strength. To verify the performance of concrete members or structures, effective compressive
strength models based on bi- or tri-axial states of stress can be used.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(2) Specified design compressive strength of concrete shall be based on the lower 5% percentile of the
compressive strength distribution of 28 day standard cylinder specimens.

.3.3 Tensile strength of concrete

(1) Tensile strength of concrete shall be determined by testing or reliable model equations.

(2) For verification of serviceability performance of concrete members, the specified design tensile
strength of concrete shall be based on the lower 5% percentile of the tensile strength distribution.

(3) For calculation of minimum reinforcement ratio of flexural members, the specified design tensile
strength of concrete shall be based on the upper 95% percentile of the tensile strength distribution.

(4) Flexural tensile strength shall be determined by KS F 2408 or reliable model equations.

.3.4 Elastic deformation of concrete

(1) Elastic modulus of concrete shall be determined by KS F 2438 or reliable model equations.

(2) Poisson ratio and thermal expansion coefficient of concrete shall be determined by testing or
reliable models.

.3.5 Creep and shrinkage of concrete

(1) Creep and shrinkage strain of concrete shall be determined considering the effects of ambient
relative humidity, dimensions of the member, concrete constituents, concrete maturity at the first
loading, applied stress level, and loading duration.

(2) Total shrinkage strain shall be calculated by sum of drying shrinkage and autogenous shrinkage
strain.

.3.6 Stress-strain relationship of concrete

(1) The stress-strain relationship of concrete shall include maximum compressive strength, strain at the
maximum compressive strength, post-peak strength degradation, and ultimate compressive strain.

.3.7 Reinforcement

(1) Reinforcing bars based on KS shall be used. Otherwise, the mechanical properties shall be verified
in accordance with the test methods specified in KS.

(2) Adequate ductility, weldability, and bendability of reinforcing bars shall be guaranteed.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.3.8 Prestressing steel

(1) Wire, bars, and strands can be used for prestressing steel for prestressed concrete.

(2) Prestressing steel shall have no defect degrading the performance of reinforcement and low
possibility of stress corrosion.

(3) Prestressing steel shall have ductility and fatigue strength required in KS.

(4) Prestressing steel based on KS shall be used. Otherwise, the mechanical properties shall be verified
in accordance with the test methods specified in KS.

.4 Basic Structural Elements

.4.1 General

(1) This section defines the mechanical models of reinforced concrete members and the parts, which
can be used for structural analysis and performance verification.

(2) Concrete members can be idealized as uniaxial, biaxial or multi-axial elements, considering the
stress distribution.

(3) Concrete structure can be idealized as the combination of basic structural elements, considering the
stress and strain governing the behavior.

(4) Flexural moment in flexural members can be idealized as coupling forces of uniaxial compressive
element and uniaxial tensile element.

.4.2 Uniaxial concrete element

(1) Compressive and tensile stress-strain relationships of concrete shall be defined considering the stress
conditions of the surrounding area.

(2) For the design of uniaxial compressive element in flexural members, simplified concrete stress-strain
relationship can be used.

(3) Long-term effect on specified design compressive strength shall be considered when necessary.

(4) Post-peak strength degradation of concrete can be considered.

.4.3 Rebars and prestressing steel

(1) The stress-strain relationship of rebar can be idealized as elastic-perfectly plastic behavior.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(2) The stress-strain relationship of prestressing steel, having a unclear yielding point, shall be defined
to adequately describe the nonlinear behavior.

.4.4 Bond

(1) The bond stress-slip relationship between rebars and concrete can be used for sectional analysis of
reinforced concrete members

(2) The bond stress-slip relation between rebars and concrete can be defined by reliable models
considering the bar surface properties and confinement stress condition.

(3) The tensile stress-strain relationship of uniaxial tensile elements can be defined considering the rebar
bond stress properties.

(4) The tensile stress-strain relationship of concrete can be defined considering the tension stiffening
effect due to the bond between rebars and concrete.

.4.5 Biaxial element without cracking

(1) The stress-strain relation of biaxial elements can be defined on the basis of elastic continuum
mechanics

(2) The stress-strain relation of biaxial elements shall be defined considering the effect of multi-axial
stress state.

.4.6 Biaxial element with cracking

(1) After cracking, concrete can be idealized as an element mainly transferring compressive stress.

(2) The biaxial element behavior shall satisfy the equilibrium of average stresses and the compatibility
of average strains.
(3) The stress-strain relationship of concrete elements shall be defined considering the stresses and
strains in the surrounding area.

(4) The vertical/horizontal angle (slope) of an inclined compressive strut of concrete from the direction
of main rebars can be assumed in the range of 1/2 to 2.

.4.7 Strength of biaxial stress element

(1) The compressive strength shall be defined as the sum of the strengths of the rebars and concrete.

(2) Concrete tensile strength can be considered when necessary.

KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(3) The shear strength shall be determined considering the effect of tensile and compressive stresses
applied to the member, rebar yielding, and compressive failure of concrete.

.4.8 Multi-layer plate element

(1) When in-plane stresses are applied with torsional moment, flexural moment or out-of-plane shear,
the plate member can be idealized as two layer elements subjected to biaxial stresses in the top
and bottom of the cross-section.

(2) When out-of-plane shear is applied, the plate can be idealized as three layer plate elements
subjected to biaxial stresses, assuming that the top and bottom layer plates resist flexural moment
and torsional element, and the middle layer plate resist the out-of-plane shear.

.5 Structural Analysis

.5.1 General

(1) For structural analysis, dimensions, materials, loads and boundary conditions of the structure and
members shall be close to the actual structure conditions. When actual conditions are not known,
the analysis shall be conservative to ensure the safety.

(2) Structural analysis shall be performed addressing the effect of material properties, secondary effects,
long-term effects, temperature change, construction error, construction stage effect, permanent
deformation and geotechnical influence.

.5.2 Idealization of structure and member

(1) Material properties and structural elements shall conform to the provisions in .3 and .4.

(2) Structural members shall be classified into beam, column, wall, slab, arch and shell on the basis of
the member properties and functions. Structural analysis shall be performed to adequately describe
the structural behavior utilizing the combination of structural members.

(3) Additional detailed structural analysis can be used for the local regions where the linear strain
assumption is not valid. The structural model of detailed analysis shall satisfy the force-equilibrium
and displacement-compatibility at the interface between the part model and the entire model.

(4) Finite element analysis or strut-tie model shall be used for members with a short shear span such
as deep beam, deep coupling beam, short column, short wall and pile cap, etc.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.5.3 Linear elastic analysis

(1) Linear analysis of frames and members based on the elastic theory can be used for both the
service limit state and ultimate limit state.

(2) Effective stiffness addressing the effect of cracking shall be used for the sections where cracking is
expected.

(3) When long-term effects due to sustained loading is not negligible, reduced stiffness addressing the
creep effect shall be used for the cracked section.

(4) When linear elastic finite element analysis is used for ultimate limit state, an average value can be
used for the design of a small region considering the redistribution of stresses or internal forces.

.5.4 Linear elastic analysis considering flexural moment redistribution

(1) The linear elastic analysis based on limited redistribution of flexural moments can be used for the
analysis of structural members in ultimate limit state.

(2) When flexural moments of the ultimate limit state obtained from a linear elastic analysis are
redistributed, the redistributed flexural moments shall satisfy the static equilibrium under applied
loads.

(3) Limited redistribution of flexural moment for linear elastic analysis can be applied to continuous
beams and slabs subjected to gravity loads or seismic loads. In this case, inelastic rotational
deformation capacities of the members shall be verified.

(4) Redistribution of flexural moment obtained from linear elastic analysis shall not be permitted for the
members where the inelastic rotational deformation capacity is not accurately estimated, such as the
edge of prestressed concrete frames.

(5) Flexural moment redistribution shall not be permitted for columns.

.5.5 Linear inelastic analysis

(1) For structure and members showing inelastic behavior under the ultimate limit state, linear inelastic
analysis can be used to evaluate the load redistribution and plastic deformation.

(2) Secant stiffness shall be adequately assumed considering the expected inelastic deformations of the
structure or members. The secant stiffness shall be less than the elastic stiffness.

(3) Redistributed internal forces can be calculated from linear analysis of structural model with secant
stiffness. The inelastic deformation of each member shall not exceed the inelastic deformation
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

capacity of the member.

(4) When the demand of inelastic deformation capacity is excessive, structural analysis shall be
re-performed increasing the secant stiffness.

.5.6 Plastic analysis

(1) Plastic analysis can be used for the design and verification for the ultimate limit state.

(2) Sufficient ductility capacity shall be secured so that a intended plastic mechanism can form at the
critical section. The rotational deformation of the members obtained from plastic analysis shall not
exceed the allowable maximum rotation capacity.

(3) When static loading governs the overall behavior, loading can be assumed to increase
monotonically.

.5.7 Nonlinear analysis

(1) When force-equilibrium and displacement-compatibility are satisfied and nonlinear behavior of materials is
adequately considered, nonlinear analysis can be used for both design of the ultimate limit state and
service limit state. When necessary, the secondary effect due to geometric nonlinearity shall be included.

(2) For the ultimate limit state, the required rotational deformation shall not exceed the rotational
deformation capacity of the critical section.

(3) The result of nonlinear analysis for each load shall not be superimposed to calculate the effect of
the load combination. When static loading governs the overall behavior, loading can be assumed to
increase monotonically.

(4) For nonlinear analysis, the material properties that represent the actual stiffness and address the
uncertainties shall be used.

.5.8 Allowable plastic rotational deformation of members

(1) Allowable plastic rotational deformations of continuous beams and slabs resisting monotonic loads
shall be determined such that yielding of tensile reinforcing bars precedes the crushing of concrete
in the compression zone.

(2) The rotational deformation capacity of members subjected to earthquake load shall be determined
considering various failure mechanisms such as flexure-compression failure and shear failure of the
compression zone, buckling and fracture of re-bars which can be developed by reversed cyclic
loading. The rotational deformation capacity under cyclic loading shall not exceed the one under
monotonic loading.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.5.9 Secondary effect

(1) When structure and member behavior is significantly influenced by the secondary effect, the
secondary effect shall be considered to calculate the amplified moment and to verify the safety of
the structure.

(2) In the second order analysis, the deformed shape shall adequately address the effects of loading and
support conditions. On the basis of the deformed state, the force-equilibrium and resistance capacity
shall be verified.

.5.10 Prestressed concrete member analysis

(1) Inelastic deformation of prestressing steel shall not be permitted at the initial transfer of
prestressing, and brittle failure such as local crushing and splitting shall not be permitted at the
anchorage region of prestressing steel.

(2) For the analysis of prestressed concrete members, both the instantaneous losses due to concrete
elastic shortening, friction of prestressing steel, and anchorage set, etc., and the long term losses
due to the long-term deformation of concrete and relaxation of prestressing steel shall be
considered.

(3) Linear analysis for the primary and secondary effects of prestressing shall be performed before
considering redistribution of flexural moment.

(4) When rotation and rotational capacity are evaluated from the plastic analysis and nonlinear analysis,
the secondary effects by prestressing shall be considered.

.6 Verification of Safety Performance-Flexural Moment and Axial Force

.6.1 General

(1) This section shall be applied to the performance verification and design of the regions in flexural
members and axial members in which the plan section assumption is valid. Otherwise, the strut-tie
model shall be applied.

(2) This section shall be applied to the members with perfect bond between reinforcing bars or
prestressing steel and concrete.

.6.2 Determination of limit states

(1) The owner can provide limit states for the followings.
stress or strain limit of concrete
stress or strain limit of steel reinforcement
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

ductility or deformation limit of member

.6.3 Verification of performance

(1) Safety performance of members shall be verified by testing or using analysis model based on the
mechanical theory addressing the basic structural element models and material properties which are
specified in .4.

(2) For undisturbed regions, sectional analysis model using a strain distribution can be used, instead of
using the basic structural element models specified in .4.

(3) When nonlinear analysis based on linear elastic analysis considering moment redistribution according
to .5.4, linear inelastic analysis according to .5.5 or plastic analysis according to .5.7 is used
for performance verification, rotational capacity of the members shall be verified.

(4) The performance in undisturbed regions can be verified by sectional analysis using the following
assumptions.
Plane section remains plane after loading.
The tensile or compressive strain of reinforcing bars or prestressing tendons bonded to concrete is
the same as that of the surrounding concrete.
The tensile strength of cracked concrete can be neglected.
The compressive stress distribution of concrete subjected to compression and flexural moment can
be defined following the stress-strain relationship specified in .3.6.
The stresses of reinforcing bars and prestressing steel can be defined following the stress-strain
relationship specified in .3.7

(5) Rotational capacity of a member can be calculated by integrating the curvature at plastic hinge
region after the curvature distribution is calculated from the moment-curvature relationship in the
ultimate limit state. The ultimate curvature shall be defined considering the failure mechanisms
provided in .5.8.

(6) Sectional strength of a member can be determined from the strength corresponding to the ultimate
limit state using the moment-curvature relationship or sectional analysis based on the stress
distribution in the ultimate limit state.

. 7 Verification of Safety Performance-Shear and Torsional Moment

.7.1 General

(1) This section shall be applied to the verification of the performance of line members and plates
subjected to shear and torsion, and members subjected to shear friction.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.7.2 Determination of limit states

(1) The owner can determine the limit states of the followings.
stress or strain limit of concrete
stress or strain limit of reinforcing bars
Ductility or deformation limit of members

.7.3 Performance verification-line members without shear reinforcement

(1) The shear strength of line members without shear reinforcement can be determined by using the
concrete tensile strength. When the strength is required to be accurately evaluated, concrete tensile
strength, shear span to depth ratio, longitudinal reinforcement ratio, and size effect can be
considered.

(2) When shear strength of prestressed concrete member is calculated, the principal tensile stress of web
shall not exceed the tensile strength of concrete.

.7.4 Performance verification-line members with shear reinforcement

(1) The shear strength of the line members with shear reinforcement can be determined by idealizing
the member as a truss model based on the basic structural elements specified in .4.

(2) The design shear strength shall be defined as the minimum of the stirrup strength, bond strength of
flexural reinforcement, and strength of inclined web concrete strut. The strength of the inclined web
concrete strut shall be calculated as a reduced value considering a safety factor.

(3) In the shear design of members with shear reinforcement, yielding of the shear reinforcement shall
precede crushing of the web concrete.

(4) The angle of the concrete strut can be determined in a more sophisticate manner.

(5) The amount of longitudinal reinforcement shall be determined considering the additional tensile force
that is developed by the angle of the concrete compression strut.

(6) The details of shear reinforcement, and minimum and maximum amount of shear reinforcement can
be determined by validated methods.

(7) When the service limit state of members subjected to shear force is verified, the crack width under
the service load shall be smaller than the allowable limit.

(8) When the ultimate limit state of members subjected to shear force is verified, the shear force or
shear stress shall not exceed the shear strength of the cross-section or the material.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.7.5 Performance verification-line members subjected to torsion

(1) Torsional moment strength of the members with torsion reinforcement can be calculated by
idealizing each member as a space truss element models and thin wall section models in
accordance with .4.

(2) The design torsional moment strength shall be determined as the minimum of the torsional moment
strength in the longitudinal direction, the strength in the transverse direction, and the strength of
inclined web concrete strut. The strength of the inclined web concrete strut shall be calculated as a
reduced value considering a safety factor.

(3) In the torsion design of members, yielding of torsional reinforcement shall precede crushing of the
inclined web concrete strut.

(4) The area of the shear flow shall be calculated considering concrete spalling after significant member
deformation.

(5) When members are subjected to shear force, flexural moment or axial force as well as torsional
moment, the design torsional moment strength shall be calculated considering the effect of the
combined forces on the member behavior.

(6) When necessary, indeterminate torsional moment strength can be determined considering the
redistribution of torsional moment caused by cracking.

(7) The details of torsion reinforcement, and minimum and maximum amount of torsion reinforcement
can be determined by validated methods.

(8) When the service limit state of members subjected to torsion is verified, the crack width under the
service load shall be smaller than the allowable limit.

(9) When the ultimate limit state of members subjected to torsion is verified, the torsional moment or
torsional stress shall not exceed the torsional strength of the cross-section or the material.

.7.6 Performance verification-two way shear of slabs

(1) For supports or concentrated load area of plate members, such as slabs and footings, two way shear shall be
evaluated.

(2) The design strength of two way shear shall be computed considering the shear contribution of the
concrete and shear reinforcement, and the effect of openings shall be considered.

(3) In prestressed concrete, the two way shear strength of the concrete can be increased by the effect
of effective prestressing force.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(4) The shear strength of shear reinforcement can be determined by using a truss model based on the
basic structural elements in accordance with .4.

(5) When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces transfer moment to columns, the effect
of flexural moment in addition to two way shear shall be considered.

.7.7 Performance verification-membrane members

(1) The reinforcement in membrane members shall be arranged considering the magnitudes of the
compressive, tension and shear stresses.

(2) The design shear strength of membrane members with shear reinforcement can be determined by
idealizing each member as a truss model based on the basic structural elements in accordance with
.4.

(3) The design shear strength shall be determined as the minimum of the strengths of two orthogonal
reinforcements and the strength of inclined concrete struts. The strength of the inclined concrete
struts shall be evaluated as a reduced value considering the effect of transverse tensile cracks.

(4) The angle of the concrete compression strut can be determined in a more sophisticate manner.

(5) When the service limit state of members is verified, the crack width under the service load shall be
smaller than the allowable limit.

(6) When the ultimate limit state of members is verified, the internal force or stresses shall not exceed
the design strength of the cross-section or the material.

.7.8 Performance verification-structural walls

(1) The design shear strength of concrete can be determined by the concrete shear strength of line
members specified in .7.4. When a more accurate method is needed, the design shear strength of
concrete can be evaluated considering the effect of the axial force and flexural moment.

(2) When strut-and-tie models are used to verify the performance of structural walls, the design shear
strength can be determined considering the in-plane stresses according to the aspect ratio of the
wall.
(3) The shear strength of members with shear reinforcement can be determined by idealizing each
member as a truss model based on the basic structural elements in accordance with .4.

(4) The details of shear reinforcement, and minimum and maximum amount of shear reinforcement can
be determined by validated methods.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.7.9 Performance verification-shear friction

(1) Shear friction strength of members with friction reinforcement shall be determined from the force
equilibrium considering the frictional coefficient, and shall not exceed a certain limit.

(2) The frictional coefficient shall be applied differently according to the concrete surface treatment and
concrete type.

.8 Verification of Serviceability Performance

.8.1 General

(1) Structures and structural members shall provide adequate serviceability performance in order to
maintain proper performance in all predictable service load combinations.

(2) The owner can provide service limit states of structures and structural members. The service limit
state can be expressed by stress, crack width, deflection, and vibration on the basis of member
types and functions.

(3) The service limit states shall be determined by considering the purpose of structure and exposure
environment, etc.

.8.2 Determination of service limit states

(1) Compressive stress of concrete shall be limited in order to prevent irrecoverable deflections and
longitudinal splitting cracks.

(2) Tensile stresses of reinforcements and tendons shall be limited in order to have a proper safety
factor for preventing uncontrollable cracks.

(3) Crack widths shall be limited so that cracking, which causes damage of structure functions and
durability or unacceptable appearance, does not occur.

(4) Deflection limit shall be adequately determined so that deflections of concrete members or structures
do not significantly influence their functions or appearance.

(5) Vibration limit of structures shall be determined considering uncomfortableness of users, influence
on operation of machine, crack and cover loss of member, and etc.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

.8.3 Verification of performance

(1) Serviceability performance of members shall be verified by testing or using analysis model based on
the mechanical theory addressing the basic structural element models and material properties which
are specified in .4.

(2) It shall be verified that influences of possible load combination do not exceed the service limit
states of members.

(3) When serviceability performance is verified, the strength reduction factor of material shall be 1.0
unless specified.

(4) Crack width of concrete can be calculated by multiplying the maximum crack width and the mean
strain difference of concrete and reinforcement between adjacent cracks.

(5) Deflection of member can be calculated based on the moment-curvature relationship of cross
section.

(6) For the evaluation of long term deflection of concrete member, time dependent long term behavior
by sustained load shall be considered.

(7) Vibration of structure or members can be verified in terms of natural frequency or acceleration.

(8) When serviceability performance is verified, influence of force caused by deformation such as
temperature and dry shrinkage shall be considered.

.9 Verification of Durability Performance

.9.1 General

(1) This section shall be applied to verify whether structures are designed to maintain their structural
integrity against the influences of exposure environment during the design service life.

(2) The design service life shall be determined by the owner, and the exposure environmental condition
shall be determined by the engineer, considering the environmental condition of the location where
the structure is built.

(3) Structure shall be designed to be easily accessible to every part of the structure, to maintain the
structural function with economical maintenance and inspection during design service life.

(4) The shape of structure and the cover thickness for reinforcement shall be determined considering
the exposure environment, service life, and concentration of environmental loads.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(5) The mix design of concrete shall satisfy the material properties required in the design.

.9.2 Limit States of Material Deterioration Factors

(1) Durability limit against salt damage can be determined as the time when corrosion of the
reinforcement starts.

(2) Durability limit against carbonation can be determined as the time when carbonation reaches the
outermost surface of reinforcement.

(3) Durability limit against frost damage can be determined as minimum relative dynamic modulus of
elasticity when surface delamination and cracking of concrete occur.

(4) Durability limit against sulphate attack can be determined as the time when sulphate attack reaches
the outermost surface of reinforcement.

.9.3 Performance Verification

(1) Durability performance evaluation for concrete structures shall be conducted through reliable methods
considering both the mechanism and process of material deterioration.

(2) When durability performance for concrete structures is verified, the following deterioration factors
shall be considered:
Salt damage
Carbonation
Freeze-thaw
Alkali aggregate reaction
Sulphate attack
Other factors leading to reinforcement corrosion.

(3) The condition of each exposure environment, resisting properties of concrete against deterioration
factors, and cover thickness shall be considered when durability is evaluated.

(4) Basically, durability evaluation for structures is performed for each deterioration factor. When
necessary, the combined effect of multiple deterioration factors shall be considered.

.10 Verification of Environmental Performance

.10.1 General

(1) The environmental performance of concrete structures during their entire process shall be verified in
the design stage. The entire process of concrete structures includes design, construction,
maintenance, demolition, disposal and recycling of waste.
KCI Code 2012 APPENDIX Ⅵ Basic Requirements for Performance Based Design

(2) The required environmental performance, which addresses the effect on the environment, shall be
quantitatively defined using the indicators related to the use of resources and energy, disposal of
contaminants, resource recycling, etc.

(3) The environmental performance of concrete structures shall be verified by using adequate indicators
related to the influences on the environment. The reserved environmental performance of structures
shall satisfy the performance demand required by the owner or the national codes.

.10.2 Determination of limit states

(1) The environmental indicators shall be adequately determined considering the influences on global
environment such as global warming, local environment such as water and soil pollutions around
the concrete structure, and working environment such as noise, vibration, and scattering of
pollutants.

(2) The target of environmental performance for each environmental indicator shall be quantitatively
defined by the owner. The target of the environmental performance shall satisfy the minimum
requirement of environmental performance specified by the national code.

(3) In order to satisfy the target of environmental performance, the following demands shall be clearly
specified in the construction documents.
Material selection
Structural design
Method of construction
Maintenance procedure
Demolition and waste disposal procedures
Consumption limits of energy and resources
Limits of carbon dioxide emission, water and soil pollution, dust, vibration, and chemical
substances

.10.3 Performance Verification

(1) The reserved environmental performance of concrete structures shall be evaluated using the selected
environmental indicators, by the national code or standard methods provided by nationally
recognized institutions.

(2) It shall be verified whether the reserved environmental performance of concrete structures satisfies
the required environmental performance determined by the owner.
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

INDEX
One-way structure 4.3.1 Sloped footings 12.5.1
One-way slab 1.4, 3.4.1, 5.7.2, 6.3.3, 10.2.1, IV.2.1 Inclined stirrup 7.4.4
Prestressed concrete one-way slab 5.7.3 Stepped footings 12.5.1
Uniaxial stress element VI.1.2 Unbalanced moment 7.12.7
Uniaxial concrete element VI.4.2 Factored torsional moment 7.5.2
Two-way structure 4.3.2 Factored load 1.4
Two-way slab 1.4, 5.8.1, 6.3.3, 10.3, 10.6, 21.10.6, IV.2.1 Factored moment 10.4.5, 10.4.9
Biaxial stress element VI.1.2, VI.4.5, VI.4.6, VI.4.7 High corrosive III.2
Biaxial bending 6.6 Superplasticizer 1.4
Three-dimensional node I.5.4 Dead load 1.4
Class A splice 8.6.2 Curvature friction 1.4
Class B splice 8.6.2 Curved friction coefficient 9.4.2
B-region I.1.3 Aggregate 2.2.1, 2.2.2
D-region I.1.3 Frame member 21.9
T-beam 1.4 Nominal value VI.1.2
T-beam 3.4.10 Nominal strength 1.4, 9.9.1
U-stirrup 8.5.4 Nominal shear strength 7.12.2, 21.7.7, 7.12.3
Spacing limits 5.3.2 Piers 21.8.4
Distance sleeve II.1.3 Structural integrity 5.8
Hook 1.4 Structural trusses 1.4
Hooked bolt II.1.3 Structural diaphragms 1.4, 21.7
Strength 3.3 Base of structure 1.4
Strength reduction factor 1.4, 3.1.1, 3.3.3, 20.3.4, 21.2.3 Structural wall 1.4
Strength correction factor 2.2.2 Design documents 1.5
Strength design method 1.2 Structural steel 17.4.2
Stiffness 3.4.5 Structural lightweight concrete 1.4
Stiffness ratio 4.3.2 Structural Plain concrete 19
Rigide zone 1.4 Structural concrete 1.4
Steel core 1.4, 5.6.2 Structural Analysis 3.4
Steel reinforcement 2.2.3 Local zone 9.9.1
Imposed deformation III.1.3 Bent bar 1.4
High seismic hazard level 21.2.1 Crack 4.2
Dry III.2 Crack control III, III.3, III.3.1
Drying shrinkage 1.4, 2.2.2, 3.3.2, VI.3.5 Crack inspection V.2.2
Minimum thickness of diaphragms 21.7.4 Crack width evaluation factor III.3.3
Lap splices 8.6.1, 8.8 Calculation of crack width III.3.3
Lap spice length 8.8 Balanced strain 6.2.2
Layered element VI.1.2, VI.4.8 Balanced reinforcement ratio 1.4
Span length 3.4.7 Ultimate strain 6.2.1, 6.2.2
Boundary elements 1.4 Ultimate limit states VI.1.2
Lightweight aggregate concrete 1.4, 3.4.4 Mechanical anchorage 1.4, 8.2.6
Modification factor for lightweight concrete 3.4.4 Mechanical connectors 12.4.1
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Mechanical splices 8.6.1, 8.8, 21.2.6 Counterfort retaining wall 1.4, 13.3.3
Column 3.4.8, 10.5.4, 21.10.5 Equivalent embedment length 1.4
Reinforcement for columns and connections 5.6 Equivalent rectangular concrete stress block 6.2.1
Base plate 1.4 Equivalent frame method 10.5.2, 10.5
Column capital 1.4 Punching shear 7.12.2
Minimum flexural strength of columns 21.4.2 Tie reinforcement, tie bar 1.4, 5.5.2
Splice of column reinforcement 8.8 Rahmen joints 15.2.3
Safety evaluation of existing structures 20, V Rahmen 1.4, 15, 15.3
Foundations 21.8 Ready mixed concrete 1.4, 2.2.2
Foundation mets 7.12, 7.12.3, 12, 12.3, 21.8.2 Ribbed shells 1.4
Reinforcement in footings 12.3.3 Lift-slab construction 1.4
Shear strength of footings 12.3.2 Coefficient of friction 7.7.2
Prestressing tendon 1.4, 2.2.3 Piles 21.8.4
Spacing of tendon 5.3.2 Footing on piles 12.2
Relaxation of prestressing tendon 1.4 Pile cap 21.8.2
Friction loss in tendon 9.4.2 Butt welded splices 8.8
Stress of tendon 9.5.1 Plane element VI.1.2
Tendon anchorage zones 9.9.1 Buckling of outer surface 1.4
Modulus of elasticity for prestressing reinforcement 3.4.3 Sand lightweight concrete 1.4, 3.4.4
Allowable stress in tendon 9.3.2 Moment frame 1.4
Deep beam 1.4, 6.3.4 Moment magnification factor 6.5.7
Deep beams 7.8 Plain concrete strength 19.3
Spiral reinforcement 1.4, 5.5.2 Plain concrete footings 19.5
Volumetric reinforcement ratio 6.4.2 Plain concrete walls 19.4
Durability 4, 4.5, 4.5.2 Plain concrete practical design method 19.4.2
Specific durability requirements 4.5.4 Plain concrete pedestals 19.6
Verification of durability performance VI.9 Plane concrete 1.4
Bearing wall 1.4 Embedment length 1.4
Inner radius 5.2.2 Floor system 6.7.2
Corbel 1.4, 7.9 Thin-walled tube 1.4
Seismic hook 1.4 Half T-beams 1.4
Seismic design 19.8, 21 Half T-beams 3.4.10
Exposure levels 4.5.3, 4.5.4 Distributing bar 1.4
Exposure type 4.5.3 Concrete proportions 2.3.2
Exposure environment III.2 Proportioning strength 1.4, 2.3.2
Multistrand tendon 9.9.3 Mixture water 2.2.1
Bundled reinforcement 5.3.2, 5.4.4, 8.2.4 Strut 1.4
Reinforcement dowels 12.4.1 Wall footings 12.5.2
End-bearing splices 8.8 Design of walls 11.4
Monostrand 9.9.2 Design axial strength of a wall 11.4.2
Alternative torsion design method 7.6.5 Shear strength of walls 7.10.2
Alternative design method 11.4.3 Shear design of walls 7.10
Duct 1.4, 5.3.2 Minimum vertical reinforcement ratio in walls 11.3
Dynamic load test V.5.3 Minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio in walls 11.3
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Minimum shear reinforcement of walls 7.10.3 Serviceability 4

Minimum reinforcement ratio of walls 11.3 Service load 1.4, 3.1.1
Minimum thickness of walls 11.4.2 Serviceability limit states VI.1.2
Displacement-controlled anchors II.7 Linear element VI.1.2
Transition region 6.2.2 Cast-in-place anchors II.1.3
Beams 6.3.3, 21.10.4 Linear inelastic analysis VI.1.2
Reinforcement 10.6.3 Linear elastic analysis VI.5.3, VI.5.4
Reinforcement 2.2.3 Design considerations 1.3
Repair, retrofit 4.6 Design crack width III.3.3
Modification factor 8.2.2 Design displacement 21.9.2
Supplementary reinforcement II.1.3 Design strength 1.4, 3.3.3
Ordinary moment frame 1.4 Design strength 18.2.2
Web reinforcement 1.4 Design dimensions 6.4.1
Development of web reinforcement 8.5.4 Strip 1.4
Combined footings 12.5.2 Design displacement 1.4
Negative factored moment 10.4.3 Design unbalanced flexural strength 7.12.7
Uneven settlement 3.3.2 Design life VI.1.2
Redistribution of negative moment 3.4.2, 9.6.2 Design general consideration 3
Development of negative moment reinforcement 8.5.3 Design shear strength 21.10.3
Base plates of counterfort retaining walls 13.3.1 Earthquake design force 21.7.6
Transitional cracked section : class T 1.4, 9.2.2 Design axial strength 6.2.2
Attachment II.1.3 Design load 1.4
Corrosive III.2 Design load combinations 1.4
Statically indeterminate structures 9.6 Performance verification VI.1.2, VI.2.5
Bond VI.4.4 Performance based design VI
Bonded tendon 1.4 Plastic analysis VI.1.2, VI.5.6
Isolation joints 19.2.2 Plastic moment 7.12.4
Unbalanced moment 7.12.7, 10.3.3 Required strength 1.4, 3.3.2
Bracket 1.4, 7.9 Required amount of reinforcement 10.6.1
Uncracked section : class U 1.4, 9.2.2 Hollow sections 7.6.1
Nonbearing wall 1.4, 11.5 Solid sections 7.6.1
Elastic second order analysis 6.5.3 Collector elements 1.4
Non-linear analysis VI.1.2, VI.5.7 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement 1.4, 5.7
Unsupported length 6.5.1 Shrinkage joints 19.2.2
Inelastic analysis 1.4 Lateral-force resisting system 1.4
Torsional moment strength 7.6, 7.6.1 Horizontal shear 1.4
section for torsion 1.4 Immediate deflection 4.3.3
Torsion 7, 7.5 Net tensile strain 6.2.2
Torque-controlled anchors II.7 Auxiliary members in shell structures 1.4
Torsional reinforcement 1.4, 7.6.3 Shells 18
Reinforcement area of torsion 7.6.2 Schmidt hammer V.2.2
Torsion reinforcement spacing 7.6.4 Stirrup 1.4
Sway frame 1.4, 6.5.1, 6.5.7 Strut I.1.3
Serviceability performance VI.1.2, VI.8 Axial strength of strut I.3
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Strut-and-tie models I, I.1.3 Anchor group II.1.3

Design procedure of strut-and-tie model I.2 Installation of anchors II.8
Strut-and-tie model analysis VI.1.2 Anchor 1.4, II.1.3
Springing 1.4, 14.4 Anchor pullout strength II.1.3
Opening in slab system 10.7, 7.12.6 Strength reduction factor for anchors II.3
Slab system 6.7 Steel strength of anchor II.4.1, II.5.1
Slab 6.7.1, 7.12, 7.12.3, 10 Pullout strength of anchor II.4.3
Slab-beam 10.5.3 Concrete breakout strength of anchor II.4.2, II.5.2
Factored shear in slab system 10.4.8 Concrete side-face blowout strength of anchor II.4.4
Factored moment in slab 10.5.7 Concrete pryout strength of anchor II.5.3
Torsional member in slab 10.5.5 Anchor reinforcement II.1.3
Shear force in slab IV.2.3 In regions of low seismic risk 21.2.1
Supporting beams in slab IV.2.4 Thin shell 1.4
Minimum thickness for slab 4.3.1, 4.3.2 Undercut anchor II.1.3, II.7
Live load in slab 10.5.6 Epoxy-coated 2.2.3
Slab plate 1.4 Collector 1.4
Wet III.2 Cross tie 1.4
Frequency of testing 2.3.3 Edge distance II.1.3
Reliability VI.1.2 Ductile steel element II.1.3
Reliability analysis VI.1.2 Continuous slabs 10.2.2
Expansion joints 13.4 Continuous beams 3.4.1
Benzine-coated 2.2.3 Continuous 5.8.1
Arch rib 1.4 Gravity load 1.4
Structural details of arches 14.4 Offset bent bar 1.4, 5.6.1
Structural analysis of arches 14.3 Retaining walls 13
Slenderness ratio of arch 1.4 Cracked section : class C 1.4, 9.2.2
Bucking of arches 14.3.2 External forces 3.2
Arch axis line 1.4 Exterior corners 10.6.3
Arches 14 Required performance VI.1.2
Safety performance VI.1.2, VI.6, VI.7 Welded splices 8.6.1, 8.8, 21.2.7
Stability requirements 13.2.2 Welded wire reinforcement 2.2.3
Splices of deformed bars in compression 8.6.3 Splices of welded wire reinforcement 8.7
Development of deformed bars in compression 8.2.3 Development of welded wire reinforcement 8.3
Compression strut 1.4 Plain reinforcement 1.4
Compression member 6.4, 6.6 Maintenance 4.6
Transverse reinforcement for compression members 5.5.2 Effective stiffness 3.4.6
Compressive stress distribution 6.2.1 Effective length factor 6.5.6, 6.5.7
Compression-controlled section 1.4, 6.2.2 Effective depth of section 1.4
Compression-controlled strain 6.2.2 2nd moment of inertia of effective cross section 4.3.1
Compression-controlled strain limit 6.2.2 Effective section area 1.4, 6.4.1
Compressive reinforcement ratio 1.4 Effective embedment length II.1.3
Lap splice length in compression 8.6.3 Effective compressive strength I.3.2
Buttressed retaining wall 1.4, 13.3.3 Effective tensile force 1.4
Strength of anchors II.3 Effective prestress force 7.3.2
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Effective prestress 1.4, 9.4.1, 9.7.2 Shear design principles 7.2, 7.9
Visual inspection V.2.2 Shear 7
Stress 1.4 Shear reinforcement 7.4, 7.12.3
Stress-strain relationship VI.3.6 Spacing limit for shear reinforcement 7.4.2
Deformed reinforcement 1.4 Shear reinforcement design 7.4.4
Splices of welded plain wire reinforcement 8.7.2 Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement 7.4.1
Development of welded plain wire reinforcement in tension 8.3.2 Shear reinforcement type 7.4.1
Splices of welded deformed wire reinforcement 8.7.1 Overturning 1.4, 13.2.2
Development of welded deformed wire reinforcement in tension 8.3.1 Mat foundation 1.4, 12.5.2, 21.8.2
Development length of deformed bar in tension 8.2.2 Front walls 13.3.2
Splices of deformed bar in tension 8.6.2 Total factored static moment 10.4.2
Development of deformed bar in tension 8.2.5 Node I.1.3
Splices of deformed wire in tension 8.6.2 Nodal zone I.1.3
Development length of deformed wire in tension 8.2.2 Strength of nodal zone I.5
Tensile strength VI.3.3 Nominal strength of nodal zone I.5.2
Tension-controlled section 1.4, 6.2.2 Effective compressive strength of nodal zone I.5.3
Tension-controlled strain 6.2.2 Folded plate 1.4
Tensile steel ratio 1.4 Folded plate members 18
Development length of bars in tension 21.5.4 Coupler 1.4
Tension tie 1.4 Interface 7.7.3
General zone 9.9.1, 9.9.2 Connections 5.6.3
Long-term deflection 4.3.1, 4.3.3 Nominal shear strength of joint 21.5.3
Design coefficients for Two-way rectangular slab IV Positive factored moment 10.4.3
Joist construction 1.4, 3.4.11 Development of positive moment reinforcement 8.5.2
Design for slender compression members 6.5 Static load test V.5.2
Slenderness effect 1.4, 6.5.1 Development of reinforcement 8.2.4, 8.5.1, I.4.3
Scope of materials 2.1.1 Development and splices 8
Materials 2 Anchorage zone 9.9, 9.9.2
Jacking force 1.4 Development length 1.4, 8.2.2
Evaluation by load test 20.5, V.5 Anchorage zone 3.3.2
Base plate 13.3.1 Anchorage device 1.4
Compatibility torsion 1.4 Detail in development of reinforcement 8.5
All-lightweight concrete 1.4, 3.4.4 Five percent fractile II.1.3
Shear 7.11, 7.12 Erection bar 1.4
Shear strength 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.12.2, 21.3.4 Inspection and testing 20.2, V.2.2
Requirements of shear strength demands 21.4.5 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement 7.6.3
Shear friction design method 7.7.2 Strength of a strut with longitudinal reinforcement I.3.4
Shear friction 7.7 Longitudinal reinforcement 1.4
Shear friction reinforcement 7.7.2, 7.9.2 Longitudinal area of reinforcement 7.6.2
Design yield strength for shear friction reinforcement 7.7.2 Buckling 1.4
Shear head 1.4, 7.12.4 Pedestal 1.4
Hoop/Direct tension cracking III.1.3 Periodic or cyclic load VI.1.2
Shear Plane 1.4 Column strip 1.4, 10.3.1, 21.10.6, IV.2.2
Shear reinforcement 1.4 Factored moments in column strips 10.4.4
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Main reinforcement 1.4 Reinforced concrete 1.4

Spacing of longitudinal reinforcements 5.3.2 Wire 2.2.3
Joints 19.2.2 Initial tangent modulus of elasticity 2.2.2, 3.4.3
middle strip 1.4, 10.3.1 Maximum factored shear 6.5.4
Factored moments in middle strips 10.4.6 Maximum factored sustained shear 6.5.4
Intermediate moment frame 1.4, 21.10 Nominal maximum size 2.2.1
Regions of moderate seismic risk 21.2.1 Maximum compressive strain 6.2.1
Increase factor 2.2.2 Minimum thickness 4.3.1
Slabs-on-ground 21.8.3 Minimum area of bonded reinforcement 9.5.3
Bearing capacity 1.4, 13.2.2 Minimum torsion reinforcement 7.6.4
Sustained load 1.4 Minimum spacing II.7
Bearing strength 1.4, 6.8 Minimum shear reinforcement 7.4.3
Grade beams 11.5, 21.8.3 Minimum reinforcement 6.3.2, 7.8.2
Seismic hazard levels 21.2.1 Minimum reinforcement ratio 21.7.5
Earthquake load 1.4, 3.1.1 Longitudinal reinforcement 21.3.2, 21.4.3
Direct punching shear 7.12.7 Impact effects 3.3.2
Direct design method 10.4 Brittle steel element II.1.3
Splitting tensile strength 2.3.1 Side-face blowout strength II.1.3
Reference code 1.6 Story stability index 6.5.5
Qualified structural engineer 1.4 Settlement 1.4
Deflection 4.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4 Cantilever wall 1.4, 13.3.1
Fabrication of reinforcement 5.2 Caissons 21.8.4
Bending reinforcement 5.2.3 Concrete specimens 2.2.2
Coated factor of bars 8.2.2 Concrete strain 6.2.1
Size factor of reinforcing bar or wire 8.2.2 Testing of concrete 2.3.4
Rebars and prestressing steel VI.4.3 Concrete 2.2.2
Placing reinforcement 5.3 Recycled aggregate for concrete 1.4
Details of reinforcement 5 Anchoring to concrete II
Clear spacing 5.3.2 Specified compressive strength of concrete 1.4, 21.2.4
Reinforcement effect I.3.4 Evaluation of concrete 2.3.3
Steel reinforcement 2.2.3, VI.3.7 Concrete quality 2.3
Limits for reinforcement 6.4.2 Allowable stresses in concrete 9.3.1
Position factor of bars arrangement 8.2.2 Concrete breakout strength II.1.3
Bar spacing 8.2.2 Concrete pryout strength II.1.3
Design strength for reinforcing steel 3.3.4 Creep 1.4, 2.2.2, 3.3.2, VI.3.5
Specified yield strength of reinforcing bar 1.4, 2.2.3 Creep correction factor 2.2.2
Testing of steel reinforcement 2.4 Creep coefficient 2.2.2
Welded reinforcing bar 2.2.3 Ties I.1.3
Spacing of reinforcement 8.6 Tensile strength of ties I.4
Development of reinforcement 8.2, 10.6.2 Elastic second order analysis 6.5.4
Center spacing of reinforcement 6.3.3 Modulus of elasticity 1.4, 3.4.3
Center line of reinforcement I.4.2 Elastic deformation VI.3.4
Modulus of elasticity of reinforcing bar 3.4.3 Projected area II.1.3
Surface condition of reinforcement 5.2.4 Truss 21.7
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Characteristic value VI.1.2 Compression members of prestressed concrete 9.7

Special insert II.1.3 Prestressed concrete : PSC 1.4, 9
Special environments 5.4.6 Flexural members of prestressed concrete 9.5
Special boundary element 1.4 Development of prestressing strand 8.4
Joints of special moment frames 21.5 Prestressing steel 1.4
Special moment frame 1.4, 21.3, 21.4 Prestressing 1.4
Boundary elements of special structural walls 21.6.6 Precast plain concrete 19.7
Nominal shear strength of special structural walls 21.6.4 Precast concrete 5.4.3
Design forces of special structural walls 21.6.3 Precast concrete frames 21.9.4
Construction joint of special structural walls 21.6.8 Precast concrete structures 5.8.2
Coupling beams of special structural walls 21.6.7 Precast concrete integrity 16.3.1
Reinforcement of special structural walls 21.6.2 Precast concrete bearing wall 16.3.2
Design for flexure of special structural walls 21.6.5 Precast concrete segmental connection 16.4.1
Special structural walls 21.6 Precast concrete segmental bridge 16.4
Special structural coupling beams 21.6 Precast concrete construction 12.4.3
Special footing 12.5 Precast concrete connections 16.3.3
Wobble friction 1.4 Precast concrete products 16.5
Wobble friction coefficient 9.4.2 Precast concrete bearing 16.3.4
Expensive concrete 3.3.2 Precast concrete 1.4, 16
Eccentric shear design 7.12.7 Pre-tensioning 1.4
Eccentric shear strength 7.12.7 Effective width of flange 3.4.10
Eccentric shear stress 7.12.7 Flat slab 1.4, 10.3.4
Input data for evaluation 20.3, V.3 Flat plate 1.4
Average crack spacing III.3.3 Fatigue 4.4, 4.4.2
Average crack width III.3.3 Cover thickness 1.4, 5.4, 5.4.2, 5.4.3, 5.4.4, 5.4.5, 5.4.6
Average strain III.3.3 Load 1.4, 3.2, 3.2.1, 20.3.5, VI.2.3
Average compressive strength 2.2.2 Load factor 1.4, 3.1.1, 3.3.2, 20.3.5
Equilibrium torsion 1.4 Calculation of load 3.2.2
Post-tensioning 1.4 Load combination 1.4, 3.1.1, 3.3.2, 3.4.9
Standard hook 1.4, 5.2.1, 8.2.5 Limit states VI.1.2, VI.2.2
Development length for a bar with a standard hook 1.4 Secant modulus of elasticity 3.4.3
Standard deviation 2.3.2 Composite structures 4.3.4
Skin reinforcement, surface reinforcement 1.4 Composite member 17.4.3, 17.4.4
Wind load 1.4, 3.1.1 Composite concrete members 17
Prestress transfer 1.4 Vertical shear strength of composite concrete 17.3.1
Precompressed tensile zone 1.4 Connectors for horizontal shear of composite concrete 17.3.3
Prestress 1.4 Horizontal shear strength of composite concrete 17.3.2
Loss of prestress 9.4 Composite concrete compressive members 1.4, 17.4
Prestressed force 1.4 Composite concrete flexural members 1.4
Prestress concrete structures 4.3.3 Composite flexural member 17.3.4
Prestressed concrete beams 7.6.2 Analysis 3
Prestressed concrete members 7.3.2 Evaluation by analysis V.4
Serviceability of prestressed concrete members 9.2.2 Allowable crack width III.3.2
Slab of prestressed concrete 9.8 Allowable plastic rotation VI.1.2
KCI Code 2012 INDEX

Allowable plastic rotational deformation VI.5.8 Flexure and axial load 6

Tolerances 5.3.1 Moment magnification 6.5.5

Allowable soil pressure 12.2 Flexural member 1.4, 6.3

Allowable deflection 4.3.1 Serviceability of flexure members 9.3

Headed stud II.1.3 Transverse reinforcement for flexural members 5.5.1

Flexural discontinuity 1.4
Chord 1.4
Flexural cracking III.1.3
Field-cured 2.3.3
Flexural reinforcement 1.4, 6.3.3, 8.5.1
Field survey V.2.2

Cast-in-place composite-topping slab 21.7.2

Cast-in-place concrete 5.4.2, 5.8.1, 12.4.2

Modulus of elasticity of shaped steel section 3.4.3

Mineral admixtures 2.2.1, 4.5.4

Chemical admixtures 2.2.1

Spread footing 1.4

Development of headed anchored bars 8.2.6

Headed shear stud 5.4.5, 7.12.5

Headed bars 2.2.3

Magnified moment 1.4, 6.5.2, 6.5.6, 6.5.7

Expansion sleeve II.1.3

Expansion anchor II.1.3

Environmental performance VI.1.2, VI.10

Exposure Environment III.2

Environment index VI.1.2

Environment action VI.1.2

Sliding 1.4, 13.2.2

Base shear key 1.4, 13.2.2, 13.4

Live load 1.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.9

Radius of gyration 6.5.1

Non-sway frame 1.4, 6.5.1, 6.5.6

Transverse torsional reinforcement 7.6.3

Transverse reinforcement 21.3.3, 21.4.4, 21.5.2

Transverse reinforcement index 8.2.2

Distance between lateral supports 6.3.1

Transverse reinforcement 5.5

Lateral load 1.4

Post-installed anchor II.1.3

Hoop 1.4